0% found this document useful (0 votes)
5K views750 pages

xt-4 Часть2 PDF

Uploaded by

nsn-ruk
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
5K views750 pages

xt-4 Часть2 PDF

Uploaded by

nsn-ruk
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 750
STOP LAMP CIRCUIT < DTCICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] STOP LAMP CIRCUIT Component Function Check Lapa UTRESSS 1 .cHECK STOP LAMP OPERATION 7._Turm ignition switch ON. 2. With operating the brake pedal, check that the stop lamp and high-mounted stop lamp is turned ON. Bepresiea {Stoo yiniptndtiiairinounind siop tame Fullyre- Stop lamp and high-mounted stop lamp leased OFF Is it normal? YES >> Stop lamp circuit is normal NO >> Refer to EXL-158, "Diagnosis Procedure" Diagnosis Procedure igh 1 check syMPTom heck symptom (A or B) Symptom stop lamp and high-mounted stop lamp are not tumed ON ‘Any of stop lamp and high-mounted stop lamp are not tured ON Which symptom is detected? A >>GOTO2. B >>GOTO7. 2. CHECK FUSE T_ Tum ignilion switch OFF. 2. Check that the following fuse is not fusing VT models Unit Tecaton Fuse No, capacty > BoM #10 + Stop lamp switeh | Fuse block (8) 10a Stop lamp switch 0 MT models Tar Tocaton Fuse No. Capacty > BoM #10 + Stop lamp switch | Fuse block (8) 10a ‘Stop lamp saltch #20 isthe inspection resull normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown. 3.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY (STOP LAMP) 7. Disconnect BGM connector. 2. Check voltage between BCM hamess connector and ground. EXL-158 STOP LAMP CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] Bow a Voltage Connector Terminal coy 16 Ground eV [sthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO4, NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 4. cHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY 7, Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. 2. Connect BCM connector. 3, Turn ignition switch ON. 4, Check voltage between stop lamp switch hamess connector and ground. evT motels _ Voltage Comecior 7 Ens Ground 9-16V 3 Wt madels Stop ramp switch Votage Comecior Terminal 7 E12 ; Ground o-18v isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTOS. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 5.cHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) 7, Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. 3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and stop lamp switch harness connector. VT models BoM Slop amp Salih a Contry Connector Terminal Connedor Terminal 187 2 Basted £23 ENS 158 a Basted MrT models Bow Slap amp Salih ee Contry Connector Terminal Connector Terminal 157 2 Enisted E23 erat 158 a Easied isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO6. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 6. cHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Check stop lamp switch, Refer to EXL-167, “Component Insweciion™. EXL-159 STOP LAMP CIRCUIT < DTCICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, “Removal and installation. NO’ >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer fo BR-21, "Removal and Installation’ (LHD models) or BR-85, “Removal and Installation” (RHD models). 7 .CHECK STOP LAMP / HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE ‘Win CONSULT 1. Disconnect rear combination lamp (body side) and high-mounted stop lamp connectors. 2. Tum ignition switch ON. 3. Select “HEAD LAMP" of “BCM" using CONSULT. 4. Solect “STOP LAMP 1", “STOP LAMP 2° or “STOP LAMP 3° in “Active Test” mode. 5. With operating the test lems, check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground sep lamp RH cline Vatiage ee ae Teste (Aprox) Connector [Terminal on 3=16V B48 129 cons | stoPLAMe 4 oF ov ‘Sp lamp UH Sc votage SS es Te Approx.) Connector | Terminal on on ev 246 124 creuns | stop Lame2 Of ov Highmountes oo ame Votiage Testitem — Connector | Tenia oF 316 a7 9 rouna | STOP LAMPS on wv Asthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTOS, NO >>GOTO8. 8. CHECK STOP LAMP / HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) 7, Tur ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. 3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Stop lamp Bow = Continuity ‘Connector Terminal RH 729 Bas Grouna Not existed tH 734 High-mounted stop lamp a ee Continuity ‘Connector Terminal Ba 38 Ground Nat existed isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121. "Removal and Installation”. EXL-160 STOP LAMP CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] NO >> Repair or replace hamess. Q.cHECK STOP LAMP / HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (OPEN) 1. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. 3. Check continuity between BCM hamess connector and each stop lamp harness connector. Sep lame BoM Fear combination lamp (Boa 50a meee ‘Continuity Connecter Terminal Connector Terminal 7H 128 B59 Bas 2 Exlses iH 134 30 Wiah-mounted op mp BoM Fighmaunted sop am f a Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Bar 39 Disa 7 Basted [she inspection result normal YES >>GOTO10. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 1.0..cHeck STOP LAMP / HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT ‘Check continuity between each stop lamp hamess connector and ground. op amp ‘Rear combination lamp (body ade) Connector Tenminal RH Bee LH B20 2 Continuity 4 Ground Existes High-meunted stop lamp Figh-mounted stop amp Connector Terminal Dist z Groune Basted Isthe inspection result normal? YES-1 >> Stop lamp: GO TO 11 Ea YES-2 >> High-mounted stop lamp: Replace high-mounted stop lamp. Refer to EXL-207, "Removal and Installation" NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 11 .cHEck sToP LAMP BULB heck the applicable stop lamp bulb Istthe inspection result normal? YES >> Check the corresponding stop lamp bulb socket and harness. Repair or replace if necessary. NO >> Replace the corresponding stop lamp bulb. Refer to EXL-204, "REAR COMBINATION LAMP {BODY SIDE) : Replacement”. = Continuity Component Inspection 1 .cHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-1 7, Tum ignition switch OFF 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. 3. Check continuity of stop lamp switch terminals. EXL-161 STOP LAMP CIRCUIT [LED HEADLAMP} ‘evT maces ‘Stop lamp switch awa ‘Condition ‘Continuity Depressed Este 1 2 Fully released | Not existed Brake pedal e a Depressed Basted Fully released | Notexisted WT modes ‘Sop lamp switch Conditon Continuit Terminal Y 5 Depressed Basted 1 Fully reeased | _ Notexisted Broke pedal F 5 Depressed Not eristed Fly released Existed Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >>GOTO2 2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-2 1. Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-11. “Inspection and Adjustment” (LHD models) or BR-75. “inspection and Adjustment” (RHD models). 2. Check continuity of stop lamp switch terminals. cuTmeaels ‘Sop lamp switch ‘Condition Continuity Terminal 2 : Depressed Basted Fully eeased | _Notenisted Brake pedal 3 i Depressed Eisted Fully released | _Notenisted WT models ‘Stop lamp switch Conditon CContinulty Terminal 3 : Depressed Exste Fully released | Not existed Brake pedal B 5 Depressed Not existed Fal released Enisted Asthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-21, "Remo (RHD models), ‘and Installation’ (LHD models) or 88-85. EXL-162 FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT Component Function Check moose 1 .cHECK FRONT FOG LAMP OPERATION With CONSULT. 1, Select "FRONT FOG LAMP" in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 2. With operating the test items, check that the front fog lamp is turned ON. On _: Front fog lamp ON oft ront fog lamp OFF isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Front fog lamp circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to EXL-163, "Diagnosis Procedure’, Diagnosis Procedure waomecnoereste 1 .cHECK FRONT FOG LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE With CONSULT 4, Turn ignition switch OFF, 2. Disconnect front fog lamp connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Select "FRONT FOG LAMP” in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 5, With operating the test items, check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground, IPD ER - Testitem Votiage Connector Teminal On a 16V RH E149 aT — — FRONT FOG = Groun: S| Lae On a= 16V uw e148 3 on on1V isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2 NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-50. "Removal and Installation”. 2. CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 7, Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R hamess connector and front fog lamp harness connector. POM ER Frontfog amp T Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal RA ary a E168 * ea a 1 Exsted tH Ms at E169 Jsthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.cHECK FRONT FOG LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT ‘Check continuity between front fog lamp hamess connector and ground, EXL-163 FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT [LED HEADLAMP} RH Front fog lamp ‘Cannecior Terminal Continuity tH Ei68 E168 2 Ground Existed ISthe inspection result normal? YES NO EXL-164 >> Replace the corresponding front fog lamp bulb. Refer to EXL-193. ‘Replacement. >> Repair or replace hamess. REAR FOG LAMP CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] REAR FOG LAMP CIRCUIT Component Function Check wroaamenornes 1 CHECK REAR FOG LAMP OPERATION )With CONSULT 1. Select ‘HEAD LAMP” of "BCI" using CONSULT. 2. Select ‘RR FOG LAMP" in “Active Test” mode. 3. With operating the test items, check that the rear fog lamp is turned ON. On —_—_: Rear fog lamp ON off fear fog lamp OFF Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Rear fog lamp circuit is normal, NO >> Refer to EXL-165, "Diagnosis Procedure". Diagnosis Procedure japammee 1 .cHECK REAR FOG LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE (@With CONSULT 4. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rear fog lamp connector. 3. Tum ignition switch ON. 4, Select ‘HEAD LAMP” of "BCM” using CONSULT. 5, Select "RR FOG LAMP” in ‘Active Test” mode. 6, With operating the test items, check voltage betvieen rear fog lamp harness connector and ground. Rear fog lamp Testitem Vottage Connector Terminal on o-16V e162 2 Ground | RR FOGLAMP Of ov, YES >>GOTO4, No >>GOTO2. 2. CHECK REAR FOG LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (OPEN) 7, Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. 3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear fog lamp harness connector. ecw Rear (og amp Contry Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Bae 2 BE 2 Existed Isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.cHECK REAR FOG LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) ‘Check continuity between BOM harness connector and ground. EXL-165 REAR FOG LAMP CIRCUIT < DTCICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] —__ _| Cont Connector Terminal re ne Bae 1 ‘Ground Not ensied {sthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BOM. Refer to NO >> Repair or replace harness. 4. CHECK REAR FOG LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT 7, Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between rear fog lamp hamess connector and ground, Rearfoglene = Conti ‘Connector Terminal i Bez 7 Sanne exe [sthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTOS. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 5.CHECK REAR FOG LAMP BULB Check rear fog lamp bulb. sthe inspection result normal? YES >> Check rear fog lamp bulb socket. Repair or replace if necessary. NO >> Replace rear fog lamp bulb. Refer to EXL-204. "REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BODY SIDE); Replacement”. EXL-166 TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT Component Function Check 1 .CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP OPERATION 7,_Turn ignition switch ON, 2. With operating the turn signal switch, check that the tun signal lamp is blinks. Right + Turn signal lamps RH blink Left Turn signal lamps LH blink Center ‘Turn signal lamps OFF isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Tum signal lamp circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to EXL-167, "Diagnosis Procedure", Diagnosis Procedure ne cots 1 check sympTom Chock symptom (A or By ‘Symptom fur signal amp are not ~ ‘Applicable side performs high flasher activation Whiet jomis detect A >>GOTO2. B >> GOTO4. 2. cHECK FUSE 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check that the following fuse is not fusing. Unt Toeation Fuse No, Capacity BON _| Fuse block (JB) #1 18A a YES >>GOTO3, NO >> Replace the blown fuse alter repairing the affected circutifa fuse is blown. 3.cHECK BOM POWER SUPPLY (TURN SIGNAL LAMP) 7, Disconnect BCM connector. 2. Check voltage between BCM hamess connector and ground. Bow - Voltage Connector Terminal was ma Ground o-tev isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and installation’ NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 4.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE 7, Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the following connectors. > Front turn signal lamp EXL-167 TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] =~ Door mirror = Rear combination lamp (body side) 3. Tum ignition switch ON 4, With operating the tur signal switch, check voltage between BCM hamess connector and ground, Front tum signal lamp . en von som “Testi (Approx) as[T " oat RH 168 3 ql rum signal | Center ov ex crane | Rens vt (ee av . on von eo “Teste (Approx) Sr —— won RH 43 3 vr crane | # q ut LH 42 ott By EXL-168 TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] Rear turn signal lamp Votiage BoM Test item (Aoprex) Connector Terminal Right RH 136 e Turn signal. | Center ee | Grouna_| Tums % Cort "5 Let ly 133 +| | Genter isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO6 NO 5>GOTOS. 5..CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. 3, Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Front um signal trp OSS = Continuity, Connector Terminal RH 168 as B23 =| Ground Not existed iH 1 | a ‘Side tn signat amp BoM 5 Continuity Connector Terminal RH] a | mer - Ground Not existed iH a Rear ur signal amg OM = Continuity Connector Terminal RH 136 Bas Ground Not existes uH 133 fon result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121. "Removal and installation’. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 6..cHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (OPEN) 7, Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. EXL-169 TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT [LED HEADLAMP} 3. Check continuity between BCM hamess connector and each tum signal lamp hamess connector. Front turn sional lamp Ton Front ium agnallan Continuity Connector Terminal | Connector | Teminar a 768 Eg ex * 1 sted WH 167 27 Saturn sal amp (RD made) Ey Doormirer Contnty Connector Terminal | Connector | Tena RH @ Da s7 = 8 Exited WH 2 0a Sao tar sonal lap (RHD mex) Som Doone Contnty Connector Ternnal | Connector | Teonrar A a cy s7 % Exsted tH 2 98 Reartum sonal Tom ear conbraton Tarp (oy Se) Contnuty Cannecor Terminal | Connector | Tenminal iH 735 355 24s 3 Exsted tH 13 380 Isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO?7. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 7 CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between each tum signal lamp hamess connector and ground. Fronttum signal lamp Front combination amp ores = Continuity ‘Cannedor Terminal RH Eg = 2 Ground Existed if ET ‘Sige tum signal lamp (LHD models) Door miror are J = ‘continulty ‘Connedior Terminal RH Das see 4 ‘Ground Enisted A D8 ‘Side tum signal lamp (RHD models) Door mirer —— Et — Contiulty ‘Connecior Terminal RH Das a 4 Ground Enisted ta Dea EXL-170 TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] Rear tum signal lamp Rear tan gral amp = contin ‘Connector Terminal my RH ED 4 Ground estes tH 380 Isthe inspection result normal? YES-1 >> Front turn signal lamp or rear turn signal lamp: GO TO 8, YES-2 >> Side tum signal lamp: Replace side turn signal lamp. Refer to EXL-198, “Removal and Installa- tion’. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 8. cHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB Check the applicable umn signal lamp bulb. Real 5 YES-1 >> Front turn signal lamp: Check the corresponding front turn signal lamp bulb socket, Repair or replace if necessary. YES-2 >> Rear turn signal lamp: Check the corresponding rear turn signal lamp bulb socket and harness. Repair or replace if necessary. NO >> Replace the corresponding turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to EXL-191, "Replacement" (front tum signal lamp) or P (BOD R it (rear turn signal lamp). EXL-171 LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR [LED HEADLAMP] LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR Component Function Check eaaeanee 1 CHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR 7. Clean light & rain sensor detection area of windshield fully. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Tum lighting switch AUTO. 4, With the light & rain sensor illuminating, check the auto light function. ‘Conation ‘ato iant fancion When muminatng Not operat Liaht & rain sensor Teena pm When shutting off ight Operating i mal? YES >> Light & rain sensor is normal. NO >> Refer to EXL-172, "Diagnosis Procedure” Diagnosis Procedure ie 1 .cHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 7. Tum ignition switch OFF 2. Disconnect light & rain sensor connector. 3. Tum ignition switch ON, 4, Check voltage between light & rain sensor harness connector and ground, ight rain sensor : Voltage Connector Terminal R20 7 Ground | Bate vollage Isihen iL 2 YES >>GOTO3. NO >>GOTO2 2. CHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 7._Turm ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove interior room lamp relay. 3. Check continuity between interior room lamp relay harness connector and light & rain sensor hamess connector. Thrior room lamp re Tight & rain sensor ies = Continuity Connector Teminal Connector Terminal 5 R20 1 Exsted 'spection result normal? YES >> Perform the interior room lamp power supply circuit diagnosis. Refer to [NL-65, "Diagnosis Proce dure". NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between light & rain sensor hamess connector and ground: Tae ran sensor - eae eS ont ‘Connector Terminal ee R20 3 ‘Ground Bxisied EXL-172 LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] Is the inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO4. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 4.cHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR SIGNAL 7, Connect ight & rain sensor connector. 2. Tumignition switch ON 3. Check voltage between BCM hamess connector and ground Votaoe ao : co a |} ater (Approx) Connector | Terminal voung | laiton switeh usr ” erouns | 1 | | av isthe inspection resuli normal? YES >> Replace light & rain sensor. Refer to EX\-195. "Removal and Installation’. NO >>GOTOS. 5.CHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) 7. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and light & rain sensor connector 3. Check continuity between BCM hamess connector and light & rain sensor harness connector. acm Tight & rain sensor — Continuity Connector Terminal Connector | __Terminal 87 a R20 z Enid is the inspection result normal YES >>GOTO6 NO >> Repair or replace harness 5 6..cHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) ‘Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground BoM — Continuity ‘Connector wna 187 a7 ‘Ground Not existed I i nomal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121. "Removal and Installation’. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. EXL-173 HAZARD SWITCH < DTCICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] HAZARD SWITCH Component Function Check ApoE TARR 1 .cHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "FLASHER" of "BCM" using CONSULT. 3. Select “HAZARD SW" in “Data Monitor” mode. 4. With operating the hazard switch, check the monitor status. Monitor lem Conaition Monitor statis oN on OFF Of Asthe inspection result normal? YES >> Hazard switch circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to EXL-174, "Diagnosis Procedure” Diagnosis Procedure Sadonaseey HAZARD SW | Hazard switch 1 .cHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL 7. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect hazard switch connector. 3. Check voltage between hazard switch connector and ground, Hazard snitch : Voltage ‘Connector Terminal Mas 2 Ground o-16V {sthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO4 NO >>GOTO2. 2..CHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) T_ Disconnect BOM connector. 2. Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector and BCM harness connector. Hazard snc Bow Continuity Connector Temninal Connector Terminal Mas 2 Nez a Ensted isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) Theck conlinully between hazard switch hamess conneclor and ground Hazara atch = Cont ‘Connector Terminal es was z Gaind | Notexsied ISthe inspection resull normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, “Removal and Installation". EXL-174 HAZARD SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 4. cHECK HAZARD SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT ‘Check conlinuily between hazard switch hamess connector and ground. Tazara swich Ss Continuity Connector Terminal Mas 1 Ground Basted hei YES >>GOTOS, NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 5.cHECK HAZARD SWITCH Check hazard switch. Refer to EX1-175. “Component Inspection”. {s the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace hazard switch. Refer to EXL-197, "Removal and Installation". Component Inspection abi 1 .cHECK HAZARD SWITCH 1. Tum ignition switch OFF, 2. Disconnect hazard switch connector. 3. Check continuity of hazard switch terminals. Hazard switch aaa ea Condition Contry ON Existed 2 1 Hazard switeh OFF Not existed Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace hazard switch. Refer to EX-197, “Removal and Installation", EXL-175 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS. < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS. Symptom Table emo NOTE: Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT before the symptom diagnosis, Perform the trouble diagnosis if any. DTC is detected. ‘Symptom Possible cause ‘Inspection item + Headiamp (HI) power supply cir cut + Rent ameineton ane rl| esanp ct ‘One side bie Refer to EXL-146, ‘Component Func- Headlamp (HI)Isnotturned on Both sides LED [Headlamp (H)) LED headtamp contro! module = Hamess: + IPDM ER ‘Symptom diagnosi ‘BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT TURNED ON" Refer to EX1-180, "Diagnosis Procedure™ lon Chet High Beam indicator lamp Is not turned ON [Headiamp (Hi) is tumed ON) ‘Combination meter ee, Data monitor HI-BEAM IND" One side Headlamp (LO}isnot ‘fumed ON Both sides Headlamp (LO] paver supply or- cuit * Front cmbinton mp femal | eaamp (0) ct Refer to EXL-147, Component Func: ~ LED [Headlamp (LO}} ~ LEDheadiamp control module | 22-SHeck” Hamess: + IPOM ER ‘Symptom diagnos ‘BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON’ Refer to EXL-181, “Diagnosis Procedure”, ‘Dipped beam indicator lamp isnot tumed ON [Headlamp (LO) is tumed ON} ‘Combination meter fehl Data monitor DIPPED BEAM IND’ * LED eedlamp ground circuit Front combination lamp intemal | LED headlamp Headlamp (HI) and (LO)is not tumed ON ccuit Refer to EXL-148,"Disanosis Proce: LEDheediamp control module | dure’ = Hamess * Combination switch inpuvoutput signal crcut Combination switch + Combination switch Refer to BCS-119. “Symptom Tablet Each lamp is not tumed ON/OFF with lighting switch | * BCM Aue * Light 4 rain sensor power supply/ sgroundisigral cult Mah ran epost + Light 8 rain sensor Refer to EXL-172. “Component Eure: Spent ton check’, ~ Paring lamp power Supply ‘ground circuit + Front combination lamp intemal | paring amp cut creuit Petkinglamp isnot tured ON he Referto EXL-151. "Component Func: ~ LED (Parieng lamp) Contra iret ‘fon ghecie, Harness + IPOM ER EXL-176 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS. < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] ‘Symptom Possible cause Thspecton fem > Talllamp power supplyyerouna creuit Talllamp creut ‘al lamp isnot tumed ON + Talllamp bulb Refer to EaL-1f3. “Component Func: + Taillamp bub socketmamess | tin Gnesi” + POM ER = License plate lamp power SUPPIV/| scone pate lamp cra License platlamp noted ON LARE Sy | AeriobaL Aan “conuanet Fin tion Check + eer plate am Bub socket Parking lamp, license plate lamp and tall lamp are not | S¥mptom diagnosis ee nee tei rent | SIRMING LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON - Refer to EXL-182, "Diagnosis Procedure”. Positon lamp indicator isnot tried ON (Parking lamp, license piate lamp and taillamp ere | Combination meter tured ON) ‘Combination meter Data monitor "LIGHT IND" > Dayjime running ight poner sup- plyfground circut + Front combination lamp internal ; pit Dayte urning gt erat = LED (Daytime running ight) ee ea EE = Control ereuit al = Hames + POMER Daytime running ight is not tamed ON > Fuse ‘+ BCM power supply (tum signal amp) ecut| + BCM Inaicator lamp is normal (Al of tum signal lamp is ot alinks) + Front ium signal lamp = Front tum signal lamp power sup-| plyfground circuit = Front tum signal lamp bulb = Front tum signal amp bulb socket > BoM Tum signal lamp circuit + Side tur sonal amp Relerto EXL-107 “Component Func: Indicator lamp is namal | ~ Side tum signal lamp power sup-| fisn chess” Tum signal amp does not | (Applicable side per- plyfground circuit bain forms high fasher activa-| - Side tur signal lamp tion) BeM Rear tum signal lamp Rear tum signal lamp power sup- plyfground circuit = Rerun signal amp bub tur signal lamp bulb socket! hres a + Gonbnaton ste npatoutpat seatorlampieineuded| 990 aut Combination snitch Indleatorlomp isincuded| , Combination switch Referto BCS-119, ‘Sumotom Table teow One sae Combination meter = bon tee = Tam nator sina estate int Tum signal indcatortamp | (Aways) 3 Cotinatoh mes. Data monitor “TURN INO does not bin (Tum signallampisnonnal| Bot sides ~ Combination meter power suppiyr| Combination meter [Omen acivatng | * Combination meter poversuppi| cover sppy ane ground at hazerdwaminglanp__| , ZONES Retro wth igniton ston OFF) METER - agnosis Procedure’ EXL-177 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS: < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] Sympiom Possble cause Thspeston fem + Hazard warning lamp does not activate * Hezerd switch sgneliground ot | azar switch (Tum signal isnormaly + Hezard switch Refer to EXL-174 "Component Func: + Hazard warring lamp continues activating hes tion Check 7 Fuse + BCM power supply stop lamp} Allotstoplamp and ih-| _cireut mounted stop lamp ere | + Stop lamp switch power supply? not tumed ON signal oreut + Siop lemp switch + Bch ‘Stop lamp anc high-mount- + Stop lamp Stop amp eeult ed stop lamp erenottumed Stop lamp power supply/around | Reterto EX 158 "Component Enc on eae sion. heck ‘Any of stop lamp and high-mounted siop lamp are not tured ON = Stop lamp buib ~ Siop lamp bulb sockevnemess = BCM High-mounted stop lamp High-mounted stop lamp power ‘supplyfground circuit = Hign-mounted stop lamp = BCM One side Front foglamp snot tumed on Front fg lamp power supply? ‘ground circuit Front fog lamp bulb + IPDM EMR Front fog lamp circuit Refer to EXL-163, ‘Component Func: toa Check Both sides ‘Symptom diagnos "BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON" Reler to EXL-189, Dingnosss Procedure” Front fog lamp indicator lamp is not turned ON (Front og lamp is tumed ON) Combination meter + Combination meter Data monitor "FR FOG IND" + BOM (HEAD LAMP) Adive test FR FOG LAMP” Rear fog lamp indicator lamp is normal Rear fog lamp isnot turned oN, Rear fog lamp pawer supply {ground elreuit Reer fog amp bulo Reer fog lamp bulb socket BM Rear fog lamp cei Refer to EX1-165 ‘Component Func fon Check’ Rear fog lamp indicator lamp is included ‘Combination Switch inpullouput signal circuit ‘Combination switch BoM Combination switeh Refer to BG5-119, “Symptom Tablet Rear fog lamp indicator lamp is not tumed ON (Rear fog lamp is turned ON) Rear fog lamp status signal BCM ‘Combination meter * Combination meter Data monitor "RR FOG IND’ + BOM (HEAD LAMP) Aive test "RR FOG LAMP" Headlamp auto aiming does not activate Fuse Headlamp aiming motor power ssupplyfground crcuit Front combination lamp (Heed- lamp eiming moter) IPDM EMR Headlamp levelzer circuit Refer to EX1-149. ‘Component Func: jon Check EXL-178 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION Description a LED HEADLAMP + LED brightness and color may slightly change until the temperature becomes stable. This is not malfunction. + Illumination time lag may occur between right and left. This is not maffunction. + Brightness may be reduced due to aged deterioration of LED. AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM The headiamp may not be turned ON/OFF immediately after passing dark area or bright area (short tunnel, sky bridge, shadowed area etc.) while using the auto light system. This causes for the control difference. This is normal. HIGH BEAM ASSIST SYSTEM When driving while using the high beam assist system, the headlamp beam may not switch or the beam switching timing may vary according to the ambient environment (the condition of the vehicle ahead, the con- dition of the road, the position of the vehicle, etc.).This is due to control differences and is not a maffunction, EXL-179 BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT TURNED ON. < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT TURNED ON Description 7a Both side headlamps (HI) are not turned ON when setting to the lighting switch HI or PASS. Diagnosis Procedure wena 1 COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Check combination snitch, Refer To EOS-119,“Sumpiom Tabs {s the inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Repair or replace the maffunctioning part 2..CHECK HIGH BEAM REQUEST SIGNAL (With CONSULT. 1. Select "HIGH BEAM REQ’ in “Data Monitor’ mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 2. With operating the lighting switch, check the monitor status, Lighting suitcn orPASS: (ND) Lo [sthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace IPDM EIR. Refer fo PCS-60, "Removal and Installation" NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation”. Monitor satus HIGH BEAM REQ EXL-180 BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON Description xo commence 7) Both side headlamps (LO) are not turned ON in any condition. Diagnosis Procedure scent 1 .cHECK COMBINATION SWITCH Check combination snitch, Refer to BOS-119, “Svinplom Table Is the inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2 NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. 2. CHECK LOW BEAM REQUEST SIGNAL With CONSULT 4, Select "LOW BEAM REQ’ in “Data Monitor’ mode of "IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 2. With operating the lighting switch, check the monitor status, 2ND ning switch OFF Isthe inspection result nomal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation’ NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Insiallation”. Monitor tem Wontor status LOW BEAM REQ EXL-181 PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP} PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON Description —— The parking, license plate and tail lamps are not turned ON in any condition. Diagnosis Procedure mesemti 41 . COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Check combination snitch, Refer fo BOS-19, “Sumplom Tan Js the combination switch normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. 2..CHECK POSITION LIGHT REQUEST SIGNAL (G)With CONSULT 1. Select "POSITION LIGHT REQ’ in "Data Monitor’ mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 2. With operating the lighting switch, check the monitor status, ieee ESE Ighting sui s wie OFF Isthe inspection result normal?’ YES >> Replace IPDM EIR. Refer fo PCS-60, "Removal and Installation’ NO >> Replace BOM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and insiallation”. ‘Monitor tem Monitor status POSITION LIGHT REQ EXL-182 BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON. < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [LED HEADLAMP] BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON Description seri Both side front fog lamps are not turned ON in any condition. Diagnosis Procedure cenit 1 .COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Check combination snitch, Refer to BOS-119, “Svinplom Table Is the inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2 NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. 2. CHECK FRONT FOG LIGHT REQUEST SIGNAL With CONSULT 1. Select "FRONT FOG LAMP REQ’ in “Data Monitor” mode of "IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 2. With operating the front fog lamp switch, check the monitor status. Montior fer Montor satus Frontfaglamp switch | ON FRONT FOG LAMP REQ) iystyighing switch 1ST) | OFF Isthe item stalus noumal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation’ NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Insiallalion”. EXL-183 HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [LED HEADLAMP] PERIODIC MAINTENANCE HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT LHD MODELS LHD MODELS : Description neowcomraraee PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING NOTE: + For details, refer to the regulations in your own country, + Perform aiming adjustment if the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp assembly has been replaced Before performing aiming adjustment, check the folowing + Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. + Fill with fuel, engine coolant and each oi + Maintain the unloaded vehicle condition. (Remove luggage from the passenger compartment and the lug- ‘gage room.) NOTE: Never remove the temporary tite, jack and on-vehicle tool. + Wipe out dirt on the headiamp. ‘CAUTION: Never use organic solvent (thinner, gasoline etc.) + Ride alone on the driver seat. AIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREW Headlamp LH (INSIDE/OUTSIDE) — @ Headlamp LH (UPDOWN) © Headlamp RH (UPDOWN) adjustment screw adjustment screw adjustment screw Headlamp RH (INSIDE/OUTSIDE) adjustment screw [LED HEADLAMP] Adjustment screw ‘Screwdriver rotation Facing direction Clockwise INSIDE © | Headlamp RH (INSIDE/OUTSIDE) — = | ‘Counterclockwise OUTSIDE LHD MODELS : Aiming Adjustment Procedure srooeeniect ars 1, Place the screen, NOTE: + Stop the vehicle at the perpendicular angle to the wall + Set'the screen so that itis perpendicular to a level load surface. 2. Face the vehicle squarely toward the screen and make the distance between the headlamp center and the screen 10 m (32.8 ft) 3, Start the engine and illuminate the headlamp (LO). CAUTION Never cover lens surface with tape, etc. because it is made from plastic. NOTE: Block light from the headlamp that is not being adjusted with a thick fabric or another object, so that it does not reach the adjustment screen 4. Use the aiming adjustment screw to adjust the elbow point projected by the low beams on the screen, so that itis within the aiming adjustment area © _ Headlamp center e ee |) H. Horzontal centerline otheasiemp Low beam distribution on the screen V. Vertical centerline of headlamp ‘ @ Aiming adjustment area ® Ekow point od — Do Ly + SS 4 a ¢ »-——_ amet] © Verical center ine of heasiamp H. Horizontal centerline of headlamp L. Distance from headlamp center to screen X. Aiming adlustment area (Lateral Distance from headlam| Aiming adjustment area (Wvericaty p center to screen (L) : 10 m (32.8 ft) EXL-185 HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [LED HEADLAMP] Tako) “Riming adjustment area Vertical direction (¥) Lateral dretion 06 {Lower side rom headlamp cen height) | {Right side from heaslamp centr tne) Highest ight axis 100 (8.84) | “Target ight axis 700 (398) 0- 100 (3.94) —— Lowestlight axis | 1 RHD MODELS RHD MODELS : Description wrocranwarroresre PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING NOTE: + For details, refer to the regulations in your own country. + Perform aiming adjustment if the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp assembly has been replaced Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following. * Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. with fuel, engine coolant and each + Maintain the unloaded vehicle condition. (Remove luggage from the passenger compartment and the lug- ‘gage room.) NOTE: Never remove the temporary tire, jack and on-vehicle tool. + Wipe out dirt on the headlamp, CAUTION: Never use organic solvent (thinner, gasoline etc.). + Ride alone on the driver seat. AIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREW @ Headlamp LH (NSIDE/OUTSIDE) @ Headlamp LH (UPIOOWN) © Headlamp RH (UP/DOWN) aeons aster ton isto crew © Headiemp RH (NSIDEIOUTSIDE) scjusment sce 1 “Veriton anon sae Seevaiver caton Fang arecion Headlamp LH (INSIDE/OUTSIDE) Sntint ae ® # Countrcociwise | OUTSIDE EXL-186 HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [LED HEADLAMP] Tjusent screw Serewanverroaton Faang ae | ‘Headlamp LH (UP/DOWN) Lectin ve ® |. eee : ‘Counterclockwise DOWN Headlamp RH (UP/DOWN) —___= Seto os 8 sate —Countercoswwse +f ~SCSCOWN | Clockwise INSIDE © | Headlamp RH (NSIDEIOUTSIOE) : yp —— RHD MODELS : Aiming Adjustment Procedure ocean 1, Place the screen. NOTE: + Stop the vehicle at the perpendicular angle to the wall + Set the screen so that itis perpendicular to a level load surface. 2, Face the vehicle squarely toward the screen and make the distance between the headlamp center and the screen 10 m (32.8 ft), 3. Start the engine and illuminate the headlamp (LO). CAUTION: Never cover lens surface with tape, etc. because it is made from plastic. NOTE: Block light from the headlamp that is not being adjusted with a thick fabric or another object, so that it does not reach the adjustment screen 4. Use the aiming adjustment screw to adjust the elbow point projected by the low beams on the soreen, so that its within the aiming adjustment area. Low beam distribution on the soreen @® Aiming adjustment area Elbow point Headlamp center Horizontal centerline of headlamp Vertical centerline of heaglamp Distance from headlamp center to screen (L) [LED HEADLAMP} 210 m (82.8 ft) ‘un min cin) ‘Aiming adustinent area Verical arecton (Y) (Lower side fom headlamp center height) Taieral drecton (Lett sie from headlamp center tine) Highest ight axis 100 (3.84) Target lant axis 100(3.94) Towest ight xis 130(5.12) 0-100 (3.94) EXL-188 FRONT FOG LAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > {LED HEADLAMP] FRONT FOG LAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT Description einen PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING NOTE: For details, refer to the regulations in your own country, Before performing aing acjusment, check te folowing, + Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. + Fill with fuel, engine coolant and each oil + Maintain the unloaded vehicle condition. (Remove luggage from the passenger compartment and the lug- gage room.) NOTE: Never remove the temporary tire, jack and on-vehicle tool + Wipe out dirt on the headiamp. CAUTION: Never use organic solvent (thinner, gasoline etc. + Ride alone on the driver seat AIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREW + Turn the aiming adjusting screw for adjustment. @ oon @ur aoe Aiming Adjustment Procedure seit 1. Place the screen, NOTE: * Stop the vehicle facing the wall + Place the board on a plain road vertically. a 2. Face the vehicle with the screen. Maintain 10 m (32.8 ft) between the front fog lamp center and the screen. 3. Start the engine. Turn the front fog lamp ON. CAUTION: Never cover the lens surface with a tape etc. The lens is made of resin. NOTE: Shut off the headiamp light with the board to prevent from illuminating the adjustment screen 4. Adjust the cutoff line height ® with the aiming adjustment screw so that the distance (x) between the hor- izontal center line of front fog lamp (H) and @ becomes 150 mm (5.90 in), Front fog lamp light distribution on the screen Cutoff ine High iluminance area Horizontal centerline of front fog lamp Vertical centerline of front fog lame Cutoff ine height x [LED HEADLAMP] REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FRONT COMBINATION LAMP. Exploded View REMOVAL (sec. 260 | Bs5.050,49 @ Front tender panel ® Front combination lamp <2 Vehicle front Nm (ka, ind) DISASSEMBLY EXL-190 FRONT COMBINATION LAMP. < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] ‘SEC. 260, @ _Frontcombination amp housing @)_Frent combination lamp harness @)_Front tum signal lamp bulb socket @® Frontum signal lamp bulb © Front combination lamp bracket Removal and Installation wooeowszaaroees CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power clcult fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to “ aa REMOVAL 1, Remove front bumper fascia, Refer to EXT-15, "Removal and Installation’, Remove front coinbination lamp mounting bolts and clip, Remove harness clip of front combination lamp bracket. Pull out front combination lamp forward the vehicle. Disconnect front combination lamp hamess connectors and then remove front combination lamp. INSTALLATION Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal. ‘CAUTION: After installation, perform aiming adjustment. Refer to the following. + LHD MODELS: Refer to EXL-184, "LHD MODELS : Description”. + RHD MODELS: Refer to EX! -186. "RHD MODELS : Description”. Replacement seine oben CAUTION: + Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the opera- tion for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-9, “Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. + After installing the bulb, install the bulb socket securely for watertightness. EXL-191 FRONT COMBINATION LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] + Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other olly matters away from it. + Never touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned OFF. + Never leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. HEADLAMP BULB (HI) CAUTION: Replacement of a single part is not possible due to the adoption of LED bulb. For replacement, replace front combination lamp as a set. Refer to EXL-191, "Removal and Installation”. HEADLAMP BULB (LO) CAUTION: Replacement of a single part is not possible due to the adoption of LED bulb. For replacement, replace front combination lamp as a set. Refer to EXL-191, "Removal and Installation”. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT/ PARKING LAMP BULB CAUTION: Replacement of a single part is not possible due to the adoption of LED bulb. For replacement, replace front combination lamp as a set. Refer to EX\-191. "Y ". FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB LH side 1. Remove air duct 1. Refer to the following, + MR20DD: Refer to ElV-31. "Removal and Installation” + QR25DE: Refer to EM-175. "Removal and |nsiallation” + ROM: Refer to EM-905, "Removal and Installation”. 2. Rotate front tun signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it. 3. Remove front turn signal lamp bulb from tur signal lamp bulb socket, RH side 1, Rotate front turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it. 2. Remove front turn signal lamp bulb from turn signal lamp bulb socket. Disassembly and Assembly as DISASSEMBLY 1, Remove front combination lamp bracket fixing screws, and then remove front combination lamp bracket. 2. Disconnect front combination lamp harness. 3. Rotate front turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it. 4, Remove front turn signal lamp bulb from front turn signal lamp bulb socket. ASSEMBLY Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: + After installing the bulb, install the bulb socket securely watertightness. + After installation, perform aiming adjustment. Refer to following. - LHD MODELS: Refer to EXL-184, "LHD MODELS : Description’. + RHD MODELS: Refer to EXL-186. "RHD MODELS : Description”. EXL-192 FRONT FOG LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEAOLAMP] FRONT FOG LAMP. Exploded View wrocoenearooreees SEC. 265-620 @® Front bumper fascia ® Frontfog lamp @ Front og lamp bulb @ Spring rut <3 Vehicle ront a Removal and Installation srotniencnsninier CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to : REMOVAL 1, Remove front fender protector to make work space. Refer to EXT-35. FENDER PROTECTOR: Removal and Installatio 2. Disconnect front fog lamp harness connector. 3. Remove front fog lamp fixing screws, and then remove front fog lamp, INSTALLATION Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal. tallation, perform aiming adjustment. Refer to EXL~188, "Description". Replacement svowevencotorwent CAUTION: EXL-193 FRONT FOG LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] + Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the opera~ tion for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-9. “Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. + Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from it. + Never touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned OFF. + Never leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. FRONT FOG LAMP BULB 1, Remove fender protector to make work space. Refer to EXT-35. " RR Installation’ 2. Disconnect front fog lamp harness connector @ 3. Rotate front fog lamp bulb @ counterclockwise and unlock it. EXL-194 LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR Exploded View sevice Refer to WW-108, “Exploded View". Removal and Installation roo womenocrse CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-9. "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. REMOVAL Remove light & rain sensor. Refer to WW-109, "Removal and Installation". INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. EXL-195 LIGHTING & TURN SIGNAL SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] LIGHTING & TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal and Installation mroemmenaresi9 CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circult use when petforming the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to zi REMOVAL Remove lighting & turn signal switch (combination switch). Refer to BCS-122, "Removal and Installation’. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. EXL-196 HAZARD SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-9, "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal". REMOVAL 1. Remove center ventilator grille. Refer to folowing + LHD MODELS: Refer to [P-14, "Removal and Installation’. + RHD MODELS: Refer to IP-41, "Removel and Installation". 2, Disengage fixing pawls, and then remove hazard switch from center ventilator grill. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal EXL-197 SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP Exploded View ‘nr aoc rent Refer to MIR-27, “Exploded View", Removal and Installation ‘nwo comcarmns CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to REMOVAL 1. Remove door mirror cover. Refer to MIR-30. ‘DOOR MIRROR COVER - Removal and Installation". 2. Remove side turn signal lamp fixing screws. 3. Remove seal packing @ and disconnect side turn signal lamp harness connector @), and then remove side turn signal lamp from door mirror housing, INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Replacement ‘ara commveores CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB CAUTION: Replacement of a single part is not possible due to the adoption of LED bulb. For replacement, replace side turn signal lamp as a set. Refer to EX\-i98, "Removal and installation". EXL-198 HEIGHT SENSOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] HEIGHT SENSOR Exploded View SEC. 253 > 250028, 18) Front eight sensor @ (with 3 row seat models) <3 Vehicle front ® Rear height sensor EXL-199 HEIGHT SENSOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] 1B) “Nm eon, ry BL nm (kom, rp) FRONT HEIGHT SENSOR FRONT HEIGHT SENSOR : Removal and Installation rset CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-9, "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal", REMOVAL 1. Disconnect front height sensor harness connector. 2. Remove front height sensor mounting nuts, and then remove rear height sensor. INSTALLATION Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Be sure to perform “SENSOR INITIALIZE” when removing the rear height sensor. Refer to EXL-99, Description”. REAR HEIGHT SENSOR REAR HEIGHT SENSOR : Removal and Installation ecwameaaarmn CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-9. "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. REMOVAL 1. Disconnect rear height sensor hamess connector. 2. Remove rear height sensor mounting bolts, and then remove rear height sensor. INSTALLATION Note the following item, and then install i CAUTION: Be sure to perform “SENSOR INITIALIZE” when removing the rear height sensor. Refer to EXL-99, “Description”. the reverse order of removal. EXL-200 REAR COMBINATION LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] REAR COMBINATION LAMP Exploded View von REMOVAL Body Side v vomme! Rear combination lamp @ ow @ Gomme © Cody side) ©) Clip @ 2 mgm, nw) Back Door Side EXL-201 REAR COMBINATION LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] SEC. 265 —F ADS ) AL EZ / a \ ss Rear combination lamp @ (back door side) ip 9) 2000 cpm, DISASSEMBLY EXL-202 REAR COMBINATION LAMP: < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] SEC. 265 Rear combination lamp Rear combination lamp ® (pony side) ® Coack door side) i Tal ap ia @ Back-up tamp bulb © Back-up lamp bulb socket ® Talllamp bulb socket @ Rear tum signal amp but @® _Reartum signal amp bulb socket @)_ Stop lamp bulb socket, @ Sp lamp bulb REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BODY SIDE) REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BODY SIDE) : Removal and Installation —— sows CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-9, "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal’. REMOVAL 4, Fully open back door. 2. Remove rear spoiler. Refer to EX I-64, "Removal and Installation’, 3, Remove rear combination lamp (body side) mounting bolts. 4. Apply protective tapes (A) on the part to protect it from damage. Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to and Installation’. EXL-203 REAR COMBINATION LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] 6. ee rear combination lamp (body side) harness connec- V/ id Lp a [ f WT | / ip al | M 7. Pull rear combination lamp (body side) toward vehicle rear to disengage fixing clips, and then remove rear combination lamp (body side). ©) Clip INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BODY SIDE) : Replacement nrcemeoco orem CAUTION: * Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the opera- tion for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-9, “Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. + Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from it. + Never touch bulb by hand wi! lit or right after being turned OFF. + Never leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. TAIL LAMP BULB 1, Remove rear combination lamp (body side). Refer to EXi-203, ‘REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BODY SIDE) - Removal and installation’ 2. Rotate tall lamp bulb socket counterclockwise, and then remove tail lamp bulb socket 3. Remove tail lamp bulb from tail lamp bulb socket. STOP LAMP BULB 1. Remove rear combination lamp (body side). Refer to EXL-203, "REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BODY SIDE): Removal and Installation’. 2. Rotate stop lamp bulb socket counterclockwise, and then remove stop lamp bullb socket, 3. Remove stop lamp bulb from stop lamp bulb socket, REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB. 1, Remove rear combination lamp (body side). Refer to =i "RE NATION P SIDE} Removal and Installation’ 2. Rotate rear turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise, and then remove rear turn signal lamp bulb socket Remove rear turn signal lamp bulb from rear tum signal lamp bulb socket, REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BACK DOOR SIDE) EXL-204 REAR COMBINATION LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP} REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BACK DOOR SIDE) : Removal and Installation CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to m REMOVAL 1. Fully open back door. 2, Remove back door inner finisher. Refer to |NT-47. *Remo\ Lnstala 3. Disconnect rear combination lamp (back door side) hamess connector @. 4, Remove rear combination lamp (back door side) mounting nuts ®, 5, Apply protective tape (A) on the part to protect it from damage. 6, Disengage rear combination lamp (back door side) fixing lips using a remover tool (A), and then remove rear combination lamp (back door side), Clip INSTALLATION EXL-205 REAR COMBINATION LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BACK DOOR SIDE) : Replacement wren reer CAUTION: + Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the opera- tlon for preventing electric leakage. Refer to + Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from it. + Never touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned OFF. + Never leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. TAIL LAMP BULB 1. Remove rear combination lamp (back door side). Refer to EXL-205. "REAR COMBINATION LAMP {BACK DOOR SIDE) - Removal and Installation”. 2. Rotate tail lamp bulb socket counterclockwise, and then remove tail lamp bulb socket, 3. Remove tail lamp bulb from tail lamp bulb socket BACK-UP LAMP BULB 1. Remove rear combination lamp (back door side). Refer to EXL-205, "REAR COMBINATION LAMP Sil zemoval and Installation", 2. Rotate back-up lamp bulb socket counterclockwise, and then remove back-up lamp bulb socket. 3. Remove back-up lamp bulb from back-up lamp bulb sooket. EXL-206 HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEAOLAMP] HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP Exploded View weocoenearoorete: SEC. 268 B22 (000,26 @ Horounted stop amp 1B) stim hem nt) Removal and Installation evooconmcortses CAUTION: Disconnect battery negative terminal or re /e power circuit fuse when performing the operation for Iam EXL-9, "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL- REMOVAL 1, Fully open back door. 2. Apply protective tapes (A) on the part to protect it from damage, ~————} EXL-207 HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] 3. Disengage back door cover fixing metal clips and pawls using @ remover tool (A), and then remove back door cover. A, :Pawl Metal clip 4, Remove high-mounted stop lamp mounting nuts @) 5. Disconnect high-mounted stop lamp harness connector @, and then remove high-mounted stop lamp. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal, Replacement inca negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the op preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-9, "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP BULB CAUTION: Replacement of a single part is not possible due to the adoption of LED bulb. For replacement, replace high-mounted stop lamp unit as a set. Refer to EXL-207. "Removal and Installation”, EXL-208 LICENSE PLATE LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEAOLAMP] LICENSE PLATE LAMP Exploded View weocownenrooreees SEC. 266 ® License plate lamp bulb socket —-»«@ License plate lamp bulb @ Seal packing ® License plate lamp housing vee ton Removal and Installation roe conseeoariees CAUTION: Disconnect battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-9. “Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”, REMOVAL 1, Remove back door finisher cap. Refer to EXT-66, "Removal and Installation’. 2, Remove license plate lamp fixing screw. 3. Disengage license plate lamp housing fixing portion from back door. 4, Disconnect license plate lamp hamess connector, and then remove license plate lamp. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Replacement pe ‘CAUTION: « Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the opera- tion for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-9, “Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. EXL-209 LICENSE PLATE LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] * Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other olly matters away from It. + Never touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned OFF. + Never leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. LICENSE PLATE LAMP BULB 1. Remove license plate lamp. Refer to EXL-209, "Removal and Installation”. 2. Rotate license plate lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it. 3. Remove license plate lamp bulb from license plate lamp bulb socket. EXL-210 REAR FOG LAMP << REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEAOLAMP) REAR FOG LAMP Exploded View tee @ Rear bumper fascia ® Reartog lamp Removal and Installation wroeaonczeeraes CAUTION Disconnect battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to er REMOVAL 1. Remove rear bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-18 "Removal and Installation’, 2. Remove rear fog lamp mounting nuts, 3. Remove rear fog lamp from rear bumper fascia. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Replacement CAUTION: + Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the opera- ion for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXt-9, “Precaulions for Removing Battery Terminal”. fer touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from it. + Never touch bulb by hand while itis lit or right after being turned OFF. + Never leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. REAR FOG LAMP BULB 1, Remove rear bumper fascia, Refer to EXT-18, "Removal and Install 2. Disconnect rear fog lamp bulb harness connector. 3. Rotate rear fog lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it. 4, Remove rear fog lamp bulb from rear fog lamp bulb socket EXL-211 REAR REFLEX REFLECTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [LED HEADLAMP] REAR REFLEX REFLECTOR Exploded View srm0en70007881 SEC. 265 he . Re ‘. ae PN *% @ Rearbumper fascia @ Rear reexreftector Paw < Vehicle front Removal and Installation ‘aro cramear area's REMOVAL 1. Remove rear bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-18. “Removal and installation". 2. Remove rear reflex reflector fixing sorew and pawls, and then remove rear reflex reflector. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal EXL-212 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [LED HEADLAMP] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Bulb Specifications ——— Tem The wastage A Headlamp Gy 1D = Headlamp (Lo) 1D = front combination la ae * | aaa ring ont te 2 Front tn Sgnal amp WaiWamber) 7 Frontfog amp A % Side tr sgl arp uly door mTOF) ted = Sop mp ww 7 Rear combination lamp raltene: ver s Rear tu agli wai 2 Backup lamp wiew 16 Rear fog amp wa Fa ieenee plate fap wan 3 ighsmounted sop Tarp 1 = EXL-213 PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" wrow-samenyuratse ‘The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER’, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. + To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSANTINFINITI dealer. + Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG". + Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser- vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow andlor orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS: WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. + When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with @ hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. + When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal pe bieactent + With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. in addition, ACC power is supplied even after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, ie. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time + When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC \ EX) power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing "How to disconnect 12V battery terminal’ described below. NOTE: Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition ‘switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC detection or ECU data damage may occur + For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat- tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected * After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC. NOTE: The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below. For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2. INSTRUCTION + 1. Open the hood, EXL-214 PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 2. Tum key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened. 3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. 4, Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse of the specified time. DéDengine <20 minutes HRA2ODT 12 minutes KeKengine : 4minutes NGRengine = 4 minutes RoM engine = 4 minutes Voxengine 4 minutes CAUTION: ‘While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC fun 5, Remove 12V battery terminal. CAUTION: After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF) 1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry. NOTE: At this moment, ACC power is supplied. ‘Open the driver side door. ‘Open the hood. Close the driver side door. Wail at least 3 minutes. CAUTION While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. 6, Remove 12V battery terminal. CAUTION: After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. onan EXL-215 COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] SYSTEM DESCRIPTION COMPONENT PARTS Exterior Lamp Appearance nroocmeercn arene Exterior Lamp Appearance @ Sieur signal tamp ® Headlamp (Lo) @ Headtamo (4) @ Fronttum signal lamp ® Parking lampldaytime running ght @)_ Front fog lamp (i equipped) @ sep tamp © Tailama @ Reartum signa imp @ Back-up lamp @ Rear fog lamp (equipped) ® Lense plate lamp @ High-mounted stop lamp Bulb Specifications Shira Bulb Specifications EXL-216 COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Tem pe wiatage W) Headlamp (Hy He e Heaciemp (Lo) ca % Front combination lam ark ” | Sane rian c = Front urn signal amp WY2IW (Amber) a Frontiog amp HH = ‘Se tum signal imp a) = Stop lamp wet 2 Tal lamp waw 3 Rear combination lamp ear tun signal arp wr2iw zi Badcup lamp wiew 16 Rear fog lamp weiw 2 icense plate lamp Wow 3 Figh-mounted sop amp i) — Component Parts Location scence rsT8 LHD MODELS EXL-217 COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Bi. Front combination lamp (back) Brake pedal We ‘Component Fonction @ | Wants ran sensor Refer to EXL724 “Light & Rain Sensor ~ Judges the vehicle status Fom each signalin orderte contol the high Beam as- Front camera uni" Sist conto + Refer DAS-10,“Componont Pars Location for detalod instalation locaton fe tun signal amy Refer to EXL2I6, Exterior Lamp Aspearance” and EXL216, "Bub Speciica: @ | Side turn signal fame Rebel ~ When the forward emergency Braking operates, a requests ansmied fo [ABS actuator and electric unt (canal BOM (CAN communication) to turn ON the stop lamp ® | unig? + Refer to BRC-225. “Component Parts Location for detailed instalation looa- tion EXL-218 COMPONENT PARTS. < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] No. ‘Component Headlamp (H) (Hologen headlamp) Front combination Headlamp (LO) (Helogen headiamp) amp Parking lamp / Day {ime running light Front ium signal lamp Refer fo EX1-216, “Exterior Lamp Appearance” and EXL-216, Bulb Speciica- tons: Refer fo EXL-216 “Exterior Lamp Appearance” and EXL-216, "Bulb Speciica- Front fog lamp'® oe ~ EOM wanamis engine alus signal end Stop/Star status Signal (wifi Sop/Siat| system) to ECM via CAN communication @ | com + Refer to £0.28, “ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM: Component Pris Locaton* {WRZ0DD), EC440, “Component Parts Location’ (QR25DE} or EC-212. ‘Component Pars Loestion' (REM) for detaled installation locaton * Gonos he integrated smart FET, and supplies vliage to the loed according @ | rower to the request fom BCM via CAN communeaton + Refer to PCS-5, "Component Pars Location” fr detaed instalation locaton @ _| Door request switen™ Refer to DLK3Si, "DOOR LOGK SYSTEM: Door Request Sula ; Refer DLKS42 “DOOR LOGKSYSTEM Dear Swish wihintligent Key) or | Dos DLKCTO5. ‘Door Suit” (without inteligent Key). Taliamp @ | Reercombinaton | Sap amp to EXL-216, “Exteror Lamp Appesrance” and EXL-216, "Bulb Specie. Vamp (b00y sie) astm gray) ME temp Rear combination Refer to EXL216,“Ewerior Lamp Appearance’ and EXL.216, Bulb Speciica. lamp (back door | Tai lam oS emt . fons Refer to EXL-216, Exteror Lamp Anpearance” end EXL-216, ub Speciica- @ | License pate tamp ee @_| Hands tre sensor® Refer to DLKG#2, DOOR LOGK SYSTEM Hands Fres Sensor, ack door opener Backdoor epener | Sven Referto 3K SYSTEM : Back Door Opener Suien Assom- @: | Shaten ti oh lg Key) or CTH. "eac bes Oana Sch Asan en assembly | Back door request | (yithout inteligent Key). sviten* Back door lock es Refer DLK-340 “DOOR LOCK SYSTEM: Beck Door Lack Assembly (witout ® | sembiy Bock door switch inttigent Key) or DLA=795, "Back Door Lock Assembiy" without iteigent Key), Refer to EXL-216, Eeror Lamp Appearance” and EXL-216, Bub Specica- @ | Reertogiamp is Refer to EXL-216,“Ewerior Lamp Appearance” and EXL-216, “Bub Spediicn- High-mounted sop tay @ | Ho slop lamp coer ~ Ture the indicator lamp and waming nlormation dspleylbuzzen) ONOFF ae cording othe request rom BM via CAN communicaton + Blinks the turn signalinaiator lamp andoubutsthe tum signal operating sound @ | Combinetion meter ‘with integrates buzzer accorcng tote request fom BCM Via CAN communi- cation ‘+ Combination meter transmits vehicle speed signal o BCM via CAN commun: cation EXL-219 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > COMPONENT PARTS. [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] No. ‘Component [ Funcion ~ Detects each switch condition by the combination switch reading function Exterior lamp ONOFF is udged from each signal, and then a requests rans- mitted to IPM E/R (CAN communication) to turn each smart FET ONOFF It als transmits a request tothe combination meter (CAN communication) to tum indicator lamp and waming (information displayfouzzer) ON/OFF. Blinks the turn signal lamp and hazard waming lamp accoraing to the each switch conciton, Requests the tum signal indicator lamp blink tothe combination meter via CAN ‘communication, Requests the tum signal operating sound ON to the combination meter via CAN ‘communication, ‘Judges the vehicle status from each signal, and iuminates the stop lamp and high-mounted stop lamp. Judges the vehicle status from each signal, and iluminates tne rear fog temp Refer to BCS-6, “BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for etalled installation location o ReertoGAl224 Healamo Amine Swi Fler to BOS-13 "COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM System De Combination swten @ scipton". tonifon ker eine | Key switch Refer to DLK-796 “lontion Kev Ovinder der? @ | Hezord snitch Refer to EXLZ24 Havana Swit = When the airbag operates, a requests Wensnitied o BOM (CAN communica @ | Arbag aagnosis sensor unt ‘tonto blinks Mehazaré waming lamp. +_ Refer fo SRC-8, "Component Pats Location” for detatedinstalaton location. @ | femtcomsten ] Headam aing | pep tox.273 FRONT COMBINATION LAME é @ | Sop tamp swien Refer to EXL-Z24 “Sop Lame Sule +1: With high beam assist system 2. With forward emergency braking *®: With front fog lamp “4: With Intelligent Key °°: with hands free sensor “5 without Intelligent Key RHD MODELS EXL-220 COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ¥ Front combination lamp (back) Brake pedal We (Component Foneton @_| Ugh rain sensor Referto EXI278, Light Rain Sensor, ~ Judges the vehicle status ror each signal in order to contol the high beam as- Front camera unt" ‘st contol + Refer to DAS-10. “Component Parts Lovation for detailed instalation location. Refer to EXL-216, "Exierior Lamp Appearance” and EXLAZI6, "Bulb Spacifca- Side turn signal lamp EXL-221 COMPONENT PARTS. [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] To. Component 1 Function Headamp (a | (Halogen headlamp) [eee eee Headlamp (LO) | @ | Frontcombinaton | (Heogenheadem)| Refer to EXL:216.“ExteorLamo Appearance” and EXI-216. Bulb Spectia: ramp Parking emp /Day- time running fght | Fronttum agnal lamp © | Fronttog amp pare is ~ EOM transmits engine satus signel and Stop/Star status Sgnel fo BOM via © | com ‘CAN communication. + Refer to EC-612. “Component Pars Locaton” for detailed installation location. ~ Gontols te integrated smart FET, and supplies voltage tothe load accoraing @ | rower to the request trom BOM via CAN communication Refer o PCS-5, "Component Paris Location” for detailed installation location, [ABS actuator and electric unit (control ‘When the forward emergency braking operates, a requests transmitted to BEM (CAN communication) to tum ON the stop lamp. © | amnys + Refer to BRC-226, “Component Parts Location for detailed installation loca- LE ton @ | Door request switch Refer to DLA "DOOR LOGK SYSTEM: Doot Renuest Sulit = | Refer to DLKGS2 “DOOR LOGK SYSTEM Door Swit (with inteligent Key) or © | Demet (DLK645 “Door Sus” (without Intligent Key). Tallamp @ | Remcompinaten [Sep amp Refer to EXL-716 “Exterior Lamp Appearance" and EXL-216, "Bub Species. lamp (ody ste) Rcorrum apart tam Rear combination Refer to EXL.216, “Exterior Lamp Anpearancs" and EXL.216, "Bub Speciica: @ | lamp ack door | Ta amp 342) — Refer to EXL-716 “Exleror Lamp Aopearence’ and EXL7/6. "Bub Speciica: s f ® | Ucense pate amp ‘ ack door opener Refer to DLK<20. D008 | OCK SYSTEM: Back Door Opener Swit Assembiy* Back door opener | Such F 7 i) | Sao (oth Inteligent Key) or DuK-688, ‘Back Door Opener Sitch Assembly” (without ich assemby [Back doorreaues | Monwont eo) site Backdoor ooo Refer to DLICGO. "DOOR LOGK SYSTEM: Back Door Lock ASSEN” (with n- & | sembiy Back door switch | teligent Key) or DLK-644, "Back Door Lock Assembly (witout intligent Key), Refer io EXL-216 “Ever Lame Aapearancs" and EXL216 “Bulb Spectica: Rear fog la © Le sons’, io EXL-2i6 eran AnpearanGe end EXL16 “Bulb Seciicae ® | Hiah-mounted stop amp an re | tons EXL-222 COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] No. ‘Component Function * Detects each switch condition by the combination switch reading function + Exterior lamp ON/OFF is judged ftom each signal, and then a request is trans riled to IPDM E/R (CAN communication) to tur each smart FET ON/OFF + Italso transmits a request to the combination meter (CAN communication} to tur indicator lamp and warning (information display/buzzer) ONOFF. * Blinks the turn signal lamp and hazard warning lamp according to the each switch condition, + Requests the tum signal indicator lamp blink tothe combination meter via CAN ‘communication + Requests the tun signa operating sound ON to the combination meter via CAN ‘communication + Judges the vehicle status from each signal, and iluminates the stop lamp and bighrmounted stop lamp, + Judges the vehicle status from each signal, and lluminates the rear fog lamp + Referto 80S, BODY CONTROL SYSTEM . Component Parts Location’ for Hazard switch Refer to EXI-224, Hazard Suit! * When the air bag operates, 8 request is transmitted to BCM (CAN communica ‘Alt bag diagnosis sensor unit tion) fo blinks the hazard warning lam, Refer to SC-6 “Component Paris Location” for detailed installation lecation. Refer to BCS-13, “COMBINATION SiWITCH READING SYSTEM System Da scation’ ® |e Combination switch | ignition Key eyin- | if | Key sw Refer to DLK.645 “lantion Key Guin” be Key switch Reter io is Headlamp aiming switch Refer to EXL-274, “Headlamp Aiming Swich® + Tuins the indicator lamp and warning (information display/buzzer) ON/OFF ac- cording tothe request from BCM via CAN communication Blinks the tur signal indicator lamp and outputs the tum signal operating sound @ | Combination meter with integrated buzzer according lo the request from BCM via CAN communi cation ‘Combination meter transmits vehicle speed signal to BCM via GAN commun. cation ®|9/®) @ | Grontcombination | Headlamp aiming | eter to EXL223 “FRONT COMBINATION LAMP - Headiama Aiming Major. @ lamp | motor ‘Sop lamp switeh Refer to EX1-224, “Siop Lamo Switch” “1: With high beam assist system *2: With front fog lamp *8: With forward emergency braking “4: with intelligent Key +5: Without Intelligent Key FRONT COMBINATION LAMP FRONT COMBINATION LAMP : Headlamp Aiming Motor weaomenzerareer9 * Headlamp aiming motor is integrated in the front combination amp. * Headlamp aiming motor adjusts the headiamp light axis upward and downward according to input drive signal from headlamp aim- ing switch. EXL-223 COMPONENT PARTS < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Light & Rain Sensor svroomrne coe + The light & rain sensor detects the outside ambient light level, for- ward light level and sensor conditions. + Based on ambient light level (day/night detection), forward light level (tunnel detection) and sensor conditions it judges ON/OFF condition for exterior lamps, + And it transmits exterior lamp ON/OFF request to the BCM by the light & rain sensor serial link + BCM controls each function depending on the signals. And it detects the light & rain sensor serial link error and the light & rain sensor malfunction. Headlamp Aiming Switch roo wwenc9re781 Adjusts height of headlamp aiming Hazard Switch nroocewncorert? Inputs the hazara sviich GM/OFF signal to BCM. ‘Swick 1 [aroma ¢ a 7 | Hazard such ONOFF signal e Stop Lamp Switch + Stop temp ewitch is installed to brake pedal bracket. + BGM detects the brake pedal status from the ON/OFF signal that is input from the switch. Baa 7 ‘Slop lamp switch Released OFF Depressed ON EXL-224 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM HEADLAMP SYSTEM HEADLAMP SYSTEM : System Description SYSTEM DIAGRAM SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Combination reaang function ecm Front combination ime CAN conmunisaton tine POWER SMART FET Tigh bon rps ral {ov ocum request Sona onal mat ‘SMART FET aeweeeee ne igh beam Dipped Bear OUTLINE Headlamp is controlled by combination switch reading function and headlamp control function of BCM, and smart FET control function of IPDM E/R. HEADLAMP (LO) OPERATION + BCM detects the combination switch condition with the combination switch reading function, + BCM transmits the low beam request signal to IPDM E/R and the combination meter with CAN communica- tion according to the headlamp (LO) ON condition. Headlamp (LO) ON consition (When any ofthe following conditions are satisfied) ~ Lighting switch 2ND ~ Lighting switch AUTO (Only when the illumination judgment by auto light system is ON. For details, refer to EXL228, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM. System Descaption") ~ Lighting switch PASS + IPDM E/R turns the integrated smart FET ON according to low beam request signal and supplies power sup- ply to headlamp (LO). + Combination meter turns the dipped beam indicator lamp ON according to the low beam request signal. HEADLAMP (HI) + BCMtransmis the high beam request signal to IPDM E/R and the combination meter with CAN communica- OPERATION tion according to the headlamp (HI) ON condition Headlamp (Hl) ON condition (When any ofthe follow = Lighting switch HI with the lighting switch 2NI ~ Lighting switch Hi with the lighting switch AUTO (Only when the illumination judgment by auto light system is ‘ON and the illumination judgment by high beam assist system is ON. For details, refer to EXI-2268 "AUTO. ~ Lighting switch PASS + IPDM E/R turns the integrated headlamp high smart FET ON according to high beam request signal and i) supplies power supply to headlamp (Hl) + Combination meter turns the high beam indicator lamp ON according to the high beam request signal. FOLLOW ME HOME FUNCTION ‘When the driver is moving to the house entrance from the own vehicle, headlamp is kept still ON by the follow me home function of BCM, ng contions ae sass) EXL-225 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ‘When 8CM detects the input of lighting switch PASS while all of the following conditions are satisfied, it transmits the low beam request signal for a period of time to |PDM E/R and the combination meter through CAN communication Follow me home ON condition (When all ofthe folowing conditions are satisied) = Ignition switch OFF - Lighting switch OFF or AUTO + IPDM E/R tums the integrated smart FET ON according to low beam request signal and supplies power sup- ply to headlamp (LO). + Combination meter tums the dipped beam indicator lamp ON according to the low beam request signal. + When in any of following conditions, follow me home function can be cancelled while follow me home funo- tion is operating, Folow me home OFF condition (When any ofthe following concitions are satstied) = Ignition switch other than - Lighting switch other than OFF or AUTO - Follow me home operating time is expired NOTE: + Flash-to-pass operation illumination time for 1 time can be extended to approximately 30 seconds during ‘operation of follow me home function. + Flash-to-pass operation can be illuminated continuously for approximately 60 seconds (flash-to-pass opera- tion, 2 times), approximately 90 seconds ((lash-to-pass operation, 3 times), and a maximum of approxi- ‘mately 120 seconds (flash-to-pass operation, 4 times). EXL-226 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] HEADLAMP SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram roe aionarests es rom em g fe g Le | cameo a [ls E [a ae aya Ep ow ‘cua Bowel j sees) |b . e-be-| [be-de “" ‘coveiuon sure ° oe = de aC) commoner FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC <= IPDM EIR performs fail-safe control snort aauaien = = EXL-227 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Dre CONSULT display desertion Fairsate CIRC | Shuts ofthe power supply tothe headlamp (HI) LH power B20ce | HL (HI) LH PWR SPLY CIRC SHORT TO | supa cul untl the neaclamp (Hl) ON conditions are GRND} | nolonger satisfied [CIRC | Shuts ofthe power supiy tothe headlamp (HI) RH pow- B20cF | HL (Hi) RH PWR SPLY GIRC SHORT TO | ersuppiy crcuitunti the headlamp (HI) ON conditions are GRND} | no longer satisfied [CIRC___| Shuts offne power supply tothe Headlamp (LO) LH pow. 182000 | HL (LO) LH PWR SPLY CIRC SHORT TO | er supply circu untl the headlamp (LO) ON conditions GRND]__| areno longer satisfied [CIRC | Shuts ofthe power supply tothe headlamp (LO) RH pow- 82001 | HL (LO) RH PWR SPLY CIRC SHORT TO | er supply circuit until the headlamp (LO) ON coneitons Lceno] | are no longer satisfied CAN COMMUNICAT#N CONTROL When CAN communication with BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communi- cation recovers normally, it also returns to normal control If Nig CAN Communication Is Available With BCM ‘Contr part Failsafe operation = Tums ON the headlamp (LO) when the ignition switch is tuned ON Headlamp + Tums OFF the headlamp (LO) wen the ignition switch is turned OFF + Headlamp (HI: OFF AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM : System Description ‘nroe cwemerarace” SYSTEM DIAGRAM ‘Combination sviteh a Somme teasing tinction CAN communication tne eeu cer Tigh beam request signal [suns Fett Hoops {ow beam request srl {onion ta reqs! sgn igh & ain sanson {Front og tg sues gal mee Combiion | season” [Tgramarsom) cin nora CAN commun sation ing Enaine status i OUTLINE + Auto light system is controlled by each function of BCM and IPDM E/R. Control by BCM = Combination switch reading function = Auto light function ~ Fog override function Control by 1PDM E/R ~ Smart FET control function + Auto light system has the auto light function and fog override function. ~ Auto light function automatically turns ON/OFF the exterior lamps, depending on the outside brightness. EXL-228 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ~ Fog override function tums ON the exterior lamps regardless of outside brightness, when front fog lamp switch is tured from OFF to ON or rear fog lamp switch is turned from OFF to ON while ignition switch is in ON position and lighting switch is in AUTO position, *: Headlamp (LO/HI), front fog lamp, rear fog lamp, parking lamp, license plate lamp and tail lamp. NOTE: + Headlamp (HI) depend on the combination switch condition and the illumination judgment of high beam assist system. For details, refer to “ + Front fog lamp does not tum ON automaticaly, but automatically tums OFF (only when the fog override function setting is OFF), + Rear fog lamp does not turn ON automatically, but automatically turns OFF (only when the fog override func- tion setting is OFF). AUTO LIGHT FUNCTION + BCM detects the combination switch condition with the combination switch reading function + BCM detects the engine condition by the engine status signal received from ECM via CAN communication, + BCM receives exterior lamp ON/OFF requests from the light & rain sensor by light & rain sensor serial link. + BCM judges the ON/OFF status of the exterior lamp according to ON/OFF requests from light & rain sensor and the vehicle condition. + BCM transmits each request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication according to ON/OFF condition by the auto light function. NOTE: ‘ONIOFF timing differs based on the sensitivity from the setting. The setting can be set by CONSULT. Refer to FOG OVERRIDE FUNCTION When front fog lamp switch is tumed from OFF to ON of rear fog lamp switch is turned from OFF to ON while ignition switch is in ON position and lighting switch is in AUTO position, BCM turns ON exterior lamps* regard- less of outside brightness. *: Headlamp (LO/H|), front fog lamp, rear fog lamp, parking lamp, license plate lamp and tail lamp. NOTE: + Headlamp (Hi) depend on the combination switch condition and the illumination judgment of high beam assist system. For details, refer to + Front fog lamp and rear fog lamp depend on the each fog lamp switch operation + ON/OFF of fog override function can be changed using CONSULT. Refer to INL-21, "INT LAMP = CONSULT Function (BCM - INT LAMP)". EXL-229 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram noaworosorertt (an) BB smote 1S | pment ten” yes | Sp eae van ooo oo aya papaya aya mia Smiso segrowen | orrex anon [ewsonaroo Bo ager OPTICAL SENSOR COWBINATION SWITCH ffstetaheted] Ccomenaion METER HIGH BEAM ASSIST SYSTEM EXL-230 SYSTEM = SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP) HIGH BEAM ASSIST SYSTEM : System Description neooewaioeso SYSTEM DIAGRAM ea “ighcoremtae "FBT esas ‘2 [fee LJ imoter | "vehicle speed soma) i atte FRigh boam aseit reavert ba OUTLINE + High beam assist system is a system that can reduce the driver's switch operation load. The system auto- matically switches the headlamp to the low beam mode when a vehicle ahead or an oncoming vehicle appears, while driving the vehicle with the headlamps in high beam mode at night. + When the high beam assist system operation permission conditions are satisfied, the high beam assist indi- cator lamp in the combination meter turns ON and informs that the high beam assist is in operation. + High beam assist system is controlled by each function of BCM, front camera unit and IPDM E/R. Control by BCM ~ Combination switch reading function = Auto light function - High beam assist control function ~ Headlamp control function Control by 1PDM EIR. ~ Smart FET control function Control by Front camera unit ~ High beam assist control function OPERATION DESCRIPTION Ss + BCM detects the combination switch condition with the combination switch reading function. + BCM transmits the high beam assist indicator lamp signal to the combination meter via CAN communication when the high beam assist system operation permission conditions are satisfied. {High beam assist system operation permission conditions ighting wich HI withthe ighting switch AUTO and ignition switch ON (Only when the iluminating judgment by auto light function is ON. For details, refer to ) + Combination meter turns the high beam assist indicator lamp ON according to the high beam assist indicator lamp signal + Front camera unit detects the vehicle status and ambient status that are required for high beam assist con- trol with the following signals. - Vehicle speed signal (received from combination meter via CAN communication) = Ambient light signal (detect from front camera unit) - Image sensor signal (detect from front camera unit) + Front camera unit judges the current recommended beam according to the vehicle status and ambient con- dition, and transmits the high beam assist request signal (headlamp HI operation / headlamp LO operation) to BCM via CAN communication, + BCM switches the headlamp LO operation / headlamp HI operation according to high beam assist request signal, while the high beam assist system operation permission conditions are satisfied. For headlamp oper- ation, refer to EXL-225 "HEADLAMP SYSTEM - System Description’ RECOMMENDED BEAM JUDGMENT BY FRONT CAMERA UNIT EXL-231 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Headlamp HI Operation Request Front camera unit requests the headlamp HI operation to BCM when all of following conditions are satisfied. + Detects the vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h or more. + Recognizes the ambient condition is dark. + Recognizes there is no oncoming vehicle or no vehicle ahead in front of the vehicle, Headlamp LO Operation Request Front camera unit requests the headlamp LO operation to BCM when either of following conditions is satisfied. + Detects the vehicle speed is approx. 30 km/h or less. + Recognizes the ambient condition is bright + Recognizes there is oncoming vehiole or vehicle ahead in front of the vehicle. EXL-232 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] HIGH BEAM ASSIST SYSTEM : rae Diagram neooenmaortere 108 zon a Vea 4 q se — ‘GaEHN Hana, ce 5 the commune, Ts 74 B EOE mASne fost amen GuGanE ‘sensor 7 ecu Pw a ee set ‘COMBINATION SWITCH LUGHT & RAINSENSOR COMBINATION SvTCH eae eho EEN) | osremor Rou UNPRELAY” ——_cowanaTion METER sash HIGH BEAM ASSIST SYSTEM : Fail-safe neo enmorcse FRONT Gii@ERA UNIT TEMPORARY OPERATION CANCELLATION + Tempeitiy disabled status ## sigh temperature - If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions, the system may be deactivated automatically. And the system malfunction in infortystion display. EXL-233 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ~ When interior temperature is reduced, the system will resume operation automatically. + When vehicle front identification is difficult - When vehicle front identification is difficult due to soiling of windshield glass and strong light shining from the front, operation may be canceled temporarily, At this time, a warning is displayed on the vehicle information display in the combination meter. = Normal operation recovers when conditions improve. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : System Description veounemane SYSTEM DIAGRAM Combinton suiten f teasing tunedin OME orth ang ron] [BUART FET} |i con Lost genmneaon ig Erg sata agar 1 SopStart ts igo! OUTLINE Daytime running light is controlled by daytime running light control function and combination switch reading function of BCM, and smart FET control function of IPDM EIR. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT OPERATION + BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function. + BCM detects vehicle condition depending on the engine status signal and Stop/Start status signal* (received from ECM via CAN communication), + BCM transmits the daytime running light request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication according to the daytime running light ON condition. Daytime running light ON condition ~ Engine running and any following conditions are satisfied + Lighting switch OFF + Lighting switch AUTO (Only when the illumination judgment by auto light system js OFF. For details, refer to 228. "Al HT SY: m1 on’ + IPDM E/R tums the integrated smart FET ON, and turns the daytime running light ON according to the day- time running light request signal. NOTE: When the engine is stopped by the Stop/Start system, the operation of daytime running light system is not can- celed.* “With Stop/Start system EXL-234 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Qc were 1. <9): ROM orgne modo 22 3 1 LaMeLs 1 FRONT) Row ‘xTA UI PanKiNe LAN PARKING Lue? S| oxo lcoutnot eeazatay) | CONTR] (PJonvrace ra Ucar cer =) DATAUNE HOCAN sate {ONT COMBINATION LAMP covenant src DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Fail-safe FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC IPDM EIR performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected. EXL-235 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Dre CONSULT display desertion Fairsate TGIRG_ | Shuts ofthe power suppy tothe daytime running ight RH 1231 | DTRLRH PWR SPLY CIRC SHORT TO | power supply circuit uni the daytime running ight ON GRND} | conditions are no longer satisfied [CIRC | Shuts ofthe power supply tothe daytime cunning ight LH e208 | DTRLLH PWRSPLY CIRC SHORT TO | power supply crcut unt the daytime running ight ON GRND]__| conditions are no longer satisfied. CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communi- cation recovers normally, it also returns to normal control. If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM Contarpar False wien Daytime running light Daytime running light: OFF ~ HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL (MANUAL) HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL (MANUAL) : System Description seoocnson The headlamp levelizer adjusts the headiamp light axis upward and downward with the aiming motor inte- gfated in the front combination lamp. TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNIfc LAMP SYSTEM : System Description SYSTEM DIAGRAM Combination swten ~ ‘euang Wscton {CAN communication tng [combination meter ‘combination Torn ndleator eg Tomsoner] ERA) Buxzer Hazard switch + go —— Tum aignat ‘irbeg | CAN communication Se tarp (4) fagrocs [aceasta mp! saaarct [Ear craan information signet Tam eipal i OUTLINE ‘Tum signal lamp and hazard warning lamp is controlled by combination switch reading function and the flasher control function of BCM. TURN SIGNAL LAMP OPERATION + BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function. + BCM supplies voltage to the right (left) turn signal lamp circuit when the ignition switch is ON and the turn signal switch is in the right (left) position. CM blinks the turn signal lamp. HAZARD WARNING LAMP OPERATION &CM supplies voltage to both turn signal lamp circuits when the hazard switch is ON. BCM blinks the hazard warning lamp TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR LAMP AND TURN SIGNAL SOUND OPERATION EXL-236 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 'BCM transmits the tum indicator signal to the combination meter using CAN communication wi signal lamp and the hazard warning lamp are operating. + Combination meter outputs the tum signal sound with the integrated buzzer while blinking the turn signal indicator lamp according to the turn indicator signal. 3-TIME FLASHER FUNCTION + By a short touch of the turn signal lever, BCM blinks the turn signal lamps 3 times in the selected direction. + Cancels the operation when short touch of the turn signal lever in the reverse direction during the 3-time flasher function operation. NOTE: ONIOFF of 3-time flasher function can be changed using CONSULT. Refer to EXL-257, "FLASHER + CON- ‘SULT Function (BCM - FLASHER) (Halogen Headlamp)". HIGH FLASHER OPERATION + BCM detects the tum signal lamp circuit status from the current value. + BCM increases the turn signal lamp blinking speed if the bulb or hamess open is detected with the turn sig- nal lamp operating. NOTE: The blinking speed is normal while operating the hazard warning lamp, AUTO HAZARD FUNCTION + Air bag diagnosis sensor unit transmits car crash information signal to BCM via CAN communication, when air bag diagnosis sensor unit detects strong impact to the vehicle body while ignition switch is ON. + When car crash information signal received from air bag diagnosis sensor unit is detected, BCM supplies voltage to each turn signal lamp system and hazard lamp blinks. the turn EXL-237 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram = vo mie =m SB tome an} counnaren sre 23 jeg jeg jeg j28 38 |§8 [88 /§8 (38 a5 (ge |g8 [as as |f8 2 (GS |fs ge fe ing jee [ee jag Ue Pe |e [re Ve poms mm» 0 aw azine fi sarc 145 sa 46 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR Ae } recat commoner | | [recoumunenvoee — ETERS ERIE) | eaves fensee oe ' yoRW L Orme 5: ~ (GRAY) 1 ® is ' + rie ‘B00 MIRROR DOOR MIRROR Ca ty (RVER Sioa): D> (PASSENGER SIDE) greg Scomineron eet eae (PASSENGER SIDE): CE> (DRIVER SIDE) soy seuey (BLACK) conenunonsnrc# PROWTTIRSIOALLANP oORLIAROR REAR Sciuon asa Sue es Soegunsen tees econo ansusoaonons couanaronvecrex SEneon nt ie PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM EXL-238 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : System Description SYSTEM DIAGRAM Combination }t2asingtuncton —_f Pow EA chester [eaten 1 conmigo, = Soaeige wan est as at request signal ——— swanr Fer! Door tock unook inal Invengent ey or koyot ecu Door ea switch att) | ‘Combination meter Postion am Inciator amp | OUTLINE Parking, license plate and tail lamps are controlled by combination switch reading function and parking license plate and tail lamps control function of BCM, and smart FET control function of IPDM E/R. PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS OPERATION + BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function. + BCM transmits the position light request signal to IPDM E/R and the combination meter via CAN communi- ‘cation according to the parking, license plate and tail lamps ON condition, Parking, license pate and tal lamps ON condition (wnen any ofthe folowing concitons are satshed) ~ Lighting switch 1ST = Lighting switch 2ND ~ Lighting switch AUTO (Only when the illumination judgment by auto light system is ON. For details, refer to 228." T ") + IPDM E/R tums the integrated smart FET ON and turns the parking, license plate and tail lamps ON accord- ing to the position light request signal. + Combination meter tums the position lamp indicator lamp ON according to the position light request signal NOTE: Parking lamp and daytime running light use a common light source. When the parking, license plate and tail lamps are turned ON while daytime running light is ON, the parking lamp/caytime running light is dimmed. FOLLOW ME HOME FUNCTION ‘When the driver is moving to the house entrance from the own vehicle, parking, license plate and tail lamps are kept still ON by the follow me home function of BCM. + When BCM detects the input of lighting switch PASS while all of the following conditions are satisfied, it transmits the position light request signal for a period of time to IPDM EJR and the combination meter through CAN communication Follow me home ON cancition (When all ofthe following conditions are satisied) = Ignition switch OFF ~ Lighting switch OFF or AUTO + IPDM E/R turns the integrated smart FET ON and tums the parking, license plate and tail lamps ON accord- ing to the position light request signal + Combination meter tums the position lamp indicator lamp ON according to the position light request signal. + When in any of following conditions, follow me home function can be cancelled while follow me home func- tion is operating, Follow me home OFF condition (When any of te folowing conditions are satisfied) ~ Ignition switch other than OFF - Lighting switch other than OFF or AUTO EXL-239 a SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Follow me home operating time is expired NOTE: + Flash-to-pass operation illumination time for 1 time can be extended to approximately 30 seconds during operation of follow me home function. + Flash-lo-pass operation can be illuminated continuously for approximately 60 seconds (lash-to-pass opera- tion, 2 times), approximately 90 seconds (flash-to-pass operation, 3 times), and a maximum of approxi- ‘mately 120 seconds (flash-to-pass operation, 4 times). SIGNATURE LIGHT FUNCTION Desoription The signature light function is a function that turns ON the parking lamp, license plate lamp, and tail lamp for a set period of time when the doors are locked or unlocked from outside the vehicle. Operation Description BCM transmits the position light request signal to IPDM E/R and the combination meter via CAN communica- tion according to the signature light function ON condition. ‘Signature light function ON corxitton (Operation when doors ate unlocked) + When ail of the following conditions are satisfied, the signature light function operates when door unlock operation is performed from outside the vehiole (Intelligent Key, keyfob, door request switch, back door opener switch, hands free function). = Ignition switch: OFF = Door openiclose status: All door close - Door lock status: All door lock + When any of the following conditions is satisfied while the signature light function is operating, the signature light function stops, = Ignition switeh: ON = Door lock status: All door lock (This only occurs when door lock operation is performed using the door lock and unlock switch, etc. When door lock operation is performed with the Intelligent Key, keyfob or door request switch, the system changes to operation when doors are locked.) ~ Since signature light function ON, 30 seconds are passed. ‘Signature light function ON condliton (Operation when doors are lacked) + When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the signature light function operates when door lock oper- ation is performed from outside the vehicle (Intelligent Key, keyfob or door request switch). + Ignition switch: OFF = Door openiclose status: All door close + When any of the following conditions is satisfied while the signature light function is operating, the signature light function stops. = Ignition switch: ON = Door openiclose status: Any door open = Door lock status: Any door unlock or all door unlock (This only occurs when door unlock operation is per- formed using the door lock and unlock switch etc. When door unlock operation is performed with the Intelli- gent Key, keyfob, door request switch, back door opener switch or hands free function, the system changes to operation when doors are unlocked.) - Door openiclose status: All door close - Since signature light function ON, 10 seconds are passed. NOTE: ON/OFF of signature light function can be changed using CONSULT. Refer to DLK-74, "DOOR LOCK : CON- 2 »_DLK-384, “DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System, Without Super Lock)", DLK- I ULT Functi = DOOR tell mn f Loci)” or DLK-808, "DOOR LO i tem and Super Lock), EXL-240 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram woowsn0onss ESE] GO women Temata TY Ziman naman GD marcas — aH 1 sh tte ala ow aa Heenan Seow ezenson a comma ijeemeuse nee, xen | Blane uan | | | [ener letra uc b | = F — -—__. Berm [Sm baat [Sm a [Gm Boe (Om eet! Oven |S SSE (6 pe ear, (IRE, ee Lf ft Hi Sole nscewaut ‘OPENER swiToH BERS ny mE ast ATAU —_ 1 LSeneasat ‘ jee al 2 | ween Vl See || Stl ie {asl iL te genet ais i mee “L Si = 5 “3 EXL-241 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] CCOMBNATIONMIETER _COMBINATIONSTCH. FRONT COMBINATION LAMP BACKDOOR OPENER ‘SWWTGH ASSEMBLY REAR COMBINATION LAMP_8XCKDOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY (eovysDe) =, REAR COMBINATION LAMP (GackoooR S06) LICENSE PLATE LAMP _HARIISFREE SENSOR a 2s FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE GW meat tack dar spstem HANDLEASSEMELY © Vmateerte ie orn es PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : Fail-safe nro rer FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC IPDM EIR performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected. Dre ‘CONSULT display description Fairsafe [eIRC ‘Shuts off the power supply to the parking lamp (LHRH) 82002 _| PARKING LAMP PWR SPLY CIRC SHORT TO | power supply circuit until the parking lamp, loerle Plato GRNDE | lamp, and tall lamp ON conditions are na toager satisfied ‘Shuts off the power supply tothe folowing power samy Circuits unt the parking lamp, license plate amp, and tall (circ lamp ON conditions are no longer satisfied 82004 | TAILLAMP LH PWR SPLY CIRC SHORT TO | + Taillamp LH (body side) GRND] | + Tail lamp LH (back door side) + License plate lamp LH + License plate lamp RH ‘Shuts off te power supply tothe following power supply [circ Circuits unt the parking lamp, license plate lamp, and tall 22008 _| TAIL LAMP RH PWR SPLY CIRC SHORT TO | lamp ON concitions are no longer satisied GRND] | « Taillamp RH (body side) + Tall lamp RH (0ack door side) CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communi- cation recovers normally, it also returns to normal control, IfNo CAN Communication Is Available With BCM Conrarpan Faisate operation Thins ON he tala. parting lamp and cense pate lamp when the lion swish sted + Parking amp w + Ucense pat ome «Tums OFF the tai lamp paring lamp an cense plat lamp when the gion swich sumed + taltamo tun STOP LAMP SYSTEM EXL-242 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEAOLAMP] STOP LAMP SYSTEM: System Description veoroonccor0H8 SYSTEM DIAGRAM ‘Bop nett stop inp bcm ant eecise on Set commenter ie, igh mounaa contol unt) [Stop fe request signal ‘Stop lame OUTLINE Stop lamp and high-mounted stop tamp is controlled by combination switch reading function and the stop lamp and high-mounted stop lamp control function of BCM, and forward emergency braking function of ABS actua- tor and electric unit (control unit). STOP LAMP AND HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP OPERATION + BCM detects the brake pedal position status from stop lamp switch + BCM supplies voltage to stop lamp and high-mounted stop lamp according to the stop lamp and high- mounted stop lamp ON condition, Stop lamp and high-mounted stop lamp ON condition Brake pedal is depressed FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING FUNCTION + When the forward emergency braking operates, the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) transmits the stop lamp request signal to BCM via CAN communication, (For details about the forward emergency braking, refer to BRC-232. “System Description’.) + When BCM receives the stop lamp request signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), it supplies power to the stop lamp and high-mounted stop lamp systems, turning ON the stop lamp and high- mounted stop lamp. EXL-243 < SYSTBH DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM ‘STOP LANP SYSTEM ; Circuit Diagram [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] nr ae = HRD: Eee Rene mode wa MT = A RTD: ROM engine models with MT 108 108 ca) zo) m= [eal "J dias f ie coor Cyt pan 8 ,, aesacruaTon AN Steere owt rwostounreo ps (conto. un) shor E oxraunk } poten sow Reancomenanon unin | REAR COMBRATION LAMP aovse (eon se) ' f . If . rae sro sro GREEN) i ~ aT j Ss i ig enan) sama (BROWN) 5 bier eusc ear comanarion an ASS ACTUATOR AN ELECTR OT (e001 808), a =z aga ee HosMOUNTED STOP LANP STOP LMP ewe — = ai Bo NOTE: ‘ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is not used. FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM EXL-244 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Description sys coin0 arse SYSTEM DIAGRAM Combination sith |L.cAt communication tne Poe combination yy een es p= ar sc e Front og an ees B [ suas rer } {ise | Sonat OUTLINE Front fog lamp is controlled by combination switch reading function and front fog lamp control function of BCM, and smart FET control function of IPDM E/R. FRONT FOG LAMP OPERATION + BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function. + BCM transmits the front fog light request signal to IPDM E/R and the combination meter via CAN communi- cation according to the front fog lamp ON condition Front fog lamp ON condition ~ Front fog lamp switch is turned from OFF to ON, and any of the following conditions are satisfied. + Lighting switch 1ST * Lighting switch 2ND- + Lighting switch AUTO (Only when the iluinatio judgment by auto ight system ie ON. For deta, refer to ti + IPOMEIR tums the toot ‘smart FET ON, and tums the front fog lamp ON according to the front fog light request signal. * Combination meter turns the front fog lamp indicator lamp ON according to the front fog light request signal EXL-245 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : Ci = Ha coun (pha? mtn 4 ae) | L =>} cateyson t ae Ge (22 (92 Se 2 |e 8 eB ag [eg [og [ag [og |g |e Pg [tg re SomOUSNTEH roses me ¢ FRONT FOG LAKP SYSTEM : Fail-safe pawceosrenvorene2 FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC IPDM EIR performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected. EXL-246 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEAOLAMP] Dre ‘CONSULT deplay desoration Fairsate TGIRG Shuts ffthe power supply othe frontfeg lamp LH power BI21A | FRFOGLAMP LHPWRSPLY.CIRC SHORT TO | supply circultunti the rontfog lamp ON conditions are no GRND] longer satisfied [orc Shuts ffthe power supply fo the front fog lamp RH power 81255 | FRFOGLAMP RH PWRSPLY CIRC SHORT TO | supply eultunti he fant fog amp ON conditions are no GRNO] longer sabsed CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL ‘When CAN communication with 8CM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communi- cation recovers normally, it also returns to normal control, IfNo CAN Communication Is Available With BCM ‘Cont part Failsafe operation Front fog iam Front og lamp: OFF REAR FOG LAMP SYSTEM REAR FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Description wroeesencearesa SYSTEM DIAGRAM reing funtion nnn — om CAN comminiaton tine seadiene pr aee [oer og ane ses sana | [otatrr Ext OUTLINE Rear fog lamp is controlled with the combination switch reading function and the rear fog lamp control function of BCM. REAR FOG LAMP OPERATION + BCM detects the condition of the combination switch by the combination switch reading function. + BCM supplies voltage to rear fog lamp according to the rear fog lamp ON condition. Rear fog lamp ON condition ~ Rear fog lamp switch is tured from OFF to ON, and any of the following conditions are satisfied + Headlamp ON + Front fog lamp ON + Lighting switch AUTO (Only when the illumination judgment by auto light system is ON. For details, refer to 4 i sition’) + 8CM transmits the rear fog lamp status signal to the combination meter using CAN communication. + Combination meter turns the rear fog lamp indicator lamp ON according to the rear fog lamp status signal. EXL-247 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > {HALOGEN HEADLAMP] REAR FOG LAMP SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram neooaimmnarsie oo aa i 22 Re "2 = | 1 [Bpeanroc ue =" GREEN) (ora) meaesentamqaaatay) | REAR FOG LAMP coumunon neren tes EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM EXL-248 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : System Description woo enmrcoers SYSTEM DIAGRAM | cambinaon ston Combination |_feacng tinction | [ewerrer} = poser CAN communication ne “High beam eaves signal — ‘Low beam resus sgl Front door “Postion sgh esuest gl ‘mn "Front og igi request ana (cover see) Key sen [+ toreartogiane {CAN communication cou Combination OUTLINE + Exterior lamp battery saver system is controlled by combination switch reading function and exterior lamp battery saver function of BCM, and smart FET control function of IPDM E/R. + BCM tums the exterior lamp* OFF, according to the vehicle status when ignition switch is turned OFF while exterior lamp is ON, for preventing battery discharge. *: Headiamp (LO/HI), front fog lamp, rear fog lamp, parking lamp, license plate lamp and tail lamp EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER ACTIVATION + BCM tums the exterior lamps OFF: (Hatfery saver is activated) whe if ¢f the following conditions are satis- fied ae - Exterior lamp: ON - Engine status: Running-»Stop (ignition switch is turned OFF) - Front door switch (driver side) is tumed from OFF to ON or key switch is turned from ON to OFF NOTE: ‘When in any of following conditions (after the exterior lamp battery saver is activated), exterior lamps (except front fog lamp and rear fog lamp) can be turned ON. + Lighting switch: 1ST or 2ND->OFF or AUTO->1ST or 2ND + Engine status: Stop->»Running EXL-249 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] aaTTERY] ED enor og are wn aD GD winet sho key 2 BD Exot RM eng mates og 9 BE Rett erge motes @ ae iss owen Ve cru sooo [sess _|sr __|ou_|so |s se fo be {gpg sctmern HE fom | pated Sa Jue [Commoner com ConNECTOR aE Sige DATALNE on (Re cron inca CANE 7 a 24 scm es 17 ego ef 1 ei rn + ron pooR SwTCH |] key syaTCH z a = |] torver sion E i vey surres 4 COMBINATION SuRTCH aka er Say Conenanor meter, aa ee) Ges DOOR SwiTcH INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Light Reminder Warning (Infor- ination Display) DESIGN/PURPOSE EXL-250 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ‘When the drivers exiting the vehicle while ignition is in any position other than ON and lamps are ON, the light reminder warning (information display) displays a warning in the information display to alert the driver, ‘Symbar Message ~s o =pq= |=. os as SYNCHRONIZATION WITH MASTER WARNING LAMP. Not applicable SYNCHRONIZATION WITH WARNING CHIME Synchronization is applied. For waming chime, refer to WCS-12. "WARNING CHIME : Light Rerninder Warning (Buzzen. OPERATION AT COMBINATION METER CAN COMMUNICATION CUT-OFF OR UNUSUAL SIG- NAL For actions on CAN communications blackout in the combination meter, refer to MWI-19. "METER SYSTEM Fail-Sate’ SYSTEM DIAGRAM ‘ean ancton Cention ate ei CAN communica ing Borcodbu se SIGNAL PATH + BCM reads status of combination switch, + BCM judges light reminder warning (information display) by lighting switch signal and driver door switch (driver side) signal. BCM transmits buzzer output signal to combination meter via CAN communication. + When combination meter receives the buzzer output signal, “Light reminder warning” pop-up screen appears in the information display. WARNING/INDICATOR OPERATING CONDITION ‘When all of the following conditions are satisfied. + Ignition other than ON + Lighting switch 1ST or 2ND + Front door (driver side) OPEN [front door switch (driver side) ON] WARNING/INDICATOR CANCEL CONDITION ‘When any of the following conditions are satisfied + Ignition ON EXL-251 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 7 Lighting switch other than 1ST or 2ND + Front door (driver side) CLOSE [front door switch (driver side) OFF] TIMING CHART Combination sith (Ung smc Front dor ver ee) Lah eminser wang WARI eee L 1st or2n Cthertan 181 oro —} open Lose 1 WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Lamp/Indicator Lamp. roe cacororses Tem Design Reference Dipped beam indicator lamp Front fog lamp indicator tamp** High beam assist indicator lamp"? High beam indicator lamp Postion lamp indicator lamp For layout, refer to MWL10, "METER SYSTEM Design For function, refer o MV-32. "WARNING LAMPS/NDICATOR LAMPS Dinped Beam {tate Lama’ For layout, refer to MWi-10, "METER SYSTEM : Design’. For function, refer to MW.36. “WARNING LAMPSINDIGATOR LAMPS Front Fog. ‘Lamp indicator Lamp" For layout, refer to MWI-10. “METER SYSTEM Design’ For function, referto MW-40, ‘WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS High Beam As sist indicator Lamp For function, refer to MUUL-S2, (WARNING lAMPSINDIGATOR LAMPS. Postion Lamp Jogicator Lama Rear fog lamp inlcator lamp For layout, reer to MII-10. "METER SYSTEM. Design’. For function, refer to MWL.S3. “WARNING LAMPSANDICATOR LAMPS: Rear Fog. “Turn signa indicator lamp rs +1: With front fog lamp +2: With high beam assist system EXL-252 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Chime SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Tem Light reminder waming ouzzer) ‘Tum signal operation sound warring WARNING/NDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning/ndicator (Information Display) Reterence, Refer 19 WGS-12 "WARNING CHIME Jont Reminder Warning (Buzzer, Refer to EXL-236, “TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM System De- sarion” Tem Light reminder waming (information splay) Reterence Refer fo EXL-250, “INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) ight Reminder Waming Gniomation Disa EXL-253 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) COMMON ITEM COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) sure eo APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. aa SaaS sacs Sawa oneseea ie Bl eee eer coo eine een cc SYSTEM APPLICATION BCM can perform the following functions for each system. NOTE: can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items. x: Apel te Sn pe Sn Ss System ‘wo system selection tem Wor Suppor | Data Wentor | Aaive Tea Dowex DOOR TOGK : : Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER 5 z Weming enim BUZZER x x Exterior amp HEAD LAME z = = Interior eem amp conto INT LAMP : Wiper and washer WPER % 5 % Tur igal and azo warsng lps | FLASHER x x a "ARR CONDITONER™ * = iratigent Key system INTELLIGENT KEY # x x Combination seh Come sw Boay cont system acm : WS -NATS TM % Interorreem lamp batery saver | BATTERY SAVER = Back door open TRUNK Vari secury THEFT ALM z * RAP RETAINED PAR x Reso eyes erty stem MULTI REMOTE ENT % X Signal butler system SIGNAL BUFFER 2 % NoTr * This item is displayed, but not used. FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD) ‘The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on CONSULT, EXL-254 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] CONSULT screen tem | Indieatovunit Description BATTERY VOLTAGE | V Battery voltage of the moment a particular DTG is delected VEHICLE SPEED enh Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC Is detected EXTERNALTEMP | °C Enteral erperature of the moment a particular DTG is detected NOTE: RERCECONE = Thisitem is displayed, but cannot be use this item NOTE: POOR LO SIAIVE ES ‘Thisitem is displayed, but cannot be use tis item POWER SUPPLY pene min Displays the cumulative time trom fhe time thatthe tater terminalis connected HEADLAMP. HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEAD LAMP) (Halogen Headlamp) WORK SUPPORT Service tiem ‘Seting fem ‘Seting MODE | Nomal MODE2 | More sensitive seting than normal soting (Tums ON eae han normal operation) CUSTOM ALIGHT SETTING MODES _| More senstive seting than MODE2 Tums ON eater than MODE2) MODE4_| Less sensitive seting than normal settng (Turns ON later han normel operaion) MODE?_| noTE: eee MODES THs item is displayed, but cannot ve used MODET MODE2_| note: Sere MODES | This item is displayed, but cannot be used MODE4 "Factory setting DATA MONITOR NOTE: The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle, For information (tems) applicable Ea to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items, Tonitor term ra Creston ran ca OA Gon ci To SHORE STATE gq _| dca STOPRTALVORANWORUN] conan ofenpre Stes a PET vacates rh ein of vee pond agra on cohen nto EXL-255 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Montor fem [Uns] Description TORNSIGNALR fonon TURN SIGNAL L (or"om TAIL LANP SW fonon HIBEAM SW fovom HEADLAN SW (oWon LIGHT OFF SW (onon PASSING SW orvom AUTO LIGHT sw"! (onon FRFOG SW? (onory RRFOGSW Each switch status that BCM judges from the combination sultch reading function Indicated [On/OR] condition of tront door switch (driver side) Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side) Indicated [On/Off condition of rear door switch RH Indicated [On/Of] condition of rear door swith LH Indicated {On/Or| condition of back door switch ‘OPTI SEN (DCT) Mw NOTE: Thisitem is displayed, but cannot be monitored ‘OPTI SEN (FILT) M NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored ‘OPTICAL SENSOR* [on/OWNG] ‘The sensor condition received from light & rain sensor “1: For models without auto “2: For models without front light system, this item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. fog lamp, this item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. ACTIVE TEST Testiiom ‘Operation Description Transmit the front fog ight request signal POM E/R via CAN communication Gy to tum the front fog lamp ON ent + Transmits the font fog light request signal to combination meter via CAN commu ication totum the front fog lamp indicator lamp ON ‘Of _| Stops the front fog ight request signal ransmission * Ouipuis voltage fo tum fre rear fog lamp ON ‘on | + Transits the rear fog lamp status signal to combination meter via CAN commu- RR FOG LAMP rleaion to tur the rea fog lamp indicator lamp ON. on | « Si@ps the votiage to tum the rear fog lamp OFF + Slops the rear fog lamp status signal transmission EXL-256 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Testitom Operation Dessiption On| Outputs votage totum the sop lamp RH ON STOP LAMP 1 oe eee GF __| Stops the voltage totum the stop lamp RH OFF On is vliage to turn he stop lamp LH ON STOP LAMP2 ee yeale lial Off | Stops he voltage totum the stop lamp LH OFF (On | Outputs votage fo tum te high-mounted stop lamp ON STOP LAMPS tt = = Of __| Stops the voltage o tum the high-nounted stop lamp OFF ‘on __ | Transmits the daytime running light request signal o IPDM E/R using CAN commu- DAYTIMERUNNING LIGHT | ©" | nlcaton totum the daytime running Hght ON OF | Stops he dayime running light request signal transmission = ‘On | Transmit the dimmer signal to NAVI contra unit end dims dsplay " 2 ese On __| Stops he dimmer signal wansmission *1: For models without front fog lamp, this item is displayed, but cannot be tested *2: For models without navigation, this item is displayed, but cannot be tested. FLASHER FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM - FLASHER) (Halogen Headlamp) wasomaroun WORK SUPPORT Senice ten Seting tem Seating ‘On __| With 3-ime flasher function 2-TIME FLASHER SETTING ‘Of __| Without Stine Nasher unction "Factory setting DATA MONITOR NOTE: The following table includes information (tems) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (tems) applicable to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. ‘Wonitor term Tun Description BED GDH Indicat condition of door request sw iriver side) REQ SW-AS Indleated [OrvOM condition of door request ste (passenger side) sears (oven 4 (passenger side) PUSH SW jonom TURN SIGNALR [Oniofy, TURN SIGNAL jonom “HAZARD SW [Onion], RKE-LOCK In mon Indicates [Orv0M conctton of LOCK signal from Inteligent Key or keyfob Indicates (OrvOM] conction of push-button igniton switeh Each switch status that BCM detects rom the combination switch reading function ‘The switch status input from the hazard switch RKE-UNLOOK [onion RKE-PANIC NOTE! [onion ‘This tam Is splayed, but cannot be monitored INT LAMP. {naicates [OrvOM] conciton of UNLOCK sighal from Inteligent Key or keytob EXL-257 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT LAMP) 0 samsno 8800 WORK SUPPORT Beceem Seting em ‘Seting [SET AL D-UNLCK INTCON FOG LAMP OVERRIDE {With Interior room lamp timer functon Without interior room lamp timer function With fog override function Without fog override function *; Factory setting DATA MONITOR NOTE: The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. Tonio fer inh Description REG SWOR nee Indicated [On/OM condition of dor request switch (tive side) REQ SWAAS Indicates [On/OM condition of door request switch (passenger side) fan [oven 4 (passenger side) PUSH SW Indicates [OrvOM conden of push-button ignion seh ros {Orv019 concton of E DOOR SWLOR Indicates [On/OM eondlton of font door switch (anver se) (onan, [oven «“ ) DOOR SWAS popes Indicated [On/OM] condition of Font door switch (passenger side) DOOR SWERR Indicated (On/O condition of ree door switch RH ent [ov0n DOOR sveRL Indicated [On/OM]condton of reer door switch LH (ovon er DOOR SwBK a rl pons Indicated [Or/om conton oF backer switch ‘CDLLOCK SW Indicated [On/OM] condition of lock signal frm door lek andunlock switch ioe [owen wa SDL LOCKS Inst] endnote Sala door acer ntk wtch KEY CYLLKSW ee areca CCC [oven Thisitem is clepiayes, but cannot be menitores KEY CYLUNSW NOTE: [ono ‘Thisitem is csplayed, but cannot be monitored ReELocK Ts [Or oan LOCK gral am pn Kyoko RAEUNLOCK ee Indicates [Orv] conditon of UNLOCK signal rom Inteligent Key orkeytob Key Sw Indicates [Orv] conction of key sich fevon « y ACTIVE TEST Teattem ‘Operation Bescipton ‘On| Outpus nteorroam lamp canal signal INTLAMP xe m 2 ‘off _ | Steps inievior room lamp conta signal EXL-258 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] DOOR LOCK DOOR LOCK: CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key System and Super Lock) denise BCM CONSULT FUNCTION CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BOM WORK SUPPORT Monitor lien Descipion "Antefijackfancion mode can be changed to operation with this mode DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET | » On: Operate + Off: Non-operation NOTE: This item is cisplayes, but cannot be used ‘Signature light funcion can be changed fo operation with this mode SIGNATURE LIGHT SETTING | + On: Operate Cf: Non- operation AUTO UNLOCK TYPE DATA MONITOR NOTE: The following table includes information (jtems) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (tems) applicable to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items, Wontor tem Contents REQ SWOR Indicated [On/OM conalon of door request site (ave side) REQSWAS Indicated [On/Of] condition of door request slic (passenger Side) REQSWEDTR inalcated [On/Ocondiion backdoor request swich DOOR SWDR Tnaicated [On/OM] conaion of ont Goor ste (arver Se) DOOR SWAS Indicated [On/Of] condiion of font door switch (passenger Side) DOOR SARA Indicated [On/01] conditon of rear door switch RH DOOR SWARL Tnaicated [On/OM] condition of rear door sich LH DOOR SWBK Indicated [On/Ofl condition of backdoor switch GDL LOCK Si Indicated [On/01} condition of lock signal om door lock unlock switch EDL UNLOGK SW | ndlcated [On/OM condition of unlock signal om door tock unlock Switch NOTE: KEYCYLL-SW | Thisitem is displayed, but cannot be monitored NOTE: KEYCYLUN-SW | ‘Thisitem is dsplayed, but cannot be monitored NOTE: SHOCK SENSOR | Thisitem is displayed, but cannot be monitored NOTE: REreve This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored ACTIVE TEST Test tern Description “This Teele abo to Gheck door loevunloak operation DooR Lock The all door lock actuators ae locked when "ALL LOCK" on CONSULT screen is touched + The all doorlock actuators are unlocked when ALL UNLK "on CONSULT screen is touched EXL-259 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Testitem Desorption ‘SUPER LOCK This testis able to check super lock actuator operation + The all door lock actuators are set when "LOCK" on CONSULT screen is touched +The all door lock actuators are released when "UNLOCK" on CONSULT sereen is touched DOOR LOCK IND ‘This testis able to check door lock status indicator operation + On: Operate + Off, Nor-operation DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (With Intelligent Key Sys- tem, Without Super Lock) sro comemon ores BCM CONSULT FUNCTION CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. WORK SUPPORT Monier tem Desenpton “Antbhijack function mode can be changed fo operation with this mode DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET | « On: Operate + Off. Nor-operation ‘AUTO UNLOCK TYPE NOTE: This item is displayed, but cannot be used ‘Signature ight finelion can be Ghanged te operation with tvs mode SIGNATURE LIGHT SETTING | + On: Operate + Off. Non-operation DATA MONITOR NOTE: ‘The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to vehicle. For information (items) applicable to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. Monitor hem Contents REG SADR Indicated [On/OA] condition of door request switch (chiver ide) REG SVFAS Indicated [Or/Ot] condition of door request swiich (passenger sida) REG SW/BDITR Indicated [On/Of] condition of back door request switch DOOR SWOR Indicated [On/OA] condition of front door switch (aver side) DOOR SWeAS: Tnaleaied [On/O] eondlion of rent door switch (passenger sige) DOOR SWERR Thaleated [On/Ot] condition of rear door sulten RH DOOR WERE Indicated [On/OA] condition of rear door switch Lt DOOR SWEBK Tndleaied [On/O"] eandlion of back door switch ‘COL LOCK SW Tnaleated [Or/0M conaiion of foc signal from door look unlock switch COL UNLOCK SW__| Indicated [On/0F] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switeh NOTE: REneTE RES, This tem is displayed, but cannot be monitored NOTE: KEYCYLUNSW | Trisitem s displayed, but cannot be monitored NOTE: SHOCK SENSOR | Tris tem is alsplayed, but eannot be monitored KEY sw ACTIVE TEST EXL-260 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Test her Desorption This esis able fo check door loekunlock operation DooR Lock +The all door lock actuators are locked when "ALL LOCK" on CONSULT sereen is touched + The all doorlock actuetors are unlocked when “ALL UNLK en CONSULT screen istouched NOTE: BUPELLCKS This tem is isplayed, but cannot be used DOOR LOCK IND sores ‘This tem Is ceplayed, but cannot be used DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key System, With Super Lock) yo enosro e896 WORK SUPPORT Monitor em Description ‘Selective unlock function mode can be changed to operation with this mode DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET | = On: Operate + Off: Non-operation NOTE: Thisitem is displayed, but cannot be used ‘Signature ight funclion can be changed fo operation with this mode SIGNATURE LIGHT SETTING | « On: Operate + Off Nen-operation ‘AUTO UNLOCK TYPE DATA MONITOR NOTE: The following table includes information (tems) inapplicable to this vehicle, For information (tems) applicable to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items, Montor tem Conteris DOOR SWDR Indicated [On/OM} condition of ont door switch (arver side) DOOR SWAAS indicated [On/OM] conaiton of font door sven (passenger side) DOOR SWRR Indicated [On/Of] condton freer door swich RA DOOR SWAL Indicated [On/OM condition of rear door switch LH DOOR SWFBR [rites NOH enon tok sox oe fa DL LOCK SW Inaleated [On/OM] conditon of lock signal Fom door lock unlock svitch EDL UNLOCK SW__| indicated [On/OM condition of unlock signal fom door leek unlock svteh NOTE: KEYCYLLICSW | Thisitem is dspiayed, but cannot be monitored NOTE: KEY CYLUN-SW | Thsitem is displayed, but eannot be monitored NOTE: SHOCK SENSOR | Thisitem is dsplayed, but cannot be motitored KEY sw Incicated [On/OF] condton of key switch ACTIVE TEST Tea tem Description This test is able fo check door lekdiniock operation 00R Lock he all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK" on CONSULT screen is touched +The al doerlock actuators ae unlocked when ALL UNLK" on CONSULT seeen istouched EXL-261 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Testitom Desorption This teats able to check super lock actuator operation SUPER LOCK + The al door lock actuetors are set when “LOCK on CONSULT sereen Is touched +The all door lock actuators are released when "UNLOCK" on CONSULT sereen is touched ‘This test sable to check door lock Slasiiciealor operation DOOR LOCK IND + On: Operate + Off, Nor-operation DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Without Intelligent Key System and Super Lock) ura eoneo WORK SUPPORT Monitor fem Bescipton ‘Selective unlock function mode can be changed to operaton with tis mode DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET | « On Operate Off Non-operation "| NOTE: aa ‘This tem is splayed, but cannot be used ‘Signature light function can be changed to operation with this mode SIGNATURE LIGHT SETTING | « On: Operate + Off Non-operation ‘AUTO UNLOCK TYPE DATA MONITOR NOTE: The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. Monitor fem Carvers DOOR SWOR Indicated [On/OA] condition of front door switch (aver side) DOOR SWHAS Indicated [On/OR] condivon of front door switch (passenger side) DOOR SWARR Indicated [OOF] condition of rear door switch RH DOOR SW-RL Indicated [On/Ot] condition of rear door switen LH DOOR SW-BK Indleated (On/0A] condition of back door switch ‘COLLOGK EW Indicated [On/OA] condition of lock signal rom door lock unlock swith EDLUNLOGK SW__| indicated [On/OM] condition of unlock signal fom door Tock unlock sich NOTE: REY Ere ‘This tem is displayed, but cannot be monitored NOTE: KEY CYL UNSW | Thisitemis displayed, but cannot be monitored NOTE: SHOCK SENSOR | This tem is displayed, but cannot be monitored key Sw Indicated [On/%] condition of key switch ACTIVE TEST Tester Description This tes sable to check door lockunlock operation DOOR Lock + The ll door lock actuators are locked when "ALL LOCK’ on CONSULT screen is touched +The all doorlock actuators are unlocked when ALL UNLK’ on CONSULT soreen js touched NOTE: ian hea ‘This tem is displayed, but cannot be monitored NOTE: CODE AO This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored EXL-262 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R) rooms APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with |PDM E/R. Diagness mode Deserpton Sel Diagnostic Real Displays the diagnose reused by IPOM ER Data Montor Displays the ear me npuffoubut deta fom [PEM ER npg dala Werk Suppor ‘Change the sting foreach sytem neon ‘ative Test TPDM EIR can provide a drive signa electronic componens to check heir operation. Eau enicaon “Alows confirmation of POM E7R part number contguraton {inte he vee speticaten wen epiacng POM Em TAN Diag Supper Mentor The rests of ranemitrecive agnosis of CAN communicator can be read SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT Refer to PCS-38, "DTC Index". Freeze Frame Data (FFD) The IPDM E/R records the vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on CON- SULT, DATA MONITOR NOTE: The following table includes information (jtems) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items, Wontoriem {Und Ewe REVERSE SIGNAL eae Displays the stats of everse postion signal udged by IPOM E/R IGN RELAY Displays the status of he igiton relay judged by IPDM E/R [OpenvCiose) splays init relay judged by rust ip i vs Sak Gre Pisani Gaited er agea by EDEN fa NEUTRAL SW Depay esi fe neal poston spa (WT) hago byIPOM ER [Open/Close] lepine: pe ‘signal (M/T) Juaged by IER CORE Delays re dab ote vnarison range seh (CVT ogee by POM ER OL PRESSURE ST ou rrEssy Disiayetre stats ofthe al preseue sch nepedby POW ER Displays the LED headlamp (right) ON/OFF status judged by IPDM EIR NOTE: Tis item js monitored onty on the vehicle with LED headlamp. Displays the LED headlamp (let) ON/OFF status judged by IPDM E/R, NOTE: LED HA RH STATUS [OpentCiose] LED HA LH STATUS: Wopentcioes] This item is monitored only on the vehicle with LED headlamp. wooSH 5 ooo Dis he ss of ood eee POM ER COMRESSOR cow Dit coupe sage PON ER OSPR INE Dips si of ie endanp weshe ely ped by POW ER EXL-263 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ns a Onciton RORVREDY Dies st hr rey age POM ER COOLNS FA Dias a enn velo ve Sans gedby POM ER FRONT WIPER HILO RELAY [orton Displays the front wiper HHLO relay chive status judged by IPDM E/R. FRONT WIPER RELAY fotony Displays the front wiper relay drive status judged by IPOM E/R, IGN RELAY OFF STATUS [omony Displays the status of the ignition relay OFF cuit judged by IPDM E/R. IEA RELATON STATUS Diy ess te ton ey ON cra age POM ER PEERING OER PURERE? Disay The paver spy sus Tom POW ER To he slow ek nt Fe This item is monitored only on the vehicle with Intelligent Key system EEIOTT SENSOR PAR SPY | cpayemeponr apy stom POM Eo ehean ees ‘COOLING FAN RELAY 7 fomony Displays the status ofthe cooling fan relay-1 judged by IPDM E/R, SIARVER RELAY’ Displays the status of the starter relay judged by IPOM E/R. (0110n) eho Displays the compressor contl signal (PWM) statis of POM ER. ‘COOLING FAN RELAY 2 wa) Displays the status ofthe cooling fan relay-S judged by IPOM E/R, FR FOG LAMP LH Displays the ront fog lamp (Ie) output (PYM) status of IPDM EMR, v4 ia ee aE Displays the front fog lamp (right) output (PWM) status of IPDM E/R. ere Dsl te ning lr ve shal PA) sto POM ER rane er Dil pangane ap Psat oPOM ER Sue Dye lon et) aut PA) Ss POM ER ALCAN Depa alone gt apt en aausot POM ER DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT LH fl Displays the daytime running light (et) output status of POM E/R DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RH fel Displays the daytime running light (right) output status of POM EIR. HEADLAMP [HI)LH e Dil reap (et aap Sako POM ER laa Dias ne ease (A) a ovpu PHN seus otFOM ER SEARO Daye reedanp (00 aap PAN sab FON ER eso Dine exc (0) (on augur PN sf POKER “ACRE STU pajehi DER aaa GagReaROaPONER EXL-264 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Wontor tem ma Description NIGRELAY Displays the statis of he AC relay judged by IPDM EIR. Cee splays ay judged by Son EG EDTUS Displays the compressor malfunction diagnosis status judged by IPOM EAR (OKING| ‘VERIGLE SECURITY HORN NOTE: [OFrOn] The item is indicated, but not monitored BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR Displays the bailey curent Sensor mallunction diagnosis stats judged by IPDM E (OKI R FRONT FOG LAMP ee Displays the fog lamp ilumination contol status of IPOM ER. pte ECV URRENT Displays the electric current output fo compressor judged by IPM E/R Ay NSE Displays the status ofthe battory voltage judged by IPDM EIR. ee Dieplays the cooling fan output signal status of POM EIR. HOOD SW (CAN) atone Displays the status ofthe hood switch judged by IPDM EiR FRONT WIPER fe ut eee Displays the front wiper motor drive cant! status of POM ER. FRWPER STOP POSITION a FREE Displays the stats ofthe front wiper positon status judged by [POM E/R ERTL Aas) the headlamp (Hl llumination conto status Haan Displays the headlamp (HI) ilumination contro status of IPDM E/R ean) Displays the heaciamp (LO) shumination control status of IPM E/R IGNITION RELAY STATUS ae Displays the ignition relay output status of IPDM EPR. IN RELACHONTCE Displays the status ofthe igniton relay judged by IPOM EIR [Ono] eee Displays the status of the igniton power suppy judged by IPOM EIR. INTERLOGKIPNP SW (CAN) Displays the status ofthe rensmissionrenge switch signal that IPDM transmits via [ORO] CAN communication NEUTRAL SWITCH (CAN) Displays the talus ofthe neural postion switch (AT) signal that POM transmits vie [ontonnG] GAN communicaton, PUSH BUTTON IGN SW (CAN) Displays the status of the ignition switch signal that IPDM transmits via CAN commu (orn) ication TAILLAMP ae Displays the tall amp ilumination contol status of POM E/R, REVERSE SIGNAL (CAN) Displays the status ofthe reverse switch (W/) Snel that POM Fensmits via OAN (OOANG} communication. ‘STAST CONT RELAY STATUS Displays the status of he start contol relay and Sar motor relay Salus judged by (ONOH, OWST R On} IPOM E”R STARTER MOTOR STATUS (orOnA-TIME] Displays the status ofthe starter motor udged by IPDM E/R ‘STARTER RELAY (CAN) Displays te situs ofthe IPDM E/R transmis the saver contol réay Salus Sanat {LOWMIGHING] Wa CAN communication IPDM NOT SLEEP Displays the statis ofthe IPDM E/R transmis the not seep signal via CAN commu [NO RDYREADY] ication EXL-265 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ‘Monitor Ram (Unit Description ‘AFTER COOLING TIME [No requesv0 Smin/1.Omin/t.Smin’ 2.0minv2.Sminv3.Omin’3.SminvémirvSein {min/émiv1Omir12min/ 4m 6min} NOTE: “The item is indicated, but not monitored ‘AFTER COOLING SPEED NOTE: RR EERACREERTOR OM REN “The item is indicated, but not monitored. 100%] ‘COOLING FAN TYPE NOTE: IRENAULTINISSAN] “The item is indicated, but not monitored. ‘COMPRESSOR REQ 1 Displays the status of he A/C compressor request Signal received from ECM via CAN fotv'on} ‘communication, ‘VHCL SECRITY HORN REQ. NOTE: [o#t1On} “The item is indicated, but not monitored, DTRLREQ Displays the status ofthe daytime running ight request signal received from BCM via fottton| ‘CAN communication, ~ SLEEPAWAKE UP NOTE: ISLEEP/WAKEUP] The item is indicated, but not monitored. ‘CLUTCH INTERLOCK SW NOTE: [OWffOn/NG) “The item is indicated, but not monitored. ‘GRANKING ENABLE-TOM Displays the status of the cranking enable signal received from TCM via CAN com- [oKING) munication. ‘GRANKING ENABLE-EGM Displays the status of the cranking enable signal received ffom ECM via CAN com- [OKINGISTOP Mo request) ‘munication. ‘CAN DIAGNOSIS: Displays the status of the GAN dlagnosis signel received from BGM via CAN commu- [OKING) nieaton, FRONT FOG LAMP REQ Displays the status of the front fog light request signal received from BOM via CAN [oftOn} ‘communicaton. Hi WASHER REQ Displays the status of the headlamp washer request signal received from BGM via [oWvion} CAN communication, PASSING REQ NOTE: [ott1On} “The item is indicated, but not monitored. HIGH BEAM REQ DDisplays the status of the high beam request signal received from BGM via GAN com- [ottion ‘munication. HORN CHIRP Displays the status of the horn reminder signal received from BOM via CAN commu- lottfon| nication. ‘COOLING FAN REQ Displays the status of the cooling fen speed request signal received from ECM via 6) ‘CAN communication, ENGINE STATUS Displays the stafus of the engine status signal received from ECM via CAN commu- ISTOPADLINGRUN] nication TURN SIGNAL REQ Displays the stalus of the tum indleator signal received fom BGM via CAN commu (OMLHRH) nication, FRWIPER REQ Displays the status ofthe Font wiper request agnal received From BOM via GAN com= IRETURNISTOPINGILOWIHIGH] munication ‘SHIFT POSITION Displays the status ofthe shifi positon signal received from TCM via CAN communi [OFF/PIR/NIDISIL/B/V203/4/516/7] cation. LOW BEAM REQ Displays the status ofthe low beam request signal received from BCM vie CAN com- foton] munication, POSITION LIGHT REQ Displays the status of the posiion light request signal received from BM via CAN [orton ‘communicaton, ‘COMPRESSOR REQ 2 Displays the siaus of the AIG ON signal recelved from AIG auto amp. via GAN com- [oon munication, IGNITION SW Displays the status ofthe ignition svitch ON signal and starter control relay request [OMfOnISTARTINo request} signal received from BCM via CAN communicaton, EXL-266 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Wontor tem Tan Description ‘VEHICLE SPEED (METER) Displays the satus of he AIG ON signal received rom A/G auto amp. Wa GAN om [ken ‘municaten. BAT DISCHARGE COUNT H Monitor the cumulative discharge value ofthe battery NOTE: When 65,000 or mere is counted, replace the battery P LAMP CIRC MALFUNCTN fo-1) Monitor te umber of mes thatthe smart FET in IPDM E/R reaches the retry upper limit ofthe parking lamp circuit. NOTE: When the number of parking lamp circuit reties counts 20, this item counts 4 NMB P LAMP CIRC RETRY 0-20) Monitor the number of mes thal the emert FET In IPDM EIR perl the retry ofthe parking lamp circult NOTE: When the number of short circuits in the parking lamp circuit count is § and the igni- tion switch OFF to ON operation is detected, this item counts NMWE P LAMP CIRC SHORT fo-5) Monitor the number affimes that he smart FET In POM EIR detects the over current ofthe parking lamp circuit, DTRLLH CIRC MALFUNCTN fo-4) Monitor the number offimes thatthe smart FET n IPDM E/R reaches the rey upper limit of the daytime running ight (let) crcut. NOTE: When the number of daytime running light eft) circuit retries count is 20, this item counts 4 NMB DTRLLH CIRC RETRY lo-29) Monior he numberof times thal the smart FET In IPDM EVR permis the rary ofthe daytime running light (et) cuit NOTE: When the numberof short circuits in the dayme running light (let) circuit counts § {and the ignition switch OFF to ON operation is detected, thisitem counts 1, ‘MB DTRLLH GIRC SHORT 0-5) Monitor tenumber ofimes hal ihe smart FET In IPDM E/R delecis the over current ofthe daytime running light left) circuit DTRLRH CIRC MALFUNCTN lo-4) ‘Monitor the numberof mes thatthe smart FET In IPDM E/R reaches he rety upper limit ofthe daytime running lght ight) circult NOTE: When the number of daytime running light (righ!) circuit retries count is 20, tis iter counts 4 NMB DTRL RH CIRC RETRY 0-29) Monitor he number oftimes thal the smart FET In IPDM EVR permis the retiy ofthe daytime running light (ight) creut NOTE: When the number of short circuits inthe daytime running light right) creuit count is 5 and the ignition switch OFF to ON operation is detected, thisitem counts 4 NMB TRL RH CIRC SHORT 0-8) Monitor te number affimes thal ihe smart FET In POM E/R detects the over current ‘ofthe daytime running light (ight) excut F FOG LHCIRC MALFUNCTN = ‘Monitor the number of mes thatthe smart FET in IPDM E/R reaches the rety upper limit ofthe front fog tamp (et) cul. NOTE: When the numberof front fog lamp (left) circuit retries count is 20, this item counts 1 NMB F FOG LH CIRC RETRY [0-20] ‘Manor he number ofmes thatthe smart FET In IPDM EIR permis the retry ofthe ‘ont og lamp (et) cicut. NOTE: When the numberof shor rculsin the frant fog lamp (left) ecuit countis 8 andthe Igniton switch OFF to ON operation is detected, this item counts + ‘Ni F FOG LH CIRC SHORT (0-5) ‘Monitor the number of tines tal ihe smari FET In POM E/R detects the over current cof the font fog fap (let) circuit F FOG RH CIRC MALFUNCTN 0-11 Monitor the numberof mes thal the cmart FET in IPDM E/R reaches the rety upper limit ofthe front fog lamp (nght) circu. NOTE: When the number of rontfog lamp (right ccultretles counts 20 his tem counts 1 EXL-267 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ‘itor tere me Description ‘Monitor the number of mes hal he 6mart FET in IPDM EIR permis the rey ofthe front fog lamp (night) ecu qua ex i cme er bent When the number of short circuits inthe front fog lamp (right) ereult count is § and the ignition switen OFF to ON operation is detected, this item counts 1 NING F FOG RH GIRG SHORT Monitor the number of mes that the emart FET In POM EIR detects he over current o-5) ‘of the front fag lamp (eight) cut. Monitor the number of imes that te smart FET in IPDM E”R reaches the rely upper HL (HI) LH CIRC MALFUNCTN, limit ofthe headlamp (Hl) (left) circuit o-11 NOTE: When the number of headtamp (HI) (left) circuit reties count is 20, thst counts 1. ‘Monitor the numberof times that the smart FET in IPDM EIR permits the rety ofthe te HL (th LH CIRC RETRY hea (He) ret ee 20, ‘When the number of short circuits in the headlamp (HI) (left) circuit count is § and the Ion oh OF t9ON cpr eatoaee eon costs TEAL VLA GRE SHORT Toner rarer mes le sar FETin PDN ER detecs Horr Te (0-5) of the headlamp (Hi) (left) Greuit, Torr ere nes al hear FET n POM ER reaches We eV OpDE uemmicincwauruiern | ntste atone tH) ane ho Wore. When the number ofhreaclamp (Hi) right) Grout retries counts 20, this item counts 1 Monitor the number of times that the smart FET in POM EIR pers the rety ofthe headlamp (HI (ight rut NOTE: NMB-HL (Hl) RH CIRC RETRY D-20) ‘When the number of short circuits in the headlamp (HI) (right) cireuit count is § and thevrten sien OFF 0 ON operon eds tem cout 4 TMB HLH) RHIRG SHORT Honor enunber of mes tal the ser FET in POM EIR dees heave cuvent baa cfg heasan (1) (gh) crt Tonto err of esta te aan FET HIPDN ER Teaches ee PDH SIL ORG MALFUNGTN lint of he tering ek cre pen nore (en fe rune ofseeng lock crates cots 20 thse counts Honore uber ies hat he sa FET n PD ER parish ay oh te iL ciRe RETRY ser bain (o-20) er ine umber of short kesin the serng lack rei eoutis anche niton sch OF 0 ON operons deo, he coun TE SIC ORSSHORT Tonto euro ies ale sar FET POM EIR Geel We vant ea of sewing tock Set Toner errr of imesh hearer FET HIPOM ER Teaches ee HLUO)LHORE MaLFUNcrN | Imor the neademp (LO) fe) cra fp-1] NOTE: When the number of headlamp (LO) (left) circuit reties counts 20 this item counts 1 ‘Monitor the number of mas thai the smart FET in IPDM EIR permis the rety ofthe hheadiamp (LO) (let creut. NOTE: NMB HL (LO) LH CIRC RETRY b-20) \When the numberof short crcl inthe headlamp (LO) (Je) eeuit count is 8 and the ignition switen OFF to ON operation Is detected, thisitem counts 4 TMB HL (LO) LHGIRG SHORT ‘Monitor the numberof mes tal te smart FET in |POM EIR detects he over Curent p-5) ofthe neastam (LO) (et eet ‘Monitor ihe number of times thatthe smart FET in IPDM EIR reaches the retry upper CYCLE ins Marana lor the neacta (LO} ght) areut p-1] Nore: When the number ofheadlamp (LO) (right) crcultretres count is 20, thisitem counts 1 EXL-268 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ‘Monitor nem [nit Description NMB HL (LO) RH CIRC RETRY lo-20) Monitor the numberof times thatthe emart FET In IPM EVR permits the reiy of the headlamp (LO) right) crcut NOTE: When the number of short ecuits in the headlamp (LO) (right) creut count is 6 and the Ignition switch OFF to ON operation is detected, this item counts 1 NMB HL (LO) RH CIRC SHORT fo-5), Monitor the number oftines that ihe smart FET In PDM E/R detecis the over current of the headlamp (LO) (ight crcut T LAMP LH CIRC MALFUNCTN, fo-1) Monitor the number of fmes that the smart FET in IPDM E/R reaches the rety upper limit ofthe tall lamp (lef circuit NOTE: When the numberof tail lamp (lft) circuit reties count is 20, this tem counts 1. Monitor the numberof times thatthe smart FET In IPDM EVR pernts the retry of the tail lamp (et) circuit NMBT LAMP LH CIRC RETRY ay i NOTE: When the number of short ecuits in the tal lamp (lef) circuit counts § and the igni- tion switch OFF to ON operation is detected, this item counts 1. NMBT LAMP LH GIRG SHORT Monitor the number oftimes thatthe smart FET In POM E/R detects the over current 0-5), ofthe tail lamp (lft) cult T LAMP RH CIRC MALFUNCTN fo-1) Moritor the numberof mes thal the smart FET in IPDM E/R reaches the retry upper limit ofthe tail lamp (ight) rout, NOTE: When the numberof tall larnp (right) circuit retries count is 20, this item counts 1 NMBT LAMP RH CIRC RETRY [a—20) Monitor the number of times that the smart FET in IPDM EIR permis the reiy ofthe faillamp (ight) cut NOTE: When the number of short creuitsin the talllamp (right) crcut counts § and the ig- ition switch OFF to ON operation is detected, thisitem counts 1 NWBT LAMP RH CIRG SHORT Monitor the number oftimes thal the smart FET in IPDM E/R delecis the over current Run the cooling fan at high speed. HEADLAMP (HI) OFF 0-5) ‘ofthe tal lamp (right) crcut BATTERY STATUS Snes Monitor the battery status from the battery output ACTIVE TEST Testiion peraton Deserpiion on | OFF HORN | aera (On | Operates hom relay for 20 ms. on | OFF HEADLAMP WASHER (On| Operates headlamp washer relay for 10 ms on | OFF FRONT WIPER Low _ | Operates the front wiper relay, High | Operates tie front wiper relay and font wiper HILO relay ‘ | ao oe = COMPRESSOR On | Operates te AIC relay. on | OFF ‘COOLING FAN (MONO) | Lo | Rumthe cooling fan at low speed. Hi of On HEADLAMP (LO) ‘Operates he headlamp (HI) on | OFF On __| Operates the headlamp (LO), EXL-269 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Test fern ‘peraton Desergtion on __| OFF FRONT FOG LAMP ‘On| Operates the frontfog lamp on | OFF DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT Se ‘On| Operates the parking lap (Gaytime running lant operation) on | OFF PARKING LAMP ‘On| Operates the parking amp on | oFF TAILLANP. ‘On| Operates the tall lamp. Relum te optical axis to the default postion Deteut | NOTE: OPTIC AXIS ACTIVE TEST while the headlamp is OFF, it doesnot retum to the default poston. Tower _| Adjustithe optical ads the lowermost pont. WORK SUPPORT Wotan Dessrpton ‘SENSOR INITIALIZE ‘Adjusts the height sensor signal output value in the unloaded vehicle condition. ‘GML BIDCHRG GRNT CLEAR Tnthis mode, cumulative battery discharge currents Geared EXL-270 BCM, IPDM E/R, FRONT CAMERA UNIT < ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION BCM, IPDM E/R, FRONT CAMERA UNIT List of ECU Reference POM ER Front eamera unit* © With high beam assist system EXL-271 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] WIRING DIAGRAM EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM EXL-272 corny EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Ele} a Lo Be Je Soetes ag EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] EXL-274 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] EXL-275 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > ag @e oul ® ie) EXL-276 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] L 2 lea of =9 EXL-277 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > i WSISAS SNUNOT BORED EXL-279 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > ao | woe WSISAS ONINBH HOTS EXL-280 [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] @ EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM Bx - =| i ” < WIRING DIAGRAM > WSISAS SNAHOT BORED EXL-281 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > ia 7 Pepr] WSISAS SNUHOT HOTS EXL-282 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > WSISAS SNA BORED EXL-283 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > Taman of WSISAS SNUHOMT EXL-284 [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ele = EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM z WSISAS SNOT BORED < WIRING DIAGRAM > EXL-285 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] -XTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM EXL-286 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > at EXL-287 [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Ha EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > WSISAS SNUHOT SOL EXL-288 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > WSISAS SNUNOT BOWES EXL-289 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > WSISAS SNUHOT SOTSSIXS EXL-290 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > WSISAS SNAHOT BORED EXL-291 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > aeceam WSISAS SNUHOT SOSA EXL-292 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > a abs alee E WSISAS ONAN BOREDS EXL-293 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > Here DeTocl WSISAS SNUHOT SOL EXL-294 [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM < WIRING DIAGRAM > a ete WSISAS SNUNOT BONES EXL-295 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < WIRING DIAGRAM > a W3LSAS ONAHOIT BOWEL EXL-296 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] BASIC INSPECTION DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW Work Flow wroncemnarans OVERALL SEQUENCE 2, Check DTC Pt of OTC andrea re dia (er wit Sheol serves tines. T | Symptom snot deste Symptom i aesenbed Bree doetoe Brera detecto, (Conti he aymptom | Tryte-conter the symptom deserbed | brite casome. > ‘Detect mainetoning system by ‘SYUPTOM DIAGNOSIS: Pod ‘Symptom Smpome bere ese, Xe | Greccinpavoutpr Signal orwotage poe [eRe Sea. | Garton eran a clara cn a, em hack Patina eae [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 4 .GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM 1 Gel detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurs). 2. Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning. >>GOTO2. 2..cHECk DTC ‘Check DTC. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected, Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.) Erase DTC. ‘Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer. ‘Check telated service bulletins for information Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected? ‘Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3. ‘Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4. ‘Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5. 3.cONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. >2GOTOS. 4.coNFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected >>GOTO6, ‘5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time. If two or more DTCs are detected, refer io DTC INSPECTION PRIORITY CHART, and determine trouble diag- nosis order. NOTE: + Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected. + Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this check. If the result of Component Function Check is NG, itis the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR- MATION PROCEDURE IsDTC detected? YES >>GOTO7. NO >> Check according to Gi-44, “Intermittent Incident”. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. Isthe symptom described? YES >>GOTO7. NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CON- SULT. 7 .DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE EXL-298 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW < BASIC INSPECTION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system. [s malfunctioni dotect YES >>GOTO8 NO >> Check according to Gi-44, “Intermittent Incident. 8. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 7, Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. 2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replace- ment. 3. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it. >> GO TOS. Q.FINAL CHECK ‘When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the matfunction is repaired securely. When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the symptom is not detected, IsDTC detected and does symptom remain? YES-1 >> DTCis detected: GO TO 7. YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4, NO ~ >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC. EXL-299 B121A FRONT FOG LAMP LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DTCICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS B121A FRONT FOG LAMP LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DTC Description ignored DTC DETECTION LOGIC ‘CONSULT soreen terms Bye; (Trouble diagnosis content) See FRFOG LAMP LHPWRSPLY CIRC | [ORC When front fg lamp ON condlions are satisfied (amart 121A _ | (Front fog lamp letthand power supply cr- | SHORT TO | FET inside PDM EVR is ON}, and overeurent is detected cut) GRNO}__| Inthe front tog amp LH power supply creult POSSIBLE CAUSE + Hamess or connector + Front fog lamp LH bulb + IPOMER FAIL-SAFE Shuts off the power supply to the front fog lamp LH power supply circuit until the front fog lamp ON conditions are no longer satisfied. DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1 PRECONDITIONING With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "F FOG LH CIRC MALFUNCTN” in "Data Monitor’ mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 3. Check the monitor status. Twonitor Rem Montor satus 0 7 F FOG LH CIRC MALFUNCTN What is the monitor status? ‘0° >>GOTO2. “{" >> A short circuit is detected multiple times in the front fog lamp LH power supply circuit, and damage accumulates at the smart FET inside the IPDM E/R. For this reason, IPDM E/R does not tun ON the smart FET. Because the DTC cannot be reproduced in this state, perform EXL-300, "Diagno- sis Procedure" and replace IPDM E/R after the malfunctioning part is repaired. Refer to PCS-60. 2. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Tum ignition switch ON, 3. Tum lighting switch 1ST, and front fog lamp switch ON. 4. Select "Self Diagnostic Result” mode of "PDM E/R” using CONSULT. 5. Check DTC. Is DIC detected? YES >> Refer to EXL-300, “Diagnosis Procedure” NO-1 >>To cheok malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to Gi-44, "intermittent Incident’ NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END, Diagnosis Procedure wrowaonnaonorsere 1. CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) T__Tum ignition snitch OFF EXL-300 B121A FRONT FOG LAMP LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DTCICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 2. Turn lighting switch OFF, and front fog lamp switch OFF. 3. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front fog lamp LH connector. 4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R hamess connector and ground. POM ER = Continuity Conneator Terminal E18 a Ground Not existed Isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2 NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 2..CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP LH POWER SUPPLY (With CONSULT 1, Connect IPDM E/R connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON 3. Select "FRONT FOG LAMP” in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT, 4. With operating the test items, check the vollage between front fog lamp LH hamess connector and ground, —__FrontregiamptH | 5 Testitom Votiage Gonnecior | _Temninal FRONT FOG [O" =76V E159 1 Ground | CRON = <= isthe inspedtion result normal? YES >>GOTO3 NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to 2GS-80, "Removal and |nsiallation*. 3.cHECK FRONT FOG LAMP LH BULB Check the front fog lamp LH bulb. Refer to EXL-d01, “Component Inspection” .¢ inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace front fog lamp LH bulb. Refer to EXL-379, "Replacement" Component Inspection hime Ea 1 CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP LH BULB 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2, Disconnect front fog lamp LH connector. 3. Check resistance of front fog lamp LH terminals. Front fog lamp LH Resistance Terminal T 2 Excepl 00 isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace front fog lamp LH bulb. Refer to EXL-379 "Replacement" EXL-301 B1231 DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] B1231 DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DTC Description —— DTC DETECTION LOGIC CONSULT scean tans pes (Trouble diagnosis content DTC detection condtion When dayiine rnning Tight ON condltons are eased 51201 | Ste ee Sr Rand power | Stosar ro. | (ea FET iste POM ER is ON), and ovecuentis supply cru Shag] | semcsinn ayenerenngtetstpower spor POSSIBLE CAUSE + Hamess or connector + Front combination lamp RH internal circuit ~ LED (Daytime running light) = Control circuit - Hamess + IPOMER FAIL-SAFE Shuts off the power supply to the daytime running light RH power supply circuit until the daytime running light ON conditions are no longer satisfied. DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1. PRECONDITIONING With CONSULT Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "DTRL RH CIRC MALFUNCTN" in "Data Monitor’ mode of *IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 3. Check the monitor status. Tionitor fem Montor Satis 0 1 DTRL RH CIRC MALFUNCTN Whatis the monitor status? “0” > GOTO2. “{" >> A short circuit is detected multiple times in the daytime running light RH power supply circuit, and damage accumulates at the smart FET inside the IPDM E/R. For this reason, IPDM E/R does not tum ON the smart FET. Because the DTC cannot be reproduced in this stale, perform EXL-302, “Diagnosis Procedure” and replace IPDM E/R afler the malfunctioning part is repaired. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation’ 2. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT 1. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Start engine. 3. Select "Self Diagnostic Result” mode of /PDM E/R” using CONSULT. 4, Check DTC. Is DIC detected? YES >> Refer to EXL-302, “Diagnosis Procedure” NO-1 >>To cheok malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to Gi-44, “intermittent Incident”. NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure apc 1 .CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) EXL-302 B1231 DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 7. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front combination lamp RH connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground, POM ER = Continuity Conneator Terminal E19 EJ Ground Not existed Isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2 NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 2. CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RH POWER SUPPLY (With CONSULT 1, Connect IPDM E/R connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON 3. Select "DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT" in “Active Test" mode of "IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 4. With operating the test items, check the voltage between front combination lamp RH hamess connector and ground, TFerteombnatonampRa | Testitem Vvatage Treonnecor | _Teminal | DAYTIME [On sev est : exound | RUNKING UHT on o-1v isthe inspection result nomal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60. “Removal and lnstallalion*. 3. cHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RH ‘Gheck the daylime running ight RH. Refer to EXL-S0S, Componen| Inspecion™ Isthe inspection resull normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace front combination lamp RH. Refer to EXL-376. ‘Removal and Installation’. Component Inspection so cnonnoc rset fa 1 CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RH 7, Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front combination lamp RH connector. 3. Check resistance of front combination lamp RH terminals. Front combination lamp RH Resistance Terminal Excopt 00 isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace front combination lamp RH. Refer to EXL-376, ‘Removal and Installation’, EXL-303 B1256 FRONT FOG LAMP RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] B1256 FRONT FOG LAMP RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DTC Description DTC DETECTION LOGIC CONSULT soeen tems DTC No. inetd ed DTC detection condition FRFOGLAMP RHPWRSPLYGIRC | [CIRC \Wen front fog lamp ON conditions are satisfed (smart 81256 | (Frontfog amp rignthand power supply ar-| SHORT TO | FETinside|PDM E/Ris ON}, ana overcurrent is detected culty GRND]__| inthe font fog lamp RH power supply circuit POSSIBLE CAUSE + Hamess or connector + Front fog lamp RH bulb + IPOMER FAIL-SAFE Shuts off the power supply to the front fog lamp RH power supply circuit until the front fog lamp ON conditions are no longer satisfied. DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1 PRECONDITIONING With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "F FOG RH CIRC MALFUNCTN’ in “Data Monitor” mode of IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 3. Check the monitor status. Wonitor fem Montor satus o 7 F FOG RH CIRC MALFUNCTN What is the monitor status? “0” >> GOTO2. “{" >A short circuit is detected multiple times in the front fog lamp RH power supply circuit, and dam- age accumulates at the smart FET inside the IPDM E/R. For this reason, IPDM E/R does not turn ‘ON the smart FET. Because the DTC cannot be reproduced in this state, perform ‘nosis Procedure” and replace IPDM E/R after the malfunctioning partis repaired. Refer to PCS- 60. "Removal and Installation”. 2. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE @With CONSULT 1, Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Tum ignition switch ON. 3. Tum lighting switch 1ST, and front fog lamp switch ON. 4. Select "Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 5. Check DTC As DIC detected? YES >> Refer to EXL-04, "Diagnosis Procedure” NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to Gl-44, “Intermittent Incident” NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure wropemunevarsEr 1 .cHECK FRONT FOG LAMP RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) 7__Turm ignition switch OFF. 2. Tum lighting switch OFF, and front fog lamp switch OFF. 3. Disconnect IPDM EIR connector and front fog lamp RH connector. EXL-304 B1256 FRONT FOG LAMP RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] “4, Cheok continuity between IPDM E/R hamess connector and ground. POM ER Continuity Connector Terminal E19 a Grind Tot existed isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2 NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 2..CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP RH POWER SUPPLY (With CONSULT 1. Connect IPDM E/R connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON 3. Select "FRONT FOG LAMP" in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 4. With operating the test items, check the voltage between front fog lamp RH hamess connector and ‘ground. Front fea lamp RH : Testitem Votiage Connector | Terminal FrontTros [On 9-16V E168 1 Ground | FRON — — isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3 NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60. "Removal and Installation’ 3. cHECK FRONT FOG LAMP RH BULB Check the front fog lamp RH bulb, Refer to EXL-05, “Component Inspection Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace front fog lamp RH bulb. Refer to EXL-379. "Replacement". Component Inspection 1 .cHECK FRONT FOG LAMP RH BULB 7. Tum ignition snitch OFF. 2. Disconnect front fog lamp RH connector. 3. Check resistance of front fog lamp RH terminals. Frentiog lamp RA ee Resistance Teminal i 2 Except 00 Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace front fog lamp RH bulb. Refer to EXL-379, “Replacement”. EXL-305 B20CB DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT = [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] B20CB DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DTC Description a DTC DETECTION LOGIC re (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition ‘When daytime running light ON conditions are satisfied coc |e LH A Se a ower sup| (Sgr to | (a FET ste POM ERG ON), and overuents pare) SHORT TO | Ceci inte dyanerminghi Power sip oat POSSIBLE CAUSE + Hamess or connector + Front combination lamp LH internal circuit ~ LED (Daytime running light) = Control circuit - Hamess + IPOMER FAIL-SAFE Shuts off the power supply to the daytime running light LH power supply circuit until the daytime running light ON conditions are no longer satisfied. DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1 PRECONDITIONING With CONSULT “Turn ignition switch ON 2. Select "DTRL LH CIRC MALFUNCTN’ in “Data Monitor” mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 3. Check the monitor status. Tionitor fem Montor satus o 1 DTRL LH CIRC MALFUNCTN, What is the monitor status? “0” >>GOTO2. “{" >> A short circuil is detected multiple times in the daytime running light LH power supply circuit, and damage accumulates at the smart FET inside the IPDM E/R. For this reason, IPDM E/R does not tum ON the smart FET. Because the DTC cannot be reproduced in this stale, perform EXL-305, “Diagnosis Procedure” and replace IPDM EIR afler the malfunctioning part is repaired. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation’ 2. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT 1. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Start engine. 3. Select "Self Diagnostic Result” mode of /PDM E/R” using CONSULT. 4, Check DTC. Is DIC detected? YES >> Refer to EXL-306, "Diagnosis Procedure” NO-1 >>To cheok malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to Gi-44, “intermittent Incident” NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure ann 1 .CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) EXL-306 B20CB DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 7. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect |PDM E/R connector and front combination lamp LH connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground, POM ER = Continuity Conneator Terminal E18 2 Ground Not existed Isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 2..CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT LH POWER SUPPLY (With CONSULT 1, Connect IPDM E/R connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON 3. Select "DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT" in “Active Test" mode of "IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 4. With operating the test items, check the vollage belween front combination lamp LH harness connector ‘and ground, Trencoronatnemtn | Testtem vonage Treonnecor | _Teminal — | DAYTIME [On sev e1ss : exound | RUNKING UsHT on o-1v isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60. “Removal and lnstallalion*. 3.cHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT LH ‘Check the daytime running light LH. Refer to EXL-307, “Component Inspection’. isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace front combination lamp LH. Refer to EXL-376. “Removal and installation", Component Inspection so cononnoc ras fa 1. CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT LH 7, Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front combination lamp LH connector. 3. Check resistance of front combination lamp LH terminals. Front combination lamp LA Resistance Terminal 7 2 Except 00 isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace front combination lamp LH. Refer to EXL-376, "Removal and installation’. EXL-307 B20CE HEADLAMP (HI) LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] B20CE HEADLAMP (HI) LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DTC Description nrooomen ares) DTC DETECTION LOGIC CONSULT exeen tems DTC No. jreceaur ee ed DTC detection condition HL (HI) LH PWR SPLY CIRC Tene When headlamp (HI) ON conaitions are satisfied (smart B20cE | [Heaclamp (nigh) let hand power supply | SHORT TO | FET inside IPM E/R is ON), and overeurrentis detected ecu) GRND]__| inthe neaciamp (Hl) LH power supply arcu POSSIBLE CAUSE + Hamess or connector + Headlamp (HI) LH bulb + Headlamp (Hl) LH hamess + IPDMER FAIL-SAFE Shuts off the povrer supply to the headlamp (HI) LH power supply circuit until the headlamp (HI) ON conditions are no longer satisfied DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1 PRECONDITIONING With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “HL (HI) LH CIRC MALFUNCTN’ in “Data Monitor’ mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 3. Check the monitor status. Tonite Nem Montor sae o 1 HL (HI) LH GIRG MALFUNCTN What is the monitor status? “0” >> GOTO? “1" >A short circuit is detected multiple times in the headiamp (Hl) LH power supply circuit, and dam- ‘age accumulates at the smart FET inside the IPDM E/R. For this reason, IPDM E/R does not turn (ON the smart FET. Because the DTC cannot be reproduced in this stale, perform EXL-308, “Diao- and replace [POM ER ater ihe malfunctioning partis repaired. Refer to BCS: 60, "Removal and ins in 2. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE @With CONSULT 1, Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Turignition switch ON. 3. Tum lighting switch 2ND, and lighting switch Hi 4. Select "Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 5. Check DTC. IsDTC detected? YES >> Refer to EXL.308, "Diagnosi dure’ NO-1_ >>To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to Gi-44, "Intermilien| Incident”, NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END, Diagnosis Procedure ein 1 .cHECK HEADLAMP (HI) LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) 7. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn lighting switch OFF. EXL-308 B20CE HEADLAMP (HI) LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 3, Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front combination lamp LH connector. 4, Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. POM ER =e ‘Continuity Connector Terminal E149 3 Ground Not existed isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 2. CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) LH POWER SUPPLY with CONSULT 4, Connect IPDM E/R connector. 2, Turn ignition switch ON 3. Select "HEADLAMP (H1)" in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 4, With operating the test items, check the voltage between front combination lamp LH harness connector and ground. “Front combination lamp LH | - Testitem Voltage Connector | __Terminal E183 8 Ground | HEADLAMP | On Lie Hi) on ont isthe inspection result normal? YES »>>GOTO3 NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-80. "Removal and Installalion*, 3.cHECK HEADLAMP (HI) LH Check the headlamp (Hi) LH, Refer to EXL-309, "Component Inspection’ Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Component Inspection seh 1 CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) LH fa 7, _Turmignition switch OFF 2. Disconnect front combination lamp LH connector. 3. Check resistance of front combination lamp LH terminals. Front combination amp UA Resistance Tenial é 3 Hepa isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >>GoTO2, 2..CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) LH 7, Remove headlamp (HI) LH bulb. 2. Check resistance of front combination lamp LH terminals. EXL-309 B20CE HEADLAMP (HI) LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Front combination lamp UH Resistance Terminal Except 0.0 Asthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace headlamp (HI) LH bulb. Refer to EXL-376, "Replacement NO >> Repair or replace the headlamp (Hl) LH harness. EXL-310 B20CF HEADLAMP (HI) RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] B20CF HEADLAMP (HI) RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DTC Description soonmcnae DTC DETECTION LOGIC ‘CONSULT screen terms DTC No. Grondeneee DTC detection condition HL (HI) RH PWR SPLY CIRC TaRe When headlamp (Hi) ON conditions are satisfied (smart 520CF | [Headlamp (high)left nand power supply | SHORTTO | FET inside IPDM E/R is ON}, and overcurrentis detected reult] GRND}__| inthe headlamp (HI) RH power supply circuit POSSIBLE CAUSE + Hamess or connector + Headlamp (HI) RH bulb + Headlamp (HI) RH hamess + IPDM EIR FAIL-SAFE Shuts off the power supply to the headlamp (HI) RH power supply circuit until the headlamp (HI) ON conditions are no longer satisfied. DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1 PRECONDITIONING With CONSULT 4, Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "HL (HI) RH CIRC MALFUNCTN’ in ‘Data Monitor’ mode of “IPDM E/R’ using CONSULT. 3. Check the monitor status. Wenttor em Monitor satus HL (Hi) RH CIR MALFUNCTN, Whats the monitor status? “0" >>GOTO2 “1” >> Ashort circuit is detected muitiple times in the headiamp (HI) RH power supply circuit, and dam- ‘age accumulates at the smart FET inside the IPDM E/R. For this reason, IPDM E/R does not tum ON the smart FET. Because the DTC cannot be reproduced in this state, perform EXL-311, "Diag- ‘nosis Procedure" and replace IPDM E/R after the matfunctioning part is repaired. Refer t PCS- ‘80, "Removal and Installation”. 2. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT Turn ignition switch OFF, Tum ignition switch ON. Turn lighting switch 2ND, and lighting switch Hl Select "Self Diagnostic Result” mode of "PDM E/R" using CONSULT. Check DTC. IsDIC detected? YES >> Refer to E: NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to Gl-44, “Inlermilfent Incident’ NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure xn comcnmere BeoNag 1 CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) 7, Tum ignition switeh OFF. 2. Turn lighting switch OFF. EXL-311 B20CF HEADLAMP (HI) RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 3, Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front combination lamp RH connector. 4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R hamess connector and ground. POM ERR ee og Continuity ‘Connector Terminal Ena 34 ‘Ground Not existed isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2 NO >> Repair or replace harness. 2. CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) RH POWER SUPPLY With CONSULT 1, Connect IPDM E/R connector. 2. Tum ignition switch ON 3. Select "HEADLAMP (HI)” in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 4. With operating the test items, check the voltage between front combination lamp RH harness connector and ground. s Test item votage Connector | __Teminal ets 6 ceroung | HEADLAMP | On ae Hy on ont isthe inspection result non YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60, “Removal and Installation". 3. CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) RH Check the headiamp (Al) RH. Refer to EXL-a12, “Component Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace the maffunctioning part. Component Inspection wearpeonnasnorse 4 .CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) RH 7. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front combination lamp RH connector. 3. Check resistance of front combination lamp RH terminals. Front combination lamp RA Resistance Terminal 6 3S Except 0 isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >>GOTO2. 2. CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) RH 7. Remove headlamp (Hl) RH bulb, 2. Check resistance of front com tion lamp RH terminals. EXL-312 B20CF HEADLAMP (HI) RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Front combination lamp Ri eRe Resistance Teminal é é Except isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace headlamp (HI) RH bulb. Refer to EXL-376 "Replacement". NO >> Repair or replace the headlamp (Hl) RH hamess. EXL-313 B20D0 HEADLAMP (LO) LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] B20D0 HEADLAMP (LO) LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DTC Description DTC DETECTION LOGIC CONSULT coeen tems DTC No. iretearee ted DTC detection condition HL (LO) LH PWR SPLY CIRC Tene When headlamp (LO) ON conltions are satisted (smart 182000 | [Heaclamp (low) let and power supply dr-| SHORT TO. | FET inside IPDM E/R is ON), and overeurrentis detected ult) GRND} | inthe heasiamp (LO) LH power supply circuit. POSSIBLE CAUSE + Hamess or connector + Headlamp (LO) LH bulb + Headlamp (LO) LH harness + IPDMEIR FAIL-SAFE Shuts off the power supply to the headlamp (LO) LH power supply circuit until the headlamp (LO) ON condi- tions are no longer satisfied, DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1 PRECONDITIONING With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "HL (LO) LH CIRC MALFUNCTN’ in “Data Monitor’ mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 3. Check the monitor status. Wonitor tem Montor sae o 1 HL (LO) LH CIRC MALFUNCTN What is the monitor status? “0” >>GOTO2 “{" >> short circuit is detected multiple times in the headkamp (LO) LH power supply circuit, and dam- ‘age accumulates at the smart FET inside the IPDM E/R. For this reason, IPDM E/R does not tum ‘ON the smart FET. Because the DTC cannot be reproduced in this state, perform EXL-314, "Diag nosis Procedure” and replace IPDM E/R after the malfunctioning part is repaired. Refer to PCS- ‘60, “Removal and Installation”. 2. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE wih consuLT Turn ignition switch OFF. Turm ignition switch ON. Tum lighting switch 2ND. Select "Self Diagnostic Result” mode of PDM E/R" using CONSULT. ‘Check DTC. Is DTC detected? YES >> Refer to EXL-314, "Dia NO-1 >>To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to Gi-44, “Intermitfent lncident’ NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure swrcwvamamnosarassea 1 .cHECK HEADLAMP (LO) LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) 7. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn lighting switch OFF. EXL-314 B20D0 HEADLAMP (LO) LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 3, Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front combination lamp LH connector. 4, Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. POM ER =e ‘Continuity Connector Terminal E148 30 Ground Not existed Isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 2. CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) LH POWER SUPPLY with CONSULT 4. Connect [POM E/R connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON 3. Select “HEADLAMP (LO)" In “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 4. With operating the test items, check the vottage between front combination lamp LH harness connector and ground —Forteonbnaionempth | Testtem vatage Connecter | __Terminal HEADLANP [On 9=16V E16. 7 wound a (Loy on ont isthe inspection result normal? YES »>>GOTO3 NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-80. "Removal and Installalion*, 3.cHECK HEADLAMP (LO) LH ‘Check the headlamp (LO) LH bulb. Refer to EXL-315, “Component Inspection”. Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Component Inspection see hlae 1 .cHECK HEADLAMP (LO) LH peu 7, _Turmignilion switch OFF, 2. Disconnect front combination lamp LH connector. 3. Check resistance of front combination lamp LH terminals. Front combination lamp LA Resistance Teminal 7 8 Excopt 0 isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >>GOTO2 2. CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) LH 7, Remove headlamp (HI) LH bulb. 2. Check resistance of front combination lamp LH terminals. EXL-315 B20D0 HEADLAMP (LO) LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Front combhaiion lamp UH Resistance Terminal Except 0.0 Asthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace headlamp (LO) LH bulb. Refer to EXL- NO >> Repair or replace the headlamp (LO) LH harness. EXL-316 B20D1 HEADLAMP (LO) RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] B20D1 HEADLAMP (LO) RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DTC Description roo wommenncrate DTC DETECTION LOGIC CONSULT serean terme DTC No. Seoedeaeeeh DTC detection condition HL (LO) RH PWR SPLY CIRC [aRc ‘hen heaclamp (LO) ON conditions are satisfied (smart 82001 | [Headlamp (low) let hand power supply cr-| SHORT TO. | FET inside IPDM EMR Is ON), and overcurrent is detected cuit] GRND| | inthe neaaiamp (LO} RH power supply circuit POSSIBLE CAUSE + Hamess or connector + Headlamp (LO) RH bulb + Headlamp (LO) RH harness + IPDM EIR FAIL-SAFE Shuts off the power supply to the headlamp (LO) RH power supply circuit until the headlamp (LO) ON condi- tions areno longer satisfied DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1 PRECONDITIONING With CONSULT 1. Tum ignition’ switch ON. 2. Select "HL (LO) RH CIRC MALFUNCTN’ in “Data Monitor’ mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT, 3. Check the monitor status. Wonttor em Monitor satus HL (LO) RH CIRC MALFUNCTN ‘What is the monitor status? “Q" >>GOTO2. “1” >> Asshort circuit is detected multiple times in the headtamp (LO) RH power supply circuit, and dam- ‘age accumulates at the smart FET inside the IPDM E/R. For this reason, IPDM E/R does not tum ON the smart FET. Because the DTC cannot be reproduced in this state, perform EX-317, "Diag- iosis Procedure" and replace IPDM EIR after the malfunctioning part is repaired. Refer to PCS- ‘60, "Removal and Installation”. 2. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE with CONSULT Turn ignition switch OFF, Tum ignition switch ON. Turn lighting switeh 2ND. Select "Self Diagnostic Result” mode of "PDM E/R" using CONSULT. Check DTC. IsDIC detected? YES >> Refer to EXL-317, "Diagnosis Procedure. NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to Gl-44, "Inlermilfent Incident’. NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure johoaaaloete Been 1 .cHECK HEADLAMP (LO) RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) 7, Tum ignition switeh OFF. 2. Turn lighting switch OFF. EXL-317 B20D1 HEADLAMP (LO) RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 3. Disconnect IPDM EIR connector and front combination lamp RH connector. 4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R hamess connector and ground. POM ER ee Og Continuity ‘Connector Terminal Ene 2 ‘Ground Not existed isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2 NO >> Repair or replace harness. 2. CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) RH POWER SUPPLY With CONSULT 1, Connect IPDM E/R connector. 2. Tum ignition switch ON, 3. Select "HEADLAMP (LO)" in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 4. With operating the test items, check the voltage between front combination lamp RH harness connector and ground. 5 Test item votage Connector | __Teminal HeaDLAMe [On 9-16V e182 7 eran | HE = 4 isthe inspection result non YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to POS-60, "Removal and Installation". 3.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) RH Theckthe headlamp (LO) RH bulb, Refer to EXL-J18, “Component Inspection’. Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part, Component Inspection “wearoconnoonorssee 4 .cHECK HEADLAMP (LO) RH 7. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front combination lamp RH connector. 3. Check resistance of front combination lamp RH terminals. Front combination lamp RA Resistance ‘Terminal 7 @ Except 0 isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >>GOTO2. 2. CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) RH 7. Remove headlamp (Hl) RH bulb, 2. Check resistance of front com ation amp RH terminals. EXL-318 B20D1 HEADLAMP (LO) RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Front combinallon Ta z eeaRHE TES Resistance Teminal 7 3 Except Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace headlamp (LO) RH bulb. Refer to EXL-376. Replacement” NO >> Repair or replace the headlamp (LO) RH harness. EXL-319 B20D2 PARKING LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DTCICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] B20D2 PARKING LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DTC Description ss DTC DETECTION LOGIC CORSO asses one {Trouble dagnosis content) Dre uideeton cope Tike patra ap. eeso pas ionp. ord aiare rorc___ | Ducomontasasts (onan fe1 rae IPoM ER szooa | PaKINGLAMP puRseiyciRe | kro | json angormsurentcccloaedn fe errant SER ply GRNO] power supply circuit or parking lamp RH power supply cit~ ot POSSIBLE CAUSE + Hamess or connector + Front combination lamp LH internal circuit = LED (Parking lamp) ~ Control circuit - Hames + Front combination lamp RH internal circuit = LED (parking lamp) = Control circuit - Hames + IPOMER FAIL-SAFE Shuts off the power supply to the parking lamp (LH/RH) power supply circuit until the parking lamp, license plate lamp, and tail lamp ON conditions are no longer salisfied. DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1 PRECONDITIONING ‘With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "P LAMP CIRC MALFUNCTN’ in “Data Monitor’ mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 3. Check the monitor status, TWonitor em Monitor satus o 1 P LAMP CIRC MALFUNCTN, Whats the monitor status? >>GOTO2. >> A short circuit is detected multiple times in the parking lamp LH or parking lamp RH power supply = circuit, and damage accumulates at the smart FET inside the IPDM E/R. For this reason, IPDM E/ R does not turn ON the smart FET. Because the DTC cannot be reproduced in this state, perform -XL-321, "Diagnosis Procedure” and replace IPDM E/R after the malfunctioning part is repaired. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation”. 2. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT 1. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Tumignition switch ON. 3. Tum lighting switch 1ST. 4. Select "Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT, 5. Check DTC. Is DIC detected? YES >> Refer to EXL-321, "Diagnosis Procedure”, NO-1 >>To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to Gl-44, "Intermittent Incident”. EXL-320 B20D2 PARKING LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > NO2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure 1 .cHECK PARKING LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) Turn ignition switch OFF. Turn lighting switch OFF. 2 3. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front combination lamp connector. 4, Check continuity betvieen IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. TOMER = ‘Continuity Connector Terminal RH End a Ground Not existed tH Eis 6 tsthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2 NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 2..CHECK PARKING LAMP POWER SUPPLY (With CONSULT Connect IPDM E/R connector. Tum ignition switch ON, BONa ground. Select "PARKING LAMP" in “Active Test’ mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. With operating the test items, check the voltage between front combination lamp hamess connector and Front eomblration lamp Testitem Voltage Connector Terminal On o-16V RH E151 = — PARKING. = 3 Ground Lame On o- tev uy 153 on O-1V isthe inspection result normal? YES »>>GOTO3 NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60, “Removal and installation’. 3.cHECK PARKING LAMP Check the parking lamp. Refer to EXL-921, "Component Inspection”. isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace the corresponding front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-375. “Removal and Installation". Component Inspection 1 .cHECK PARKING LAMP 7, Turn ignition switch OFF, 2. Disconnect front combination lamp connector. 3. Check resistance of front combination lamp terminals. Parking lamp LH Front combination lamp LA Terminal 3 z Except 00 Resistance EXL-321 B20D2 PARKING LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Ske hi. SS ee Front combination lamp RH as Terminal Except 0 Asthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace the corresponding front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-376, “Removal and Installation". EXL-322 B20D4 TAIL LAMP LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] B20D4 TAIL LAMP LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DTC Description DTC DETECTION LOGIC ‘CONSULT serean terme DTC Neo. oneoerenet DTC detection condition When the parking lamp, loense plate lamp, and tal lamp ON conaitons are satisied (smart FET insice IPOM E/R {circ Is ON), and overcurrentis detected in the folowing power p20p4 | TAIL LAMP LH PWR SPLY CIRC Sort To | Supply areut {Tailemp tek hand power supply creut) | Senn POSSIBLE CAUSE + Harness or connector + Tall lamp LH (body side) bulb + Tail lamp LH (back door side) bulb + Tail lamp LH (body side) bulb socket or harness + Tail lamp LH (back door side) bulb socket or harness + License plate lamp LH bulb + License plate lamp RH bulb + License plate lamp LH bulb socket + License plate lamp RH bulb socket + IPOMER FAIL-SAFE Tail lamp LH (body side) Tall lamp LH (back door side) License pie lamp LH License piate lamp Ri Shuts off the power supply to the following power supply circuits until the parking lamp, license plate lamp, and tail lamp ON conditions are no longer satisfied. + Tail lamp LH (body side) + Tail lamp LH (back door side) + License plate lamp LH + License plate lamp RH DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1 PRECONDITIONING @With CONSULT 4, Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "T LAMP LH CIRC MALFUNCTN” in “Data Monitor” mode of "IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 3. Check the monitor status. Mentor fem Monitor status 0 7 T LAMP LH CIRC MALFUNCTN, tis oo ~ monitor status? >> GOTO2. >> A short circuit is detected multiple times in the tail lamp LH (body side), tail lamp LH (back door side), license plate lamp LH or license plate lamp RH power supply circuit, and damage accumu- lates at the smart FET inside the IPDM E/R. For this reason, IPDM E/R does not tum ON the smart FET. Because the DTC cannot be reproduced in this state, perform EXL-324, “Diagnosis Procedure” and replace IPDM E/R after the malfunctioning part is repaired. Refer to “Removal and Installation". 2. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE PCS-60, (With CONSULT EXL-323 B20D4 TAIL LAMP LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Turn ignition witch OFF. Turn ignition switch ON Turn lighting switch 1ST. Select ‘Self Diagnostic Result” mode of "IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. Check DTC. Is DTC detected? YES >> Refer to EXL-324, “Diagnosis Procedure’, NO-1 >>To cheok malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to Gi-44, “Intermittent Incident’ NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END Diagnosis Procedure ca amnmonaraels 1 CHECK TAIL LAMP LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) Tam ignition switch OFF Turn lighting switch OFF. Disconnect the follovring connectors. IPOM ER Rear combination lamp LH (body side) Rear combination lamp LH (back door side) License plate lamp LH License plate lamp RH ‘Check continuity between IPDM E/R hamess connector and ground. TOMER Connector Terminal E10 4 Ground Notexisted {sthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 2. CHECK TAIL LAMP LH POWER SUPPLY Bie CONSULT Connect IPDM E/R connector. Turn ignition switch ON Select “TAIL LAMP” in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. ‘With operating the test items, check the voltage between rear combination lamp LH (body side) hamess ‘connector and ground, = Continuity Rear combination lamp LH (body fest itm, e rh P Test iter Vata ‘Connector Teminal On —16V a0 1 Ground | TAILLAMP Off o-1V, isthe nspedi rn YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation’ 3.cHECK TAIL LAMP LH Theok the jai lamp LH, Refer to EXL-S05, “Componsn Ins l rmal? YES >>GOTO4. NO’ >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. 4 CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP EXL-324 B20D4 TAIL LAMP LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ‘Check the license plate lamp. Refer to EXL-a25, “Component Inspection (License Plate Lamal. tion result nor YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Component Inspection (Tail Lamp) 1 .CHECK TAIL LAMP LH 7, Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rear combination lamp LH (body side) and rear combination lamp LH (back door side) connec- tor. 3. Cheok resistance of rear combination lamp LH (body side) and rear combination lamp LH (back door side) terminals. Rear combination lamp LH (body sie) Rear combination lamp LH (body side} Resistance Terminal 1 4 Except 00 Tal lamp LH (back door side) Rear combination lamp LH (back door ie) Resistance Terminal 7 3 Bxcepl oa isthe inspection result nommal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >>GOTO2 2.CHECK TAIL LAMP LH 7, Remove tail amp LH bulb 2. Check resistance of rear combination lamp LH (body side) and rear combination lamp LH (back door side) terminals. Rear combination lamp LH (body sie) ‘Rear combination lamp LH (body side) Resistance Terminal 7 4 Except0.0 “Tal amp LH (back door side) Rear combination lamp LA back door sie) Resistance Teminat ____—i 7 3 Bee oa {sthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace the corresponding tail lamp LH bulb. Refer to EXL-289. "REAR COMBINATION LAMP {BODY SIDE) — Replacement” (body side) or EXL-391, "REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BACK DOOR SIDE) : Replacement” (back door side). NO >> Repair or replace the corresponding tail lamp LH bulb socket and hamess. Component Inspection (License Plate Lamp) ro conoenorats 1 .CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP 7, Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect license plate lamp connector. 3. Check resistance of license plate lamp terminals, EXL-325 B20D4 TAIL LAMP LH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] License pate lamp LR nse plate lamp UH Resistnce Tem Broo! License plate lamp RH Tssnse plate lamp RH oe Resistance Teainel 2 7 xeon isthe i mal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >>GOTO2. 2. CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP 7, Remove license plate lamp bulb. 2. Check resistance of license plate lamp terminals. License pate lamp LH Ticense plate lamp LH Resistonce Texminal 2 7 Beeion License plate fap RH Tiosnse plate amp RH 7 e Resistance Teaminal ExcepO |sthe inspection result normal?’ YES >> Replace the corresponding license plate lamp bulb. Refer to EXL-394, "Replacement NO >> Repair or replace the corresponding license plate lamp bulb socket. EXL-326 B20D5 TAIL LAMP RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > B20D5 TAIL LAMP RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DTC Description DTC DETECTION LOGIC CONSULT screen terme Brow: (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition tare Tait Lane nl pie Ptr CIRC 22005 | fatemeigntan paver sippy ret) | SHORT TO When the parking lamp, loense plate lamp, and tl lamp (ON conaitons are satistied (smart FET insige IPOM ER IS ON), and overcurentis detected in the folowing power supply circuit + Talllamp RH (body side) + Taillamp RH (back door side) POSSIBLE CAUSE + Hamess or connector + Tail lamp RH (body side) bulb + Tail lamp RH (back door side) bulb + Tail lamp RH (body side) bulb socket or harness + Tail lamp RH (back door side) bulb socket or harness, + IPOMER FAIL-SAFE Shuts off the power supply to the following power supply circuits until the parking lamp, license plate lamp, and tail lamp ON conditions are no longer satisfied. + Tail lamp RH (body side) + Tail lamp RH (back door side) DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1 PRECONDITIONING With CONSULT 7, Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "T LAMP RH CIRC MALFUNCTN’ in “Data Monitor” mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 3. Check the monitor status. Mentor fem Monitor status 0 7 ‘T LAMP RH CIRC MALFUNCTN “0° >>GOTO2, “1” >> A shor circuit is detected multiple times inthe tal lamp RH (body side) or tal lamp RH (back door Side) power supply circuit, and damage accumulates at the smart FET inside the IPDM E/R, For this reason, IPDM E/R does not {um ON the smart FET. Because the DTC cannot be reproduced in this state, perform EXL-328, “Diagnosis Procedure” and replace IPDM EIR after the malfunc- tioning partis repaired. Refer to PCS-60. “Removal and Installation’. 2. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT 4. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2, Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Tum lighting switch 1ST. 4 5. Select "Self Diagnostic Result" mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. ‘Check DTC, Is DTC detect YES >> Refer to EXL-926. "Diagnosis Procedure" NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END EXL-327 Gl-44," termittent Incident” B20D5 TAIL LAMP RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DTCI/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Diagnosis Procedure ice 1 .cHECK TAIL LAMP RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) Tum ignition switch OFF Turn lighting switch OFF. Disconnect the following connectors. IPM ER Rear combination lamp RH (body side) Rear combination lamp RH (back door side) ‘Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground. TOMER =, Contr ‘Connector ‘Terminal m E0 7 Ground Not existed As the inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 2..CHECK TAIL LAMP RH POWER SUPPLY With CONSULT 1, Connect IPDM E/R connector. 2. Tum ignition switch ON 3. Select “TAIL LAMP" in “Active Test" mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 4. With operating the test items, check the voltage between rear combination lamp RH (body side) harness ‘connector and ground. Bear combination mp RA (ody ie : Test em Vatage Connector | __Tennnal on TeV 89 1 roina | TALLAMP on o=1V {[Sihe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Replace IPDM EIR. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation’. 3.cHECK TAIL LAMP RH Check the tail lamp RH. Refer to EXL-328. “Component lnspeclion”. Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part Component Inspection isn 1 .cHECK TAIL LAMP RH 7__Tumm ignition switch OFF. 2, Disconnect rear combination lamp RH (body side) and rear combination lamp RH (back door side) con- nector. 3. Check resistance of rear combination lamp RH (body side) and rear combination lamp RH (back door side) terminals. EXL-328 B20D5 TAIL LAMP RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ‘eer combination lamp RH (body side) Rear combination lamp RH (body sie) Resistance Terminal 7 a BxceptOo ump RH (uack door side) Rear combination lamp RH (back door side) Resistance Terminal i a Except 0.0 Istthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >>GOTO2 2.CHECK TAIL LAMP RH 7, Remove tail amp RH bulb 2. Check resistance of rear combination lamp RH (body side) and rear combination lamp RH (back door side) terroinals. Resr gominatin lamp RH boty side) Rear combinaon linp Ri body 60) Resistance Terninal 7 a Except. imp RH (back doer side) Rear combination lamp RA (bade oor side) Resistance Teminal 1 3 Except0.0 Istthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace the corresponding tail lamp RH bulb. Refer to EXL-389. "REAR COMBINATION LAMP: {BODY SIDE) - Replacement” (body side) or EXL-391. "REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BACK (back door side). NO >> Repair or replace the corresponding tail lamp RH bulb socket and hamess. EXL-329 HEADLAMP (HI) CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] HEADLAMP (HI) CIRCUIT Component Function Check mrooeunnersss 1 .cHECK HEADLAMP (HI) OPERATION (With CONSULT 1. Select “HEADLAMP (HI)"in "Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 2. With operating the test items, check that the headlamp (Hl) is tumed ON. on : Headlamp (HI) ON off jeadlamp (HI) OFF Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Headlamp (HI) circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to EXL-330, "Diagnosis Procedure”, Diagnosis Procedure sconce 1 CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) OUTPUT VOLTAGE with CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front combination lamp connector. 3. Tum ignition switch ON, 4. Select "HEADLAMP (HI)” in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 5. With operating the test items, check voltage between IPDM E/R hamess connector and ground. TOMER - Testitem Votage ‘Gannedier Teminal On = 16v RH eus 5 crong | HEADLAWP [OT on1V cH) On = 16V uw e149 59 om ont isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Replace IPDM EIR. Refer to ion”. 2..CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 7. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front combination lamp harness connector. POMER Front combration lamp aah ‘Connedor Terminal Connector Terminal % RA Eiae m4 eet a —}— - 6 Bxisted tH Ev9 oo E163 isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.cHECK HEADLAMP (Hl) GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between front combination lamp connector and ground. EXL-330 HEADLAMP (HI) CIRCUIT eprorcRcuTpAGNoss> HALOGEN HEADLAMF] ae = ‘Connector Terminal rm kis iSihe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO4. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 4. CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) BULB Ghack the applicable headlamp (Hi) bulb ee f YES >> Check the corresponding headlamp (Hl) hamess. Repair or replace if necessary. NO’ >> Replace the corresponding headlamp (HI) bulb. Refer to EXL-376, “Replacement EXL-331 HEADLAMP (LO) CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] HEADLAMP (LO) CIRCUIT Component Function Check rooammnrnsse 1 CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) OPERATION (With CONSULT 1. Select "HEADLAMP (LO)" in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 2. With operating the test items, check that the headlamp (LO) is tumed ON. Lo : Headlamp (LO) ON leadiamp (LO) OFF {s the inspection result normal? YES >> Headlamp (LO) circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to EXL-332, "Diagnosis Procedure” Diagnosis Procedure nenoomenooareees 1 CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) OUTPUT VOLTAGE With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front combination lamp connector. 3. Tum ignition switch ON. 4. Select "HEADLAMP (LO)" in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 5. With operating the test items, check voltage between IPDM E/R hamess connector and ground. POMER - Testitem Votage ‘Connecter Teminal On = 16V RH E19 2 croung | HEADLAWP [OT on1V (Wo) On = 16V rr) 148 50 of ont isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60. "Removal and Installation". 2. CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 7. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front combination lamp harness connector. POM ER Front combination amp Continuity Connector Terminal ‘Connector Terminal RH Ene a Ere eeaee eee a hoes 7 Basted lH Eis 0 E164 isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.cHECK HEADLAMP (LO) GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between front combination lamp hamess connector and ground EXL-332 HEADLAMP (LO) CIRCUIT < DTCICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Front combination lamp Connector Terminal i ain RH eee 8 Grouna Busted E64 iSihe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO4. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 4. CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) BULB Check the applicable headlamp (LO) bub baceabad ? YES >> Check the corresponding headlamp (LO) hamess. Repair or replace if necessary. NO >> Replace the corresponding headlamp (LO) bulb. Refer to EXL-276, “Replacement” EXL-333 PARKING LAMP CIRCUIT < DTCICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] PARKING LAMP CIRCUIT Component Function Check nraoomenn ars 1 .cHECK PARKING LAMP OPERATION (With CONSULT 1. Select ‘PARKING LAMP in "Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 2. With operating the test items, check that the parking lamp is turned ON. On: Parking lamp ON off arking lamp OFF {Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Parking lamp circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to EX(-334, "Diagnosis Procedure” Diagnosis Procedure snscemanco ers. 1 .CHECK PARKING LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect front combination lamp connector. 3. Tum ignition switch ON, 4. Select "PARKING LAMP" in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 5. With operating the test items, check voltage between IPDM E/R hamess connector and ground. POMER - Testitem Votage ‘Connecter Teminal On = 16V RH e149 6 on ont Ground | PARKINGLAMP: On = 16V rr) 148 86 of ont isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60. "Removal and Installation". 2..CHECK PARKING LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT T._Turm ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front combination lamp harness connector. POM ER Front combination lamp Continuity Connector Terminal ‘Connector Terminal RH Ene a Fie pe eee 3 Basted lH Eas 6 E163 {sthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK PARKING LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between front combination lamp hamess connector and ground EXL-334 PARKING LAMP CIRCUIT < DTCICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Front combination lamp Tonnes Terminal = Bay RH Ee 2 Ground Existed it E189 isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace the corresponding front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-376, "Removal and Installation”. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. EXL-335 TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT Component Function Check 1 .cHECK TAIL LAMP OPERATION (With CONSULT 1. Select "TAIL LAMP" in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 2. With operating the test items, check that the tail lamp is turned ON. on : Tail Lamp ON off ail lamp OFF Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Tail amp circuit is normal NO >> Refer to EXL-336, "Diagnosis Procedure”, Diagnosis Procedure nsemacco ores 1 .cHECK TAIL LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the following connectors. =" Rear combination lamp LH (body side) = Rear combination lamp RH (body side) = Rear combination lamp LH (back door side) = Rear combination lamp RH (back door side) 3. Tum ignition switch ON. 4. Select "TAIL LAMP” in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 5. With operating the test items, check voltage between IPDM E/R hamess connector and ground. POMER Testitem vortege ‘Connecter Terminal On = 16V RH 7 of ont E10 Ground | TALLAMP. on = 16V uy 4 OF ont As the inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO’ >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-50." ". 2..CHECK TAIL LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT T._Tum ignifon switch OFF 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and each roar combination lamp harness con- nector. Booy side TOMER Rear combination lamp (body side) Continuity Connector Terminal ‘Connector Terminal RH 7 B59) E10 1 Existed if 4 Eo EXL-336 TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] SOBs eee NTE SOUR eT POWER ‘Rear combhration lamp (back door de) Continuity Connecter Teminal Connecter Terminal RH 7 Dis E10 1 Existod a 4 Diss Isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.cHECK TAIL LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between each tail lamp hamess connector and ground. By side ear combinaon lap (60dy Se) ney - ‘Continuity Connector Tena RH 3 1 Ground Eaates tH 360 Back dow side Tear connaton lap Wack door Se) = entry Connector | _Teminal Tera RH Diss 1 eroind Exates tH cd Isthe inspection result normal? YES »>GOTO4, NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 4.cHECK TAIL LAMP BULB Check the applicable tail lamp bulb. Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Check the corresponding tail lamp bulb socket and harness. Repair or replace if necessary. NO >> Replace the corresponding tail lamp bulb. Refer to EXL-389, "REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BODY SIDE) = Replacement” (body side) or EXL-391, "REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BACK DOOR SIDE) “Replacement” (back door side). EXL-337 LICENSE PLATE LAMP CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] LICENSE PLATE LAMP CIRCUIT Component Function Check ArOIDENMNO TES 1 .cHECK TAIL LAMP LH OPERATION Check that tail amp LH is turned ON when lighting switch is tured 1ST. ts the inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Check tail lamp circuit. Refer to EXL-236, “Component Function Check", 2..CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP OPERATION (With CONSULT ‘Select “TAIL LAMP" in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 2. With operating the test items, check that the license plate lamp is tuned ON, : License plate lamp ON Jcense plate lamp OFF YES >> License plate lamp circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to EXL-338, "Diagnosis Procedure”. Diagnosis Procedure ecm 1 CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 7._Turm ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and license plate lamp connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and license plate lamp hamess connector. TOMER Conitnuity Connector Terminal RH E10 4 Existed 1H isthe inspection tesull normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 2..CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between loense plate lamp hamess connector and ground. Teena plate any ee = Contry ‘Connector Termin RH Diet — +} : Ground Existed A Diez i r mal? YES >>GOT03. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP BULB heck the applicable Hoense plate Tamp bulb isthe inspection resutt normal? YES >> Check the corresponding license plate lamp bulb socket. Repair or replace if necessary. NO >> Replace the corresponding license plate lamp bully. Refer to EX.-394, "Replacement. EXL-338 DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT CIRCUIT Component Function Check 1 CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT OPERATION [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] )With CONSULT: 1, Select ‘DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 2. With operating the test items, check that the daytime running light is turned ON. On —_—_: Daytime running light ON oft Daytime running light OFF Is the inspection result normal? YES >> Daytime running light circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to EXL-339. "Diagnosis Procedure”. Diagnosis Procedure 1 CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT OUTPUT VOLTAGE With CONSULT 4, Turn ignition switch OFF, 2. Disconnect front combination lamp connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Select "DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT’ in “Active Test” mode of "IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 5. With operating the test items, check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground, IPD ER 7 Testitem Votiage ‘Connector Teminal On ov RH E149 58 — — DAYTIME RUN- = Goud NINGLIGHT [on on 16V uy e148 4 on on1V isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2 NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to POS-50. "Removal and Installation". 2. CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 7. Turn ignition switch OFF, 2. Disconnect |PDM E/R connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R hamess connector and front combination lamp hamess connector. POM ER Front combination amp Continuity ‘Gonnecior Terminal Connector Terminal RH E148 cy ao zs — a! ae 1 Existed Uk E18 20 E163 Jsthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3. cHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between front combination lamp hamess connector and ground. EXL-339 DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Front combination lamp = ‘Connector Terminal Ei mere RH Ete 2 Ground Existed A E168 Js the inspection result normal? YES >> Replace the corresponding front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-376, "Removal arid Installation’ NO >> Repair or replace harness. EXL-340 STOP LAMP CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] STOP LAMP CIRCUIT Component Function Check mrooranmrcr 1 .cHECK STOP LAMP OPERATION 7, Turn ignition switch ON. 2. With operating the brake pedal, check that the stop lamp and high-mounted stop lamp is tumed ON. Depressed _St9P lampand high-mounted stop amp Fully re- : Stop lamp and high-mounted stop lamp. leased OFF the inspection result normal? YES — >> Stop lamp circuit is normal NO >> Refer fo EXL-41, "Diagnosis Procedure", Diagnosis Procedure ro onenorraace 1 .cHECK syMPTOM Check symptom (A or B) Symptom 5 sop lamp and highmounted Sop lamp are not tured ON ‘Any of stop lamp and high mounted stop lamp are not tumed ON Which symptom is detected? A >>GOTO2. B >>GOTO7. 2. CHECK FUSE 7. Tum ignition snitch OFF. 2. Check that the following fuse is not fusing. Except ROM engine models wth MT Unit Location Fuse NO, ‘Capac > BGM #10 + Stop lamp sich | Fuse black (ui) 10A Stop lamp switch #80 ROM engine models with MT Tar Tocaton Fuse No TCapaaly > cH #10 + Stop lamp suite | Fuse block (8) 104 Stop lamp switch #20 [sthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit ifa fuse is blown. 3.cHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY (STOP LAMP) 7, Disconnect BOM connector 2. Check vollage between BCM hamess connector and ground EXL-341 STOP LAMP CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] BoM Voltage Connector Terminal Mas 145 Ground isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO4, NO >> Repair or replace harness. 4.cHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. Connect BCM connector. Tum ignition switch ON, Check voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground. cut meaels ‘Sip Jarip suite - Voltage ‘Connector Terminal 7 ens -|——-——|__crauna 9-16 TMR2ODD engine models with MIT ‘Sip lamp switeh Voltage ‘Connector Terminal 7 eo =| | erouna 9-16v 3 ROM engine models with MT ‘Stop lamp switch 2 Voltage ‘Connector Terminal 7 e121 |} ——|_Groung 9-16 isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTOS. NO >> Repair or replace harness. ‘5.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) 1._Turm ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. 3. Check continuity between BCM hamess connector and stop lamp switch hamess connector. cvTmeaels BOM ‘Stop lamp switch Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal a7 2 E23 ENS Enisted 18 a EXL-342 STOP LAMP CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] TR2000 engine models with MIT BoM Slop amp Salih wos Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal 187 2 523 E120 existed 158 4 ROM eagne models wth MIT Bow Slop lamp Salih aie Continuity Comecior | Terminal Connector Terminal 157 2 23 erat Existed 158 4 Isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO6. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 6.cHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Check stop lamp switch. Refer to EXL-345, Componeni Inspection’. Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation”. NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-21, “Removal and Installalion* (LHD models) or BR-85, “Removal and |nsialiation” (RHD models). 7 .CHECK STOP LAMP / HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE @With CONSULT 4, Disconnect rear combination lamp (body side) and high-mounted stop lamp connectors. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3, Select "HEAD LAMP” of *BCM” using CONSULT. 4. Select “STOP LAMP 1", “STOP LAMP 2” or “STOP LAMP 3” in “Active Test” mode. 5. With operating the test items, check voltage between BCM hamess connector and ground, Step lamp RH voriage BoM : Testitem et Comecior Tema ES Z = B46 129 Ground | stopLamps f= 1" _ Of ov ‘top lamp LH sat Votiage eM Dean «Aperox.) Connector Terminal On = 18V Bas 134 Ground | STOP LaMP 2 of ov High-mounted top lamp 5 Voltage BOW Test item = Comecior Terminal On o-18v Bar 39 Ground | stopLawp3 fo™ —___|_"-"" _ Of ov isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO9, NO >>GOTO8. EXL-343 STOP LAMP CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 8.CHECK STOP LAMP / HIGHIVOUNTED STOP LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) 7__Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. 3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Sp lame ae a continuity ‘Connector Terminal RH 728 = 246 = Ground | Notexistes Hih-reuned sop amp eet es Continuity Connector | —_Tennina B47 @ Ground | _Wobexsied isth itnommal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BOS-121, “Removal and Installation” NO >> Repair or replace harness. Q.cHECK STOP LAMP / HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (OPEN) 7. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. 3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and each stop lamp hamess connector. ‘top lamp BoM Rear combination amp (body S6)] ‘Connector Terminal Connector Terminal my Ra 79 B69 Bag 2 Existed iH 134 B80 High-mounted stop lamp om Figh-mounied op amy IER SE ‘Continuity ‘Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Bar 3 Diea 7 Bisted isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO 10. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 10.cHECK STOP LAMP / HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between each stop lamp hamess connector and ground Step aro Rear combination lamp (body side) = Sanlouet ‘Cannecior Terminal RH B69 4 Ground Existed if a0 High-enounted stop lama High-moanted stop lamp a cw ay ‘Connector Terminal Diss 2 Ground Bisted isthe inspection result normal? YES-1 >> Stop lamp: GOTO 11 EXL-344 STOP LAMP CIRCUIT < DTCICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] YES-2 >> High-mounted stop lamp: Replace high-mounted stop lamp. Refer to EXL-ao2, “Removal and NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 11 .cHEck sToP LAMP BULB Check the applicable stop lamp bulb. Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Check the corresponding stop lamp bulb socket and harness. Repair or replace if necessary. NO >> Replace the corresponding stop lamp bulb. Refer to EXL-989. “REAR COMBINATION LAMP {BODY SIDE) ; Replacement”. Component Inspection irncctnie 1 .cHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-1 7, Turn ignition switch OFF, 2, Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. 3. Check continuity of stop lamp switch terminals. Except RBM engine models with M/T Stop lamp sviten Conaition Continuity Terminal i 5 Depressed Existed Fullyreteased | Notexisted Breke pedal ; ; Depressed Basted Fullyreleased | Notexisted ROM engine models with MT Slop lamp switch Condition Continuity Terminal ; Depressed Eristed Fulyreieasea | Notexsted Brake pedal z ; Depressed Not existed Fully released Eristed Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >>GOTO2. 2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-2 1. Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-11. “Inspection and Adjusiment” (LHD models) or BR-75, “nspection and Adjustment” (RHD models). 2. Check continuity of stop lamp switch terminals. Except REM engine models with MIT Stop lamp switch al Condition Continuity i z Depressed Estes Fully eased | Notexisied Brake pedal ; 4 Depressed Existed Fullyreleased | Not existed EXL-345 STOP LAMP CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ROM engine models wih MT imp Svtch Conditon Continuity Terminal Depressed Bites 1 2 Fly raeased | _ Notexited Brake paca ; % Depressed Not existed Fully released Biisted isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-21, "Removal and Installation’ (LHD models) or BR-85, “Removal and Installation” (RHD models). EXL-346 FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT Component Function Check mroonncxncrsen 1 .cHECK FRONT FOG LAMP OPERATION With CONSULT. 1, Select "FRONT FOG LAMP" in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 2. With operating the test items, check that the front fog lamp is turned ON. On _: Front fog lamp ON oft ront fog lamp OFF isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Front fog lamp circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to EXL-247. "Diagnosis Procedure’, Diagnosis Procedure urememowncr87 1 .cHECK FRONT FOG LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE With CONSULT 4, Turn ignition switch OFF, 2. Disconnect front fog lamp connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Select "FRONT FOG LAMP” in “Active Test” mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 5, With operating the test items, check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground, IPD ER - Testitem Votiage Connector Teminal On a 16V RH E149 aT — — FRONT FOG = Groun: S| Lae On a= 16V uw e148 3 on on1V isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2 NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-50. "Removal and Installation”. 2. CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 7, Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R hamess connector and front fog lamp harness connector. POM ER Frontfog amp T Continuity Connector Terminal Connector Terminal RA ary a E168 * ea a 1 Exsted tH Ms at E169 Jsthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.cHECK FRONT FOG LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT ‘Check continuity between front fog lamp hamess connector and ground, EXL-347 FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] RH Front fog lamp ‘Cannecior Terminal Continuity tH Ei68 E168 2 Ground Existed ISthe inspection result normal? YES NO EXL-348 >> Replace the corresponding front fog lamp bulb. Refer to EXL-379. ‘Replacement. >> Repair or replace hamess. REAR FOG LAMP CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] REAR FOG LAMP CIRCUIT Component Function Check mroonmcnorstre 1 CHECK REAR FOG LAMP OPERATION )With CONSULT 1. Select ‘HEAD LAMP” of "BCI" using CONSULT. 2. Select ‘RR FOG LAMP" in “Active Test” mode. 3. With operating the test items, check that the rear fog lamp is turned ON. On ——_: Rear fog lamp ON off fear fog lamp OFF Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Rear fog lamp circuit is normal, NO >> Refer to EXL-349, "Diagnosis Procedure”. Diagnosis Procedure a 1 .cHECK REAR FOG LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE (@With CONSULT 4. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rear fog lamp connector. 3. Tum ignition switch ON. 4, Select ‘HEAD LAMP” of "BCM” using CONSULT. 5, Select "RR FOG LAMP” in ‘Active Test” mode. 6, With operating the test items, check voltage betvieen rear fog lamp harness connector and ground. Rear fog lamp Testitem Vottage Connector Terminal on o-16V e162 2 Ground | RR FOGLAMP Of ov, YES >>GOTO4, No >>GOTO2. 2. CHECK REAR FOG LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (OPEN) 7, Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. 3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear fog lamp harness connector. ecw Rear (og amp Contry Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Bae 2 BE 2 Existed Isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.cHECK REAR FOG LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) ‘Check continuity between BOM harness connector and ground. EXL-349 REAR FOG LAMP CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] —_ _| Cont Ceonedor | __Temninal ir ne 36 1 Grond | Noten Asthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BOM. Refer to BOS-121. "Removal and Installation” NO >> Repair or replace harness. 4.cHECK REAR FOG LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT 7, Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between rear fog lamp hamess connector and ground. Rear lene Au wera Se Contin ‘Connector Terminal id Bez 7 Gane Based [sthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTOS. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 5..cHECK REAR FOG LAMP BULB Check rear fog lamp bulb. Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Check rear fog lamp bulb socket, Repair or replace if necessary. NO >> Replace rear fog lamp bulb. Refer to EXL-396. "Replacement*. EXL-350 TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT Component Function Check ooo 1 .CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP OPERATION 7,_Turn ignition switch ON, 2. With operating the turn signal switch, check that the tun signal lamp is blinks. Right + Turn signal lamps RH blink Left ‘Turn signal lamps LH blink Center Turn signal lamps OFF isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Tum signal lamp circuit is normal. NO >> Refer to EXL-351, "Diagnosis Procedure’, Diagnosis Procedure ne 1 .cHecK sympTom Chock symptom (A or By ‘Symptom fur signal amp are not ~ ‘Applicable side performs high flasher activation Wiel jomis detect A >>GOTO2, B >> GOTO4. 2. cHECK FUSE 7. Tun ignition switch OFF. 2. Check that the following fuse is not fusing. Unt Toeation Fuse No, Capacity BON _| Fuse block (JB) #1 18A a YES >>GOTO3, NO >> Replace the blown fuse alter repairing the affected circutifa fuse is blown. 3.cHECK BOM POWER SUPPLY (TURN SIGNAL LAMP) 7, Disconnect BOM connector. 2. Check voltage between BCM hamess connector and ground. Bow - Voltage Connector Terminal was ma Ground o-tev isthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation’ NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 4. CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE 7, Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the following connectors. > Front turn signal lamp EXL-351 TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] =~ Door mirror = Rear combination lamp (body side) 3. Tum ignition switch ON 4, With operating the turn signal switch, check voltage between BCM hamess connector and ground. Front tum signal lamp | om Votage BOM Test iter (Approx) Connector Terminal %, as[T 4 iat RH 168 3 ql rum signal | Center ov ex eons | msn Let us 167 Centar ov Sie urn signal ome . em Votage —_ (Approx) Ternnal ight RH 43 3 co ‘Tur signal | Center ov er Grouna | TMS et un 2 EXL-352 TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Rear urn signal ame Votiage BoM Test item (Approx) Connector Terminal Right RH 136 e Turn signal. | Center ee | Grouna_| Tums % Cort "5 Let ly 133 +| | Genter isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO6 NO 5>GOTOS. 5..CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (SHORT) 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. 3, Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Front um signal trp OSS = Continuity, Connector Terminal RH 168 as B23 =| Ground Not existed iH 1 | a ‘Side tn signat amp BoM 5 Continuity Connector Terminal RH] a | mer - Ground Not existed iH a Rear ur signal amg OM = Continuity Connector Terminal RH 136 Bas Ground Not existes uH 133 fon result normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121. "Removal and installation’. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 6..cHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (OPEN) 7, Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. EXL-353 TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 3. Check continuity between BOM hamess connector and each tum signal lamp hamess connector. Front turn sional lamp Ton Front tum agnallanp Continuity Connector Terminal | Connector | Teminar a 768 Eg ex * 1 sted WH 167 27 Saturn sal amp (RD made) Ey Doormirer Contnty Connector Terminal | Connector | Tena RH @ Da s7 = 8 Exited WH 2 0a Sao tar sonal lap (RHD mex) Som Doone Contnty Connector Ternnal | Connector | Teonrar A a cy s7 % Exsted tH 2 98 Reartum sonal Tom ear conbraton Tarp (oy Se) Contnuty Cannecor Terminal | Connector | Tenminal iH 735 355 24s 3 Exsted tH 13 380 Isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO?7. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 7 CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between each tum signal lamp hamess connector and ground. Fronttum signal lamp Front combination amp ores = Continuity ‘Cannedor Terminal RH Eg = 2 Ground Existed if ET ‘Sige tum signal lamp (LHD models) Door miror are J = ‘continulty ‘Connedior Terminal RH Das see 4 ‘Ground Enisted A D8 ‘Side tum signal lamp (RHD models) Door mirer —— Et — Contiulty ‘Connecior Terminal RH Das a 4 Ground Enisted ta Dea EXL-354 TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT < DICICIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Rear tum signal lamp Rear tan gral amp = Contin ‘Connector Terminal iid RH ED 4 Ground estes tH 380 Isthe inspection result normal? YES-1 >> Front turn signal lamp or rear turn signal lamp: GO TO 8, YES-2 >> Side tum signal lamp: Replace side turn signal lamp. Refer to EXL-385, “Removal and Installa- tion’. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 8. cHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB Check the applicable umn signal lamp bulb. Real 5 YES-1 >> Front turn signal lamp: Check the corresponding front turn signal lamp bulb socket, Repair or replace if necessary. YES-2 >> Rear turn signal lamp: Check the corresponding rear turn signal lamp bulb socket and harness. Repair or replace if necessary. NO >> Replace the corresponding turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to EXL-376, "Replacement" (front tum ‘signal lamp) or EXL-389, "REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BODY SIDE) ; Replacement” (rear tum signal lamp). EXL-355 LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR Component Function Check octin 1 CHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR 7. Clean light & rain sensor detection area of windshield fully. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Tum lighting switch AUTO. 4, With the light & rain sensor illuminating, check the auto light function. Conation ‘ato ant fancion When iuminatng jot operat Light & rain sensor eis eee When shutting off ight Operating Asthe inspection result normal?’ YES >> Light & rain sensor is normal. NO >> Refer to EXL-356, ‘Diagnosis Procedure’ Diagnosis Procedure 1 .cHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 7. Tum ignition switch OFF 2. Disconnect light & rain sensor connector. 3. Tum ignition switch ON, 4, Check voltage between light & rain sensor harness connector and ground, ight rain sensor : Voltage Connector Terminal R20 7 Ground | Bate vollage Isihen iL 2 YES >>GOTO3. NO >>GOTO2 2. CHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 7._Turm ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove interior room lamp relay. 3. Check continuity between interior room lamp relay harness connector and light & rain sensor hamess connector. Interior Room lamp re Tight & rain sensor adits a Continuity Connector Teminal Connector Terminal Maa 5 R20 7 Basted spection resull normal? YES >> Performthe interior interior room lamp power supply circuit diagnosis. Refer to INL-65. "Diagnosis NO. >> Repair or replace harness. 3 .cHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT Theck continully between Fight & rain sensor hamess connector and ground. Tg ran sensor - ae ont ‘Connector Terminal ee R20 3 ‘Ground Bxsied EXL-356 LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Is the inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO4. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 4.cHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR SIGNAL 7, Connect ight & rain sensor connector. 2. Tumignition switch ON 3. Check voltage between BCM hamess connector and ground Votaoe ao : co a |} ater (Approx) Connector | Terminal voung | anton switeh usr ” cron | 1 | | av isthe inspection resuli normal? YES >> Replace light & rain sensor. Refer to EX\-581. "Removal and Installation’. NO >>GOTOS. 5.CHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) 7. Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and light & rain sensor connector 3. Check continuity between BCM hamess connector and light & rain sensor harness connector. acm Tight & rain sensor — Continuity Connector Terminal Connector | __Terminal 87 a R20 z Enid is the inspection result normal YES >>GOTO6 NO >> Repair or replace harness 5 6..cHECK LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) ‘Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground BoM — Continuity ‘Connector wna 187 a7 ‘Ground Not existed I i nomal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121. "Removal and Installation’. NO >> Repair or replace hamess. EXL-357 HAZARD SWITCH [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] HAZARD SWITCH Component Function Check nrooommennarsrs 1 .cHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL With CONSULT 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "FLASHER" of "BCM" using CONSULT. 3. Select “HAZARD SW" in “Data Monitor” mode. 4. With operating the hazard switch, check the monitor status. Monitor lem ‘Conaiion Monitor status oN on OFF Of As the inspection result normal? YES >> Hazard switch circuit is normal, NO >> Refer lo EXL-358, ‘Diagnosis Procedure" Diagnosis Procedure minnie HAZARD SW | Hazerd switch 1 .cHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL 7__Tum ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect hazard switch connector. 3. Check voltage between hazard switch connector and ground, Hazard snitch : Voltage ‘Connector Terminal Mas 2 Ground o-16V {sthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO4 NO >>GOTO2. 2..CHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) T_ Disconnect BOM connector. 2. Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector and BCM harness connector. Hazard snc Bow Continuity Connector Temninal Connector Terminal Mas 2 Nez a Ensted isthe inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO3. NO >> Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) Theck conlinully between hazard switch hamess conneclor and ground Hazara atch = Cont ‘Connector Terminal es was z Gaind | Notexsied ISthe inspection resull normal? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, “Removal and Installation”. EXL-358 HAZARD SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 4. cHECK HAZARD SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT ‘Check conlinuily between hazard switch hamess connector and ground. Tazara swich Ss Continuity Connector Terminal Mas i Ground Bisted hei YES >>GOTOS, NO >> Repair or replace hamess. 5.cHECK HAZARD SWITCH Check hazard switch. Refer to EX.-359. “Component lnspeciion”. {s the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace hazard switch. Refer to EXL-383, "Removal and Installation”. Component Inspection ect 1 .cHECK HAZARD SWITCH 1. Tum ignition switch OFF, 2. Disconnect hazard switch connector. 3. Check continuity of hazard switch terminals. Hazard switch ee Condition Contry ON Existed 1 2 Hazard switeh OFF Nat existed Isthe inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION END NO >> Replace hazard switch. Refer to EX.-389, "Removal and installation", EXL-359 HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH < DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH ‘Component Inspection 1 .CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 7. Turn ianition switch OFF. 2. Remove headiamp aiming switch. 3. Check resistance among each headlamp aiming switch termi- nals. 2-row seat models Condition aiianen: Terminal 1 ‘Switch position l “S-row seat models Headlamp aiming switch Terminal Condition i ‘Switch positon | “oprox) | @s0a S502 [ ©2780 | @ 1409 sw ] Resistance (Approx) | @® 9100 @360 _ Owe Ovena ©3900 YES >> Headlamp aiming switch is normal. NO >> Replace headlamp aiming switch. Refer to EX1-384. “Removal and |nslallalion”. EXL-360 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS: < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS Symptom Table emommem NOTE: Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT before the symptom diagnosis. Perform the trouble diagnosis if any DTCis detected. ‘Symptom Possible cause Tnspecton fem > Headlamp (HI) power Supphyr ground circuit Headlamp (HI) circuit One side + Headlamp (Hl) bubs Referto £X.-390 “Component Func: Headlamp (Hiisnottumed + Headlamp (HI) hamess tion Ghee a + POM ER ‘Symptom diagnosis Bot sides “BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (Hl) ARE NOT TURNED ON" Refer fo EXL-265 “Diachosis Procedure High beam indicator lamp isnot tumed ON ‘Combination meter ‘Combination meter [Headlamp (HI) is tured ON] Data monitor "HI-BEAM IND” + Headlamp (LO) power suppiy/ ground ercult Headlamp (LO) cuit One side + Headlamp (LO) bulb Referto EXL-292 "Component Func: Heaton (LO}is not + Headlamp (LO) hamess ton Check ito + POM ER Symptom diagnosis Bot sides "BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON" Refer to EXL-366, “Diagnosis Procedune” Dipped beam indicalor lamp is not ned ON [Headtamp (LO) is tumed ON] ‘Combination meter cohen Dee Data monitor "DIPPED BEAM IND’ + Combination switch inputfoutput Sorat cat camtintenovtch ‘+ Combination switch Reter to BGS-119. "Symptom Table" Each lamp is not tumed ON/OFF with lighting switch BCM AUTO [= Lanta an sensor p0¥6r S007) eg win arco groundogna crit gt = Uae sener XL 64 “dona Fine a ec = + Parking lamp power supplys ground ora + Fonteomoraten amp nt) | ping ara Pasig lamp is not ued ON ce Relerio EAL “Component une = Control circuit tora Snes L POWER 7 a RPP ae Tattanp ctu Tat anpis not tumed ON «Tatham bo fof EX S8 “Conpenet Func. + Tail lamp bulb sockethamess ton Chea L Power > License plate sgraund crcult + License plate lamp bull + License plate lamp bulb socket ‘Symptom diagnosis anna amp, lense Patelamp and tal lamp are nt “Parc LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON tumed ON ane o P power SUPPIY/| conse plate lamp diouit Referto EX. “Component Func- tion Check License plate lamp is not tuned ON. EXL-361 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS. < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Symptom Possible cause Tnspection tem Position lamp indicator isnot tumed ON (Poking lamp, license plate lamp and talllamp are ‘tumed ON) Combination meter ‘Combination meter ‘Data manitor"LIGHT IND’ Daytime running ight power sup- ply/oround creut Front combinaton lamp intemal cireuit Daytime running ight circuit Dayime runing bts not ued ON Reterio£xi082 “Component Func = LED (oaytme running Han) ~ Controt circuit Nisa Chest. > Hames 1 ROMER Indicator lamp is normal | * Eu (htotten sgn anp |” BOM Powe pry (am sina retin) ae Indicator lamp is nomal Tum signal lamp does not | (Applicable side per- biink {forms high flasher activa tion) Front tum signal lamp Front tum signal lamp power sup- ply/around crit Front tum signal lamp bulb Front tum signal lamp bulb socket BM + Side tum signal lamp ‘Side tum signal lamp power sup- plyforound circuit + Side tum signal lamp = BOM Rear tur signal amp Rear turn signal lamp power sup- piy/ground creat Rear tur signal lamp bulo Rear tum signal lamp bulb sockel/ hamess Turn signal lamp circuit Refer to EXL951, ‘Component func ton Check = BCM + Combination svitch inpuvoutput signal circuit Combination switeh Indicatoriampisincuded| | Sone foe bee ita ok ssi: + BcM One sae Combination meter Both sides Tum signal indicator lamp | (Always) ‘does not blink "Tum indicator signal ecw ‘Combination meter ‘Combination meter Data monitor "TURN INO" (Tum signal lamp isnormal)/ Both sides (Only when actvating hazard waring lamp ‘with ignition switen OFF) ‘Combination meter power supply/ ‘ground eeu Combination meter ‘Combination meter Power supply and ground creut Refer to MWi-129, “COMBINATION. MELER.- Diagnosis Procedure". + Hazard warning lamp does not activate (Tum signals normal) + Hazard warning lamp continues activating Hazard switch signaliground ei cuit Hazard switeh BoM Hazard switch Refer to EX1-258 "Component Func. son Check’ EXL-362 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS: < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ‘Symptom Possible cause Thspecton fem > Fuse + BCM power supply (sop lamp) Allofstop lamp endhigh-| reut mounted siop amp are | + Stop lamp switch power suppy/ nottumed ON ‘signal creat + Stop lamp switch + BM Stop lamp and high-mount- = Stop lamp Stop lamp circuit Sop lap are netted = Stop amp power suplyaround | Retertpexi 4 “Conzonent une sui at ton cheat Any of stop lamp and high-mounted stop lamp ‘are not tumed ON ‘stop lamp bulb ‘Stop lamp bulb socketamess. BCM High-mounted stop lamp High-mounted stop lamp power ‘supplyferound circuit High-mounted stop lamp BCM Frontfog lamp isnot tumed ON Front fog lamp power supply/ Front fog lamp circuit ‘ground circuit 4 One side Refer to EXL-347 "Component Func + Front fog lamp bulb + IPDM EIR ccaaeael Symptom diagnosis Both sides "BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON" Refer to EXL-268 “Diagnosis Procedure”. Front fog lamp indicator amp (Front fog lamp is turned ON) {snot tumed ON ‘Combination meter > Combination meter Data monitor FR FOG IND" + BOM (HEAD LAMP) Active test “FR FOG LAMP" Rear fog lamp is not tuned ON Rear fog lamp indicator lamp is normal Rear fog lamp power supply? ‘ground circuit Rear fog lamp bull Rear fog lamp bulb socket OM Rear fog lamp circuit Refer to EXL-249 “Component Func tion-Ghesks, Rear fog lamp indicator lamp is included ‘Combination switch Inpaloulpat signal circuit ‘Combination switeh BeM Combination snitch Refer to 05-119. *Svmotom Table! Rear fog lamp Indleator lamp. (Rear fog lamp fs tumed ON) Isnot tuned ON ‘+ Rearfog lamp status signal CM ‘Combination meter > Combination meter Data monitoe RR FOG INDY + BOM (HEAD LAMP) Active test “RR FOG LAMP” EXL-363 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION Description ——— AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM The headlamp may not be turned ON/OFF immediately after passing dark area or bright area (short tunnel, sky bridge, shadowed area etc.) while using the auto light system. This causes for the control difference. This is normal. HIGH BEAM ASSIST SYSTEM When driving while using the high beam assist system, the headlamp beam may not switch or the beam switching timing may vary according to the ambient environment (the condition of the vehicle ahead, the con- ition of the road, the position of the vehicle, etc.). This is due to control differences and is not a malfunction, EXL-364 BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT TURNED ON < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT TURNED ON Description voor Both side headlamps (HI) are not tured ON when setting to the lighting switch HI or PASS. Diagnosis Procedure feces 1 .COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Check combination snitch, Refer to BOS-119, “Svinplom Table Is the inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2 NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. 2. CHECK HIGH BEAM REQUEST SIGNAL (With CONSULT 4, Select "HIGH BEAM REQ’ in "Data Monitor’ mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 2. With operating the lighting switch, check the monitor status, Lightng switen | Hlor PASS (ND) 10 Isthe inspection result nomal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation” NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Insiallalion”. Monitor ter Monitor status HIGH BEAM REQ EXL-365 BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON Description tei Both side headlamps (LO) are not turned ON in any condition, Diagnosis Procedure nese 1 .cHECK COMBINATION SWITCH Check combinalion onlich, Refer fo EOS-119, “Sumplom THE {s the inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part 2..cHECK LOW BEAM REQUEST SIGNAL (With CONSULT. 1. Select "LOW BEAM REQ” in “Data Monitor’ mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 2. With operating the lighting switch, check the monitor status, Lighting swten | NO igntng sv ee OFF [Sthe inspection tesull normal? YES >> Replace IPDM EIR. Refer fo PCS-60, "Removal and Installation" NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Installation”. Monitor satus Low BEAM REQ EXL-366 PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON Description en The parking, license plate and tail lamps are not turned ON in any condit Diagnosis Procedure ieee 41 «COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Check combination snitch, Refer fo BOS-11a, “Symplom Tables Is the combination switch normal? YES »>>GOTO2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. 2..CHECK POSITION LIGHT REQUEST SIGNAL (With CONSULT 4, Select "POSITION LIGHT REQ’ in “Data Monitor’ mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT. 2. With operating the lighting switch, check the monitor status, Wonlor satus 1ST POSITION LIGHT REQ| Lighting sviten OFF [sthe inspection result normal? YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-60, "Removal and Installation’ NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and Insiallalion”. EXL-367 BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON Description mroamanernee. Both side front fog lamps are not turned ON in any condition Diagnosis Procedure mesentasn 1 COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Check combination snitch, Refer fo EOS-119, “Sumplom THE {s the inspection result normal? YES >>GOTO2. NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part 2..CHECK FRONT FOG LIGHT REQUEST SIGNAL (With CONSULT. 1. Select "FRONT FOG LAMP REQ’ in "Data Monitor’ mode of “IPDM E/R" using CONSULT. 2. With operating the front fog lamp switch, check the monitor status. Front fog lamp switch | ON (With ighting switch 1ST) | OFE Is the item status nomal? YES >> Replace IPDM EIR. Refer fo PCS-60, "Removal and Installation" NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-121, "Removal and |nsiallation”. Wonitor em Monitor status FRONT FOG LAMP REQ EXL-368 HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] PERIODIC MAINTENANCE HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT LHD MODELS LHD MODELS : Description neccemeorortnas PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING NOTE: + For details, refer to the regulations in your own country. + Perform aiming adjustment if the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp assembly has been replaced Before performing aiming adjustment, check the folowing + Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. + Fill with fuel, engine coolant and each oi + Maintain the unloaded vehicle condition. (Remove luggage from the passenger compartment and the lug- ‘gage room.) NOTE: Never remove the temporary tire, jack and on-vehicle tool. + Wipe out dirt on the headiamp. CAUTION: Never use organic solvent (thinner, gasoline etc.). + Ride alone on the driver seat AIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREW ® Heaclamp LH (INSIDE/OUTSIDE) Headlamp LH (UPIDOWN) © Headlamp RH (UP/DOWN) agjustment screw adjustment screw adjustment screw © Headlamp RH (INSIDE/OUTSIDE) adjustment screw <9 Vehicle front ‘ajustment sorew ‘Serewdiver rotation Fading dection INSIDE | Headiamp LH (INSIDE/OUTSIDE) © | Heesane LH UPEORNY ‘Countersiockwise Clockwise Counterclockwise DOWN EXL-369 © | Headiamp RH (UPIOOWN) HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ‘Adjustment screw ‘Screwarver rotation Facing direction Clockwise INSIDE © | Headlamp RH (INSIDEYOUTSIDE) - LE — Counterclackwise OUTSIDE LHD MODELS : Aiming Adjustment Procedure wrowmenen casa 1. Place the screen NOTE: *+ Stop the vehicle at the perpendicular angle to the wall + Set the screen so that itis perpendicular to a level load surface. 2. Face the vehicle squarely toward the screen and make the distance between the headlamp center and the screen 10 m (32.8 f}) 3. Start the engine and illuminate the headlamp (LO). CAUTION: Never cover lens surface with tape, etc. because it is made from plastic. NOTE: Block light from the headlamp that is not being adjusted with a thick fabric or another object, so that it does not reach the adjustment screen. 4. Use the aiming adjustment screw to adjust the elbow point projected by the low beams on the screen, 80 that itis within the aiming adjustment area Low beam distribution on the screen Alming adjustment area Elbow point Headiamp center i——t Horizontal centerline of headlamp [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ait ram fn) ‘Aiming adjustment area Vertical direction (¥) Lateral direction (x) (Lower side from headlamp center height) (Right side from headlamp center line) Highest ight axis 100 (3.94) Target light axis 100 (3.94) 0-100 (3.84) —__Lowest ight axis 130 (6.12) RHD MODELS RHD MODELS : Description neouaecaentass PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING NOTE: + For details, refer to the regulations in your own country. + Perform aiming adjustment if the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp assembly has been replaced Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following, ‘Adjust the tire pressure to the specification + Fill with fuel, engine coolant and each oil. + Maintain the unloaded vehicle condition. (Remove luggage from the passenger compartment and the lug- ‘gage room.) Nori Never remove the temporary tire, jack and on-vehicle tool + Wipe out dirt on the headlamp. CAUTION: Never use organic solvent (thinner, gasoline etc.). + Ride alone on the driver seat AIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREW @ Headlamp LH (INSIOE/OUTSIDE) —_@ Headlamp LH (UPIDOWN) © Headlamp RH (UP/DOWN) adjustment screw adjustment screw adjustment screw © Heaclamp RH (INSIDE/OUTSIDE) adjustment screw <3 Vehicle front ‘ajustment sorew Sorewdiver rotation Faaing direction Gleckwise INSIDE ® | Headiamp LH (SIDE/OUTSIDE) a ‘Counterclockwise OUTSIDE EXL-371 HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ‘Aajustrent screw Serewarver tation] Facing erection Headlamp LH (UP/DOWN) os uF =| ere S Coumerclackwise DOWN Crockwise uP © | Heactamp RH (UPDOWN) | __ [== Z Counterlackwise DOWN Clockwise I INSIDE © | Heastamp RH (NSIDEOUTSIOE) — et 5h RHD MODELS : Aiming Adjustment Procedure yiaeweuiion 1. Place the screen. NOTE: + Stop the vehicle at the perpendicular angle to the wall + Set the screen so that itis perpendicular to a level load surface, 2. Face the vehicle squarely toward the screen and make the distance between the headiamp center and the screen 10 m (32.8 f}) 3. Start the engine and illuinate the headiamp (LO) CAUTION: Never cover lens surface with tape, etc. because it is made from plastic. NOTE: Block light from the headlamp that is not being adjusted with a thick fabric or another object, so that it does not reach the adjustment screen, 4. Use the aiming adjustment screw to adjust the elbow point projected by the low beams on the screen, so that it is within the aiming adjustment area. Low beam distribution on the screen Aiming adjustment area Etbow point Headiamp center Horizontal centerline of headlamp Vertical center ine of headlamp <76@e8@ © Veticalcentertine of headlamp H. Horizontal centerline of headlamp L__ Distance from headlamp center to screen X. Aiming adjustment area Y Aiming adjustment area (Lateral) (ertcal) EXL-372 HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Distance from headlamp center to screen(L) : 10m (32.8 ft) Unite) “Aiming adjustment area Verlcaldrecton ) Tateraldrecion 0) (Lower side from headlamp center height) (ef side from headlamp center ine) Highest ight axis 109 (884) Target ight axis 100184) 0- 100,894) Lowestight axis 130(6.12) EXL-373 FRONT FOG LAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] FRONT FOG LAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT Description veoceapseinan’ PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING NOTE: For details, refer to the regulations in your own country. Before performing aiming adjustment, check the folowing * Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. + Fill with fuel, engine coolant and each oil + Maintain the unloaded vehicle condition, (Remove luggage from the passenger compartment and the lug- ‘gage room.) NOTE: Never remove the temporary tire, jack and on-vehicle tool + Wipe out dirt on the headlamp. ‘CAUTION: Never use organic solvent (thinner, gasoline etc. + Ride alone on the driver seat. AIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREW + Turn the aiming adjusting screw for adjustment. @:cown eu ®6ee Aiming Adjustment Procedure orci 1. Place the screen NOTE: + Stop the vehicle facing the wall + Place the board on a plain road vertically. 2. Face the vehicle with the screen. Maintain 10 m (32.8 ft) between the front fog lamp center and the screen, 3. Start the engine. Turn the front fog lamp ON. CAUTION: Never cover the lens surface with a tape etc. The lens is made of resin. NoTt Shut off the headlamp light with the board to prevent from illuminating the adjustment screen, 4. Adjust the cutoff line height @ with the aiming adjustment screw so that the distance (X) between the hor- izontal center line of front fog lamp (H) and @) becomes 150 mm (5.80 in) Front fog lamp light distribution on the screen i ® -Cutorriine High ilurinance area Horizontal centerline of front fog lamp Vertical centerline of front fog lamp ® 4 v X Cutoff line height EXL-374 FRONT COMBINATION LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FRONT COMBINATION LAMP Exploded View ropownesroareees REMOVAL SEC. 260 £ fi s.s (088.40) @ Front fender panel @ Front combination lamp [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] SEC. 260 @ Front combination lamp housing @)_ Headlamp bull (Lo) @ Socket cover ® Back cover ® Front combination lamp hamess — @_Front combination lamp bracket ® Front tum signal lamp bulb ® Fronttum signal amp bulb socket @)_ Headlamp bulb (Hi) <3 Vehicle ront Removal and Installation ‘ns0 awneorermaa CAUTION: -onnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-214, "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal’. REMOVAL 1. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer td EXI-15, "Removal and installation”. 2. Remove front combination lamp assembly mounting bolts and clip. 3. Remove harness clip of front combination lamp bracket. 4, Pullout front combination lamp forward the vehicle 5. Disconnect front combination lamp harness connectors, and then remove front combination lamp. INSTALLATION Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation, perform aiming adjustment. Refer to the following: + LHD MODELS: Refer to EX\.-369, "LHD MODELS : Description", + RHD MODELS: Refer to EXL-371. "RHD MODELS : Description”. Replacement emai CAUTION: EXL-376 FRONT COMBINATION LAMP. < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] * Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the opera- tion for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-214, “Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. + After installing the bulb, install the socket cover, back cover, and bulb socket securely for watertight- ness. + Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from it. + Never touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned OFF. + Never leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. HEADLAMP BULB (HI) LH side 1, Remove air duct 1, Refer to the following. + MR20DD: Refer to EIV-31, "Removal and |nstallalion’. + QR25DE: Refer to Eli-175. “Removal and installation”. + ROM: Refer to EM-308, "Removal and Installation”. 2. Remove back cover. 3. Disconnect headlamp bulb hamess connector. 4. Rotate headlamp bulb counterclockwise and unlock it, and then remove headlamp bulb. RH side 1, Remove back cover. 2. Disconnect headlamp bulb hamess connector. 3. Rotate headlamp bulb counterclockwise and unlock it, and then remove headlamp bulb. HEADLAMP BULB (LO) LH side 1, Remove air duct 1. Refer to the following. + MR20DD: Refer fo EM-31. "Removal and Installation”. + QR2SDE: Refer to EM-175. "Removal and Installation’. + ROM: Refer to EM-308, "Removal and Installation”. 2. Remove back cover. 3. Disconnect headlamp bulb hamess connector. 4. Rotate headlamp bulb counterclockwise and unlock it, and then remove headiamp bulb. RH side 1. Remove back cover. 2. Disconnect headlamp bulb harness connector. fa 3. Rotate headlamp bulb counterclockwise and unlock it, and then remove headlamp bulb. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT/ PARKING LAMP BULB CAUTION Replacement of a single part is not possible due to the adoption of LED bull front combination lamp as a set. Refer to EXL-S76, "Removal and installation”. FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB LH side 1, Remove air duct 1. Refer to the following. + MR20DD: Refer to EIV-31. "Removal and Installation" + QR25DE: Refer to EM-175, "Removal and Installation’. + ROM: Refer to EIV-308, "Removal and Installation”. 2. Rotate front turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it 3. Remove front turn signal lamp bulb from turn signal lamp bulb socket. RH side 1, Rotate front turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it 2, Remove front turn signal lamp bulb from turn signal lamp bulb socket. r replacement, replace EXL-377 FRONT COMBINATION LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Disassembly and Assembly peicauaiat DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove front combination lamp bracket fixing screws, and then remove front combination lamp bracket. 2. Disconnect front combination lamp harness. 3. Rolate front turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock i. 4. Remove front turn signal lamp bulb from front turn signal lamp bulb socket 5. Remove back cover. 6. Remove headlamp bulb (Hi) 7. Remove socket cover. 8. Remove headlamp bulb (Lo). ASSEMBLY Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: + After installing the bulb, install the socket cover, back cover, and bulb socket securely watertight- hess. + After installation, perform aiming adjustment. Refer to following. - LHD MODELS: Refer to EXL-369, "LHD MODELS : Description”, ~ RHD MODELS: Refer to EXL-371. "RHD MODELS : Description”. EXL-378 FRONT FOG LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] FRONT FOG LAMP. Exploded View wocownirooreee: SEC. 265-620 @® Front bumper fascia ® Frontfog lamp @ Front og lamp bulb @ Spring rut <3 Vehicle ront a Removal and Installation roe conseroarees CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-214, "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. REMOVAL 1, Remove front fender protector to make work space. Refer to EXT-35, "FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation’, 2. Disconnect front fog lamp harness connector. 3. Remove front fog lamp fixing screws, and then remove front fog lamp, INSTALLATION Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal. tallation, perform aiming adjustment. Refer to EXL-374, "Description". Replacement svoweenecorece CAUTION: EXL-379 FRONT FOG LAMP <= REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ‘Disconnect the battery negative tonninal or remove power creutt fuse when performing the opera: tion for preventing electric leakage. Refer to “ + Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from + Never touch bulb by hand while itis lit or right after being turned OFF. + Never leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one, FRONT FOG LAMP BULB 1, Remove fender protector to make work space. Refer to EXT-35. RR Installation’ 2. Disconnect front fog lamp harness connector @ 3. Rotate front fog lamp bulb @ counterclockwise and unlock it. EXL-380 LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR Exploded View = Refer to WW-109, "Exploded View. Removal and Installation sistant CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-214, "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. REMOVAL Remove light & rain sensor. Refer to WW-109, "Removal and Installation". INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. EXL-381 LIGHTING & TURN SIGNAL SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] LIGHTING & TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal and Installation CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-244, "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. REMOVAL Remove lighting & turn signal switch (combination switch). Refer fo BCS-122, "Removal and Installation’. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. EXL-382 HAZARD SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-214, "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. REMOVAL 1. Remove center ventilator grille. Refer to folowing + LHD MODELS: Refer to [P-14, "Removal and Installation’. + RHD MODELS: Refer to IP-41, "Removel and Installation”. 2. Disengage fixing paws, and then remove hazard switch from center ventilator grille. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal EXL-383 HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH Removal and Installation racine REMOVAL 1. Remove instrument lower panel RH. Refer to the following. + LHD MODELS: IP-14, "Removal ai lation. + RHD MODELS: |P-41, "Removal and Installation”. 2. Disengage headlamp aiming switch fixing paws, and then remove headlamp aiming switch from instru- ment lower panel RH. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. EXL-384 SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP Exploded View row omen oeses Refer to MIR:27, "Exploded View". Removal and Installation row omen oree 9 CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EX-214, "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. REMOVAL 1. Remove door mirror cover. Refer to MIR-30, "DOOR MIRROR COVER = Removal and Installation’ 2, Remove side turn signal lamp fixing screws. 3, Remove seal packing @ and disconnect side tum signal lamp hamess connector @), and then remove side turn signal lamp from door mirror housing. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Replacement otis CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to " SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB CAUTION: Replacement of a single part is not possible due to the adoption of LED bulb. For replacement, replace JI ‘side turn signal lamp as a set. Refer to EX.-385. "Removal and Installation”. EXL-385 REAR COMBINATION LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] REAR COMBINATION LAMP. Exploded View REMOVAL Body Side SEC. 265 4.7 (048, 42) Rear combination fap @ @ Grommet 9 (body side) 2 :0ip Nem (kgm nib) Back Door Side EXL-386 REAR COMBINATION LAMP: < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] SEC. 265 \ h Rear combination lamp ® (back door side) ©) Clip Nm kgm, i) DISASSEMBLY EXL-387 REAR COMBINATION LAMP [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] SEC. 265 S a y Y v/ p/ Rear combination lamp Rear combination lamp ® (cody sce) ® Gack door side) a) Dafoe bu: @ Back-up lamp bulb @ Back-up lamp bulb socket © Teil lamp bulb socket @__Reartum signal amp bulb @ _Reartum signal lamp bulb socket @ Stop lamp bulb socket @ Stop lamp bulo REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BODY SIDE) REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BODY SIDE) : Removal and Installation woocamenoverme® CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-214, “Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. REMOVAL 41. Fully open back door. 2. Remove rear spoiler. Refer to EXT-64, "Removal and Installation’. 3. Remove rear combination lamp (body side) mounting bolts. 4. Apply protective tapes (A) on the part to protect it from damage. AW suse: side lower finisher. Refer to EXL-388 REAR COMBINATION LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] ‘Disconnect rear combination lamp (body side) hamess connec- l / bi 7. Pull rear combination lamp (body side) toward vehiole rear to disengage fixing clips, and then remove rear combination lamp (body side). CO) :Clip INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BODY SIDE) : Replacement rowemrceoareaye CAUTION: + Discanact ie bittary negative termina} or entons newer neal fee when pedforniind dhe pore tion for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL- vit + Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from it. + Never touch bulb by hand while itis lit or right after being turned OFF. + Never leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to repli TAIL LAMP BULB 1, Remove rear combination lamp (body side). Refer to EXL-308_ $e it with new one. SIDE) : Removal and Installation’: 2. Rotate tail lamp bulb socket counterclockwise, and then remove tall lamp bulb socket 3. Remove tail lamp bulb from tail lamp bulb socket. STOP LAMP BULB 1. Remove rear combination lamp (body side). Refer to EXL-J85, "REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BODY SIDE) : Removal and Installation”. 2. Rotate stop lamp bulb socket counterclockwise, and then remove stop lamp bulb socket. 3. Remove stop lamp bulb from stop lamp bulb socket. REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB 1, Remove rear combination lamp (body side). Refer to EX\-385. "REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BODY Song A 2. Rotate rear turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise, and then remove rear turn signal lamp socket. 3. Remove rear tum signal lamp bulb from rear tur signal lamp bulb socket. REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BACK DOOR SIDE) EXL-389 bulb REAR COMBINATION LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BACK DOOR SIDE) : Removal and Installation CAUTION: Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to REMOVAL 1. Fully open back door. 2. Remove back door inner finisher, Refer to INT-47_ “Removal and Installation’ 3. Disconnect rear combination lamp (back door side) harness connector @). 4. Remove rear combination lamp (back door side) mounting nuts ®. 5. Apply protective tape (A) on the part to protect it from damage, 6. Disengage rear combination lamp (back door side) fixing clips using a remover tool (A), and then remove rear combination lamp (back door side), lip INSTALLATION EXL-390 REAR COMBINATION LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR COMBINATION LAMP (BACK DOOR SIDE) : Replacement CAUTION: + Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the opera- tion for preventing electric leakage. Refer to + Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from it. + Never touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned OFF. + Never leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. TAIL LAMP BULB 1. Remove rear combination lamp (back door side). Refer to EXL-390. "REAR COMBINATION LAMP BACK DOOR SIDE) R + 2. Rotate tail lamp bulb socket counterclockwise, and then remove tail lamp bulb socket, 3, Remove tail lamp bulb from tail lamp bulb socket, BACK-UP LAMP BULB 1. Remove rear combination lamp (back door side). Refer to EXL-390, “REAR COMBINATION LAMP K IDE) : Removal and Installatior 2. Rotate back-up lamp bulb socket counterclockwise, and then remove back-up lamp bulb socket. 3. Remove back-up lamp bulb from back-up lamp bulb sooket EXL-391 HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP Exploded View abi 30.268 @ High-mounted stop tamp ‘Nem (kgm, in-b) Removal and Installation \nrowraroonaee CAUTION: Diacohnnnat baliary négative auninsl or mows power airs fuss whee Retford ha Gparaiion for preventing electric leakage. Refer to REMOVAL 1. Fully open back door. 2. Apply protective tapes (A) on the part to protect it from damage. EXL-392 HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] 3. Disengage back door cover fixing metal clips and pawls using a remover tool (A), and then remove back door cover. Paw! Metal op S es 4, Remove high-mounted stop lamp mounting nuts ®, 5. Disconnect high-mounted stop lamp harness connector @), and then remove high-mounted stop lamp, INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Replacement etait CAUTION: Disconnect battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-214, "Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal”. HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP BULB CAUTION Replacement of a single part is not possible due to the adoption of LED bulb. For replacement, replace high-mounted stop lamp unit as a set. Refer to EX\.-392, "Removal and Installation". EXL-393 LICENSE PLATE LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] LICENSE PLATE LAMP Exploded View nebo @ License plate lamp bulb socket. © @_License plate lamp bub @® Sealpacking ® License plate lamp housing <2 Vehicle front Removal and Installation ‘aroe owsorarae preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-244, ") REMOVAL 1. Remove back door finisher cap. Refer to EXT-66, "Removal and Installation’. 2, Remove license plate lamp fixing screw. 3. Disengage license plate lamp housing fixing portion from back door. 4, Disconnect license plate lamp hamess connector, and then remove license plate lamp. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Replacement scanner CAUTION: * Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the opera- tion for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-394 LICENSE PLATE LAMP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] = Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other olly matters away from It. + Never touch bulb by hand while itis lit or right after being turned OFF. + Never leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. LICENSE PLATE LAMP BULB 1, Remove license plate lamp, Refer to EXL-294, "Removal and installation”. 2. Rotate license plate lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it, 3. Remove license plate lamp bulb from license plate lamp bulb socket. EXL-395 REAR FOG LAMP. < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] REAR FOG LAMP. Exploded View neo cemmovarane® SEC. 263 AA \ @ Rear bumper fascia ® Rear tog tamp Removal and Installation ‘roo commons CAUTION: Disconnect battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the operation for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-244. i inal’ REMOVAL 1. Remove rear bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-18_ ‘Removal and installation” 2. Remove rear fog lamp mounting nuts. 3. Remove rear fog lamp from rear bumper fascia INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Replacement a CAUTION: + Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse when performing the opera- tion for preventing electric leakage. Refer to EXL-214, " i inal". + Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from it. + Never touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned OFF. + Never leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. REAR FOG LAMP BULB 1. Remove rear bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-18, "Removal and installation’, 2. Disconnect rear fog lamp bulb harness connector. 3. Rotate rear fog lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it. 4. Remove rear fog lamp bulb from rear fog lamp bulb socket. EXL-396 REAR REFLEX REFLECTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HALOGEN HEADLANP] REAR REFLEX REFLECTOR Exploded View wrooowearooreees SEC. 265 \ \ BawAn I @ Rear bumper fascia @ Rear retex eector A, : Paw <2: Vehicle rot Removal and Installation srooeenrureme? REMOVAL 1. Remove rear bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-18, "Removal and \nstallation". 2. Remove rear reflex reflector fixing screw and pawis, and then remove rear reflex reflector. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal EXL-397 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [HALOGEN HEADLAMP] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Bulb Specifications Bulb Specifications Tem Tipe wiatage Headlanp (i) #9 Headiar (Lo) HTT s Front combination amy ita ae ae us - Front tum signal emp WY2TW (Amber) 2 Froiog an HIT 5 ‘Side tu signal lamp ted = Sep lamb wei i Rear combination lamp Jen See se 2 ear um signal lamp wraiw a Backup lamp wiew 6 Rear fog lamp wow 2 cense pate lamp wow 3 Hlgh-mounted sop amp ED) = EXL-398 BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY sconc T EXTERIOR PRECAUTION 3 COWL TOP Exploded View 24 PRECAUTIONS 3 Removal and installation 25 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- FRONT SPOILER: SIONER" 3 Exploded View Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- Removal and Installation 28 tion After Battery Discornect 3 Precaution for Pracedure without Cow! TopGover..4 MUDGUARD Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal 4 Exploded View 2 FRONT MUDGUARD 23 PREPARATION .... 7 FRONT MUDGUARD : Removal and Installation....30 PREPARATION. REAR MUDGUARD 30 ‘Gorumerdial PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ron mantrene The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG" and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG" and “SEAT BELT" of this Service Manual WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. + To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSANJINFINITI dealer. + Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. + Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser- vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. + When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the fn ON oF ene |, Never use ait of electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer, Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. + When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect CAUTION: ‘Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction. + Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the ignition power source and accessory power source to the OFF, then disconnect both battery cables, + After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect both battery cables. + Always use CONSULT to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work. If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results. For vehicle with steering lock unit, ifthe battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and cannot be tumed, If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro- cedure below before starting the repair operation OPERATION PROCEDURE 1, Connect both battery cables. NOTE: ‘Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged, 2, Open driver door, 3, Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (At this time, the steering lock will be released.) 4, Turn the ignition switch to OFF position with driver door open. 5, Wait for 3 minutes or longer with driver door open. NOTE: + Do not close driver door because the steering wheel locks when driver door is closed. EXT-3 PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > * The auto ace function is adapted to this vehicle. For this reason, even when the ignition switch is tured to OFF position, the accessory power source does not turned OFF and continues to be supplied for a certain amount of time. 6. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon- nected and the steering wheel can be turned, 7. Perform the necessary repair operation. 8, When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn the ignition switch from OFF position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.) 9. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT. Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover ‘When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to ‘windshield. Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal rooasn oe + With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time, ‘When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC ‘ te power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing “How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below. NOTE: Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC detection or ECU data damage may occu. For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure tconnéct the main bat- tery and the sub battery before turning Gi the igaition switch NOTE: - If the ignition switch is turned ON with any ene of the terminals of main battery and sub battery disconnected; tien DYC may be detected + After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result” of all ECUs ayxd erase DTC. NOTE: ' The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error. HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below. For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2. INSTRUCTION 4 1. Open the hood. 2, Tum key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened. 3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. 4 ‘Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse of the specified time. 4D engine: 20 minutes HRA2DOT — : 12 minutes. EXT PRECAUTIONS. < PRECAUTION > Kekengine = éminutes NOR engine -4 minutes RoM engine: 4 minutes Vex engine: minutes CAUTION: While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. 5. Remove 12V battery terminal. CAUTION: After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF) 1, Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry. NoTi A this moment, ACC power is supplied. ‘Open the driver side door. ‘Open the hood, Close the driver side door. Wait at least 3 minutes. CAUTION: While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. 6. Remove 12V battery terminal CAUTION: After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. oaen EXT-5 PREPARATION < PREPARATION > PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools Toone Descrstion Engine ear 2 Locates the noise EXT-6 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow strometenaerss ———— ‘Check Fined Service Bullen ‘Govivn Rapa To« CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of the customer's comments; refer to EXT-11 "Diagnostic Worksheet”, This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. + The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur) + If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concemed about. This can be accomplished by a test drive with the customer. After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics ca are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. Squeak - (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) ‘Squeak characteristics include the light contactfast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces igher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping + Creak — (Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include fim contact/slow movementitwisting with a rotational movementipitch depen- dent on materials/often brought on by activity. + Rattle — (Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movementiloose parts/missing clip or fastenerlincorrect clearance + Knock — (Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action + Tick ~ (Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action of road conditions, + Thump — (Heavy, muffied knock noise) ‘Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. + Buzz — (Like a bumbie bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact + Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that @ technician may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. + Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE EXT-7 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES: < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > if possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions vihen the repair is reconfirmed. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to dupli- cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all ofthe following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, hatf-clutch on MT model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. + Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise ocours. + If itis dificult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slovdy on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body, LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening too! Engine Ear or mechanics stethoscope). 2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: + Removing the components in the area that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken oF lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. + Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem- porarily. + Feeling for a vibration by hand by touching the component(s) that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise. + Placing a piece of paper between components that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise, + Looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to EXT-S, "Inspection Procedure". REPAIR THE CAUSE + Ifthe cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely, * Ifthe cause is insufficient clearance between components: = Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, it possible. - Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or ure~ thane tape, These insulators are available through the authorized Nissan Parts Department. CAUTION: Never use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. NOTE: + URETHANE PADS Insulates connectors, hamess, etc. + INSULATOR (Foam blocks) insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. + INSULATOR (Light foam block) + FELT CLOTHTAPE Used to insulate vihere movement does not occur, Ideal for instrument panel applications. The following materials, not available through NISSAN Parts Department, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. + UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. + SILICONE GREASE Used in place of UHMW tape that is be visible or does not fit. ‘Note: Will only last a few months. + SILICONE SPRAY Used when grease cannot be applied. + DUCT TAPE Used to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR EXT-8 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES: < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally ocourred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet Inspection Procedure wroemowanererit Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1, Cluster lid A and instrument panel Acrylic lens and combination meter housing Instrument panel to front pillar garnish Instrument panel to windshield Instrument panel mounting pins Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter, 7. AC defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by apply- ing felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring har- ness. ‘CAUTION: Never use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. if the area is saturated with si of repair becomes impossible. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1, Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2, AIC control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console, DOORS Pay attention to the following: 1, Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. The areas can usually be insulated with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks to repair the noise. TRUNK ‘Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the customer. In addition look for the following: 4. Trunk fid dumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3, Trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4, A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or components) caus~ ing the noise, SUNROOF/HEADLINING Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1, Sunroof ld, ral, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking oanen ‘one, the recheck EXT-9 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > ‘Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. SEATS, When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise occurs. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A-squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. Rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con- ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component of applying urethane tape to the contact area. UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the en: ‘Components that pass through the engine wall Engine wall mounts and connectors Loose radiator mounting pins Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment ‘These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. isolate most of these EXT-10 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > Diagnostic Worksheet oocwnereorerss SQUEAK & RATTLE DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Dear Nissan Customer: We are concerned about your satisfaction with your Nissan vehicle. Repairing a squeak or rattle sometimes can be very difficult. To help us fix your Nissan right the first time, please take a moment to note the area of the vehicle where the squeak or rattle occurs and under what conditions. You may be asked to take a test drive with a service advisor or technician to ensure we confirm the noise you are hearing. |. WHERE DOES THE NOISE COME FROM? (circle the area of the vehicle) The illustrations are for reference only, and may not reflect the actual configuration of your vehicle. occurs. EXT-11 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > ‘SQUEAK & RATTLE DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET - page Briefly describe the location where the noise occurs: IL WHEN DOES IT OCCUR? (please check the boxes that apply) anytime ater siting ut inthe rain 1 tsttime in the moming 1 when itis raining or wet 1 only when itis cold outside 1 aty or dusty conditions 1 only when itis hot outside Oi other: I WHEN DRIVING: IV. WHAT TYPE OF NOISE C1 through driveways 1 squeat (tke tennis shoes on a clean flor) 1 over rough roads 1 creak tike-weiking on an old wooden floor) Ci over speed bumps 1 ate (ike shaking a baby rattle) Ci only about__mph knock (like krivek atthe door) Ti on acceleration tick (ike @ clock second hand) Ti coming to stop 1 thump (heavy, mutled knock noise) Con tums: left right or either (circle) buzz (like a bumble bee) CO with passengers or cargo O other: Cater criving miles or minutes ‘TO BE COMPLETED BY DEALERSHIP PERSONNEL Test Drive Notes: YES NO _ Initials of person performing Vehicle test driven with customer a a ~ Noise verified on test drive a a - Noise source located and repaired a a - Follow up test drive performed to confirm repair ao a VIN: (Customer Name: Woe ate: ‘This form must be attached to Work Order oo BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR < VEHICLE INFORMATION > VEHICLE INFORMATION BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR Body Exterior Paint Color Taorcade BEAN | BEAR | BG] BAGS | BKAD | BOAB | BRAG Deseapton | Rea | %ROFT orange | sick | swer | Gray | wnie | Dar Component Paint type" | 2S 2PM 2PM 2 | aM 2M 3p 2M Hard eer ] @] Doormirercover | Bedyccior | BANS | BEAN | BEAR | Ge | GK23 | BKAD | BOAB | BRAG hremium | Fronile oe ef ale] elelala| e Sect — fare a oe | fer @® Filet moiging Material color | — = ia 3 = a 2 @| Pomrousaenanse | Sremm | cr | ce | ce | ew | | |e | @| Rear spoiler (Side) | Black or | Gor | Gor | Gor | oor | Gor | cor | cor “© | Rearspoier(Uppet) | Body coir | BAX6 | BEAN | BEAR | BG4 | BK23 | BKAD | BOAB | BRAG @| Backccormaner [SRO [cr | er foe | @ | @ | @ | a | oe | Back door Body color | axe | BEAN | BEAR BGai | BK2 | BKAD | BOAE | BRAG | Sileover watratcoor| - | - | - | - | - | -|- |= Material calor L - Pron NOTE: + 2M: 2-Coat Metalic + 2P: 2.Coat pear + 28:2-Goat solid + 3P:3-Coat peart + 2PM: 2-Coat Pearl metalic EXT-13 FRONT BUMPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FRONT BUMPER Exploded View ‘SEC. 263-620 Se iS pe @ é Pyz0120.15) @ Front bumper side bracket RH @)_Front umper stay RH @ Front bumper reinforcement @ Front impor shernyabeoiber(@_“Hoadarmpvashercoveri, qian bumoer feb (thout front fog fam) Front bumper finisher RH Front bumper finisher LH ® ein ront og ime) 3B) Front aged sole: ® Goth tront og imp EXT-14 FRONT BUMPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Front bumper finisher LH kPa @ Bumper bracket cover @ Headlamp washer cover LH @ Front bumper fascia @ Front fog lamp LH ® Apron bracket @ Front bumper side bracket LH @_Front bumper stay LH @ Front fog lamp RH @ Front bumper nile fy Paw FD nmgigm, ti) ©, 4. ¥, @ indicates that te partis connected at poins wth same eymbal in actual vehicle Removal and Installation wroesunev ant CAUTIOI Bumper fascia is made of resin. Never apply strong force to it, and be careful to prevent contact with oil REMOVAL 1. Fully open hood assembly. 2, Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-22, “Removal and Installation”. 3. Remove front bumper fascia fixing clips ® of bumper upper side 4, Remove engine under cover fixing clips @ of bumper lower side. <2 Vehicle front 5. Remove front spoiler. Refer to EXT-25. "Removal ang Installation”. 6. Remove front bumper fascia fixing screws @ lower side of the bumper both end. <2: Vehicle front 7, Remove front side of front filet molding (LH and RH). Refer to EXT-32, "i Removal and Installation EXT-15 FRONT BUMPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > @ Remove grommet @ front side of fender protector (LH and RH). <2 Vehicte front 9. Remove front bumper fascia fixing screws @ (LH and RH), <2 Vehicle front 10. Apply protective tapes (A) on the part to protect it from damage. 11. Pull bumper fascia side toward the vehicle side to disengage the fiting of bumper side bracket and bumper fascia side according to the numerical order 1-32 as shown by the arrows in the fig- ure. e ae CAUTION: c ee When removing bumper fascia assembly, 2 workers are 4 required so as to prevent it from dropping. Paw 12. Disconnect front fog lamp harness connectors (LH and RH). (if equipped) 13. Disconnect front sonar sensor harness connectors (LH and RH). (if equipped) 14, Disconnect headlamp washer tube connector, and then remove headlamp washer tube from washer pump. (if equipped) 1. Remove front bumper fascia assembly. CAUTION: When removing bumper fascia assembly, 2 workers are required so as to prevent it from dropping. 16. Remove the following parts after removing front bumper fascia assembly, + Front fog lamp. Refer to the following. (if equipped) - LED HAEDLAMP: Refer to EXL-193, "Removal and Installation’, - HALOGEN HEADLAMP: Refer to EX(-379, “Removal and Installation’, EXT-16 FRONT BUMPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > ~ Front sonar sensor. Refer to the following. (irequipped) + WITH PARK ASSIST: Refer to SN-299, “FRONT Removal and Installation’, - WITHOUT PARK ASSIST: Refer to SN-113. "FRONT Removal and Installation’. + Headlamp washer tube. Refer to Wiv-107. "WASHER TUBE Removal and Installation’. (if equipped) + Headlamp washer nozzle, Refer to WW-105. "WASHER NOZZLE | Removal and Installation’. (if equipped) + Front bumper side bracket (LH and RH). + Front bumper finisher (LH and RH). + Front bumper grille. + Front bumper molding + Bumper bracket cover. 17. Remove front bumper energy absorber. 18. Remove apron bracket mounting nuts and fixing clips, and then remove apron bracket, 19. Remove front bumper reinforcement a. Remove harness clip. b. Disengage ambient sensor fixing pawl. c, Remove intelligent key warning buzzer mounting bolt. (with intelligent key system) 1d. Remove distance radar mounting bolts. (if equipped) e. Remove front bumper reinforcement mounting nuts, and then remove front bumper reinforcement. 20. Remove front bumper stay mounting bolts, and then remove front bumper stay (LH and RH) INSTALLATION Note the folowing Heme, and then instal nthe reverse order of removal * The following table shows the specified values for checking normal installation status. + Fitting adjustment cannot be performed combination lamp (0.004 — 0.118 in) Front bumperfascia-Front | @ _ 0.1-4.0 mm fender panel (0.004 — 0.039 in) (0.3) —(#4.7) mm [(-0.012) - (+0.067) in} Portion Clearance | Surface height difference 5 01-30mm | o (0.004-0.118 in) | Front bumper fascia ~ front grille 5 0.4-3.0mm = (0.004 0.118 in) Front bumper fascia — Front " 04-30 mm EXT-17 REAR BUMPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REAR BUMPER Exploded View ee SEC. 265-850 W)z0(21.95) Bi2002,19 e021) @ Rearbumper side bracketLH--@_ Grommet @ Rear bumper stay LH @ Rear bumper fascia © Reflex reflector LH @ _ Rear tog amp (it equipped) Rear bumper riser alent © Reflex efector RH @ Rear bumper rinforcoment @ Rear bumper stay RH @ Rear bumper sie bracket RH Ey Paw (9) Nm Gorm. ine) ©) tem hm, by ©, 4. ¥. © 0 insicates thatthe partis connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle. Removal and Installation roca ors CAUTION: Bumper fascia is made of resin. Never apply strong force to it, and be careful to prevent contact with EXT-18 REAR BUMPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REMOVAL 4. Fully open back door. 2. Remove back side of rear fillet molding (LH and RH). Refer to " ‘Removal and Installation", 3. Remove rear bumper fascia fixing screws @ of bumper upper side 4. Remove rear bumper fascia fixing clips @ of bumper lower side. 5. Remove rear bumper fascia mounting bolt @ and fixing clip lower side of bumper both end. <2: Vehicle front 6. Remove rear bumper fascia mounting bolt @ (LH and RH) EXT-19 REAR BUMPER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Apply protective tape (A) on the part to protect it from damage. 8. Pull rear bumper fascia side toward the vehicle side to disen- gage the fitting of rear bumper side bracket and rear bumper fascia side according to the numerical order 123 as shown by the arrows in the figure. CAUTION: When removing bumper fascia, 2 workers are required so as to prevent it from dropping. Pawi 9. Disconnect rear fog lamp hamess connector. (if equipped) 10. Disconnect rear sonar sensor harness connector. (if equipped) 11, Remove rear bumper fascia assembly. CAUTION: When removing bumper fascia, 2 workers are required so as to prevent it from dropping. 12, Remove the following parts after removing rear bumper fascia assembly. + Rear fog lamp, Refer othe folowing. (f equipped) ~ LED HEADLAMP: Refer to «HALOGEN HEADLAMP: Refer o + Rear sonar sensor. Refer to the following re aeaeey - WITH PARK ASSIST: Refer to - WITHOUT PARK ASSIST: Refer to SN-114, "REAR - Removal and Installation’, + Reflex reflector. Refer to EXL-212, "Removal and Installation’. + Rear bumper finisher. (if equipped) 13. Remove rear bumper reinforcement mounting nuts, and then remove rear bumper reinforcement, 14. Remove reat bumper stay mounting bolts, and then remove rear bumper stay (LH and RH), INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal NOTE: + The following table shows the specified values for checking normal installation status. + Fitting adjustment cannot be performed. EXT-20 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REAR BUMPER Portion Clearance ‘Surface height difference 5.5-9.5mm 6-6 , € Rear bumper fascia—Back door |®~®| (0.217 -0.374.in) panel 3.0-7.0mm (1.8) - (#2.4) mm (0.118 — 0.276 in) {(-0.071) — (+0.094) in] Rear bumper fascia — Rear fender 0.1-1.0 mm (-0.3) — (+1.7) mm_ panel (0.004 — 0.039 in) [(-0.012) - (+0.087) in] EXT-21 FRONT GRILLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FRONT GRILLE Exploded View SEC. 260623 © Tum fastoner ® Grommet @ Front emblem ® Front grile © Front camera (if equlppes) © slip Paw Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Fully open hood assembly. EXT-22 FRONT GRILLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2 Remove front grille fixing clips @ of front grille upper side. <2 Vehicle tront 3. Todisengage fasteners, locate the service holes top position of front grille. Insert a flat-biaded screwdriver (A) into the service hole on vehicle left side and rotate turn fastener counterclockwise. Insert the flat- bladed screwdriver into the service hole on vehicle right side and rotate turn fastener clockwise 4, Disengage front grille fixing clips and pawis from back side while Pulling front grille toward vehicle front O ete 5. Disconnect front camera hamess connector. (if equipped) 6. Remove front grille. 7. Remove the following parts after removing front grille. + Front camera. Refer to AV-269, "Removal lation’. (if equipped) + Front emblem. INSTALLATION Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: When installing front grille, install turn fastener to back of front grille, and then install front grille. EXT-23 COWL TOP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > COWL TOP Exploded View reco cewoncrereee2 ‘SEC. 660 ® Cow top seat ® Com top cover ® Coultop gile ip @ Cow top cover cap © Cowl top extension @ EPT seal ft 100mm 0.384 in} EXT-24 COWL TOP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > @_EPTseal[t 3.0mm (0.118in)) © Clip A: Paw <2: Vehicle front #54 Always replace after every disassembly. Removal and Installation er REMOVAL 1. Remove front wiper arm (LH and RH). Refer to WWit82. “WIPER ARM _ Removal and Installalion* 2. Remove fender cover (LH and RH). Refer to DLK.272 "FENDER COVER | Removal and Installation’ 3. Remove cow! top insulator fixing clips @, and then remove cow! top insulator (REM engine models anly) 4. Remove cowl top grille clip using a remover tool (A) according to the numerical order 12 as shown by the arrows in the figure. 5. Cover cowl top cover @ and upper side of front fender panel with a shop cloth (A) to prevent damage. EXT-25 COWL TOP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 6. Disengage cow! fop cover @ using a remover tool (A) fram wind- shield glass lower molding @. ® : Windshield glass 7. Remove joint of front washer tube. Remove cowl top cover. 9. Remove the following parts after removing cow! top cover. + EPT seal + Cow top seal. + Cowl top cover cap. + Front washer tube. Refer to WW-101, FRONT WASHER TUBE : Removal and Installation’. + Front washer nozzle, Refer to i ! 10. Remove front wiper drive assembly, Refer to W\-85. "WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY» Removal and installa tion’. ‘11. Remove cow! top extension mounting bolts and nut, and then remove cowl top extension 12. Remove EPT seal after removing cowl top extension, INSTALLATION ‘Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: * Clean the joint between the cowl top cover and the windshield, and then install them. * Replace the EPT seal on the back surface with new EPT seal when reusing the cowl top cover + When installing cow! top cover ®, always match perfectly the portion @ of cowl top extension @ with the portion @) of cowl top cover. SH EXT-26 COWL TOP < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > + When installing cow! top cover @, always engage perfectly the portion @ of cowl top cover with the \dshield glass lower molding @, so that the surface height difference between the cowl top cover and windshield glass () becomes “0”. + Never wash the vehicle within 24 hours after installing so as to keep adhesive. + After installing, perform adjustment of front wiper arms. Refer to WW-83. “WIPER ARM : Adjust- ment’. + After installing, perform adjustment of front washer nozzle. Refer to WW-98. "FRONT WASHER NO2Z- LE: Inspection and Adjustment". EXT-27 FRONT SPOILER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FRONT SPOILER Exploded View roo eoraeea3811 ‘SEC. 960, @® Front spoiler ® Spring nut

MUDGUARD Exploded View MUDGUARD ‘SEC. 630-760 @ Front mudguard <5 Vehicle front FRONT MUDGUARD ® Spring rut EXT-29 @ Rear mudguard MUDGUARD < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FRONT MUDGUARD : Removal and Installation REMOVAL Remove front mudguard fixing screws, and then remove front mudguard. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR MUDGUARD REAR MUDGUARD : Removal and Installation REMOVAL Remove rear mudguard fixing screws, and then remove rear mudguard. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. EXT-30 FILLET MOLDING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FILLET MOLDING Exploded View occwnoreorertr ‘SEC. 767 @® Grommet ® Serew grommet @ Front fet molding @ Rear filet molding EXT-31 FILLET MOLDING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Clip <= Veniale ont FRONT FILLET MOLDING FRONT FILLET MOLDING : Removal and Installation nrc oatrareae REMOVAL 1. Remove front mudguard. Refer to EXT-30, "FRONT MUDGUARD Removal and _lostallation’. (if equipped) 2. Remove front fillet molding fixing screws @ and clip ©. <5 Vehicte front 3. Remove front filet molding fixing clips of front side according to the numerical order 1-2 as shown in the figure. 2 elie 4. Apply protective tapes (A) on the part to protect it from damage. <2 Vehicle front 5. Remove front fillet molding fixing clips using a remover tool (A), and then remove front fillet molding, © Clip <> Vehicle font 6. Remove the following parts after removing front fillet molding, EXT-32 FILLET MOLDING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > + Grommet + Screw grommet. INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: + When installing front fillet molding, visually check the clips, then replace them with new parts if they are damaged. + When installing front fillet molding, check that clips are securely fitted in fender panel holes, and then press them in. REAR FILLET MOLDING. REAR FILLET MOLDING : Removal and Installation roo cir ares REMOVAL 1. Remove rear mudguard. Refer to EXT-30, " DGUAR! ioval and Installation’. (if equipped) 2, Remove rear fillet molding fixing screws @), <2 Vehicle front 3. Remove rear fillet molding fixing clips of rear side according to the numerical order 12 as shown in the figure. 4. Apply protective tapes (A) on the part to protect it from damage. <3 Vehicle front EXT-33 FILLET MOLDING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 5. Remove rear filet molding fixing clips using a remover tool (A), and then remove rear filet molding <3 Vehicle front 6. Remove the following parts after removing rear filet molding. + Grommet. + Screw grommet. INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: + When installing rear fillet molding, visually check the clips, then replace them with new parts if they are damaged. + When installing rear fillet molding, check that clips are securely fitted in panel holes on body, and then press them in. EXT-34 FENDER PROTECTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FENDER PROTECTOR FENDER PROTECTOR FENDER PROTECTOR : Exploded View neocons SEC. 630 ® Front fender protector ® Oli rut @ Splash guard @® Fender cio <3 : Vehicle front FENDER PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation woeaoncnceres: REMOVAL 1. Remove front spoiler. Refer to £XT-28, “Removal and installation". 2. Remove front fillet molding. Refer to £XT-32, "FRONT FILLET MOLDING Removal and Installation’. 3, Remove splash guard fixing clips and then remove splash guard EXT-35 FENDER PROTECTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4 Remove front fender protector fixing screws @ of front fender protector front side. REAR WHEEL HOUSE PROTECTOR : Exploded View SEC. 767 @ Rearwheel house protector LH @) Sill cover LH ® Spring rut @ Silcover RH © Rear whee! house protector RH <2: Vehicle front EXT-37 FENDER PROTECTOR < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REAR WHEEL HOUSE PROTECTOR : Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove rear fillet molding. Refer to EXT-33. "REAR FILLET MOLDIN( 2. Remove sill cover fixing clip @ of rear wheel house protector front side, faland Installation’. 3. Remove rear wheel house protector fixing clips of rear wheel house protector back side 4. Remove rear wheel house protector mounting bolt @ of rear bumper fascia lower side <2 = Vehicle front 5. Remove rear wheel house protector fixing clips, and then remove rear wheel house protector. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal EXT-38 FLOOR SIDE FAIRING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FLOOR SIDE FAIRING ENGINE UNDER COVER ENGINE UNDER COVER : Exploded View WITH R9M ENGINE MODELS \ i Vo oly ® Engine under cover WITHOUT R9M ENGINE MODELS EXT-39 FLOOR SIDE FAIRING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > ‘SEC. 747 ® Engine under cover ENGINE UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation roe wrcroreness REMOVAL Remove engine under cover fixing clips, and then remove engine under cover. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR UNDER COVER EXT-40 FLOOR SIDE FAIRING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > FLOOR UNDER COVER : Exploded View aro ionenarrs6 SEC. 747, ® Floor under cover RH © Sering push nut @ Floor under cover LH FLOOR UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation REMOVAL Remove floor under cover fixing clips and spring push nut, and then remove floor under cover. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. EXT-41 ROOF RAIL < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > ROOF RAIL Expieded View SEC. 730 x Phssis.10 | Phrsc4.19) __ : [ — T il oO oe ! | i — a i 1 | if = = Za \ > LEANN ~A NN ® Front roof rail cover @ Fook ra? ® Back door hinge cover @ Rear root ral cover, 1 em fp, to) Removal and Installation REMOVAL EXT-42 ® Root side molding ROOF RAIL < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Apply protective tapes (A) on body to protect the painted surface from damage. 2. Disengage front roof rail cover fixing pawis using a remover tool A). 2 Paul 3. Remove front roof rail cover according to the numerical ord 1-32 as shown in the figure. <2 Vehicle front 4. Apply protective tapes (A) on body to protect the painted surface from damage. 5. Disengage rear roof rail cover fixing pawis using a remover tool (A). Pawi EXT-43 < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 6. Remove rear roof rail cover according to ‘tie tiumerical order 132 as shown in the figure. <2 Vehicle front 7. Remove roof rail mounting bolts, and then remove roof rail INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. EXT-44 tee Qigua, ROOF SIDE MOLDING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > ROOF SIDE MOLDING Exploded View vevonanaei WITH ROOF RAIL SEC. 730 @ Root ral assembly @® Root side molding ® Rook side molding clip ® Back door hinge cover ©) see 6&4: Aways replace after every disassembly WITHOUT ROOF RAIL. ROOF SIDE MOLDING ‘SEC. 730 @ Root side molding cover @ Root side moicing @® Root side molding clip, ® Front roof side bracket © Rear root side bracket ® Back doorhinge cover Olle Ey iPam 2p + Aays replace after every disassembly Removal and Installation nraswamcoaroett REMOVAL 1, Remove roof rail, Refer to EXT-42, "Removal and Installation". (with roof rail) 2. Apply protective tape (A) on around the back door hinge cover @ to protect it from damage. EXT-46 ROOF SIDE MOLDING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove back door hinge cover fixing clip © using @ remover tool (A). 4. Disengage back door hinge cover fixing pawl, and then while ‘escape part ® of back door hinge cover according to numerical order 132 as shown in the figure, pull up back door hinge cover. Paw! 5. Remive'Back door hinge cover as shown by the arrow in the fig- ure. 6. Apply protective tape (A) on the part to protect it from damage. <2 Vehicle front 7. Disengage roof side molding fixing clip using a remover tool (A), and then remove roof side molding, Clip EXT-47 ROOF SIDE MOLDING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 8. Remove front roof side bracket mounting bolts, and then remove front roof side bracket. (without roof rail) 8. Remove rear roof side bracket mounting bolts, and then remove rear roof side bracket. (without roof rail) 10. Remove roof side molding clip. NOTE: Grind the head of rivet @ with a drill (B) [bit of 64.7 — 4.9 mm (00.185 - 0.193 in)] INSTALLATION Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Securely crimp roof side molding extension with a hand riveter (A). Roof side molding 95.0 65.4 mm (00.197 ~ 90.243 in) Used rivethead diameter | _ 46.6 mm (90.256 in) Prepared hole diameter EXT-48 DOOR SASH MOLDING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > DOOR SASH MOLDING Exploded View wocownciroorerees SEC. 800+820 @ Front door sash mong @ Rear door sash molcing @ Front doer panel @® esr door pane 2. Remove front door glass run upper side. Refer to Installation”. 3. Remove front door weather-strip upper side, Refer to LK Installation”. 4, Remove front door sash molding fixing screw @ of front door sash molding front side. 5. Apply protective tapes (A) on body to protact the painted surface from damage. 6. Insert a remover tool (A) between front door panel and front door sash molding, and then disengage front door sash molding as shown by the arrows in the figure. CAUTION: Never use a material for remover tool which could damage door panel. 7. Remove front door sash molding. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal REAR DOOR SASH MOLDING REAR DOOR SASH MOLDING : Removal and Installation snrooceswarearDe REMOVAL 1. Fully open rear door glass. 2. Remove rear door glass run upper side. Refer to GW-55. "REAI R_GLASS RUN © Removal an Aostallation”. 3. Remove rear door weather-strip upper side. Refer to DLK-287, ‘DOOR WEATHER-STRIP Removal and Installation’. 4. Insert a remover tool to rear door sash molding center portion, and then disengage with rear door panel and slide the rear and front of the vehicle, and then remove rear door sash mokding INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal, EXT-50 DOOR SASH TAPE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > DOOR SASH TAPE Exploded View wocownirooreres ‘SEC. 800820 re (5p Always replace after every disassembly FRONT DOOR SASH TAPE FRONT DOOR SASH TAPE : Removal and Installation oeeomccrooriats REMOVAL CAUTION: Never damage painted surface of front door panel. 1, Remove front door sash molding. Refer to EXT-49. "FRONT DOOR SASH MOLDING | Removal and installation’. 2. Heat front door sash tape surface using a dryer, and then peel front door sash tape. INSTALLATION E: Refer to the figure for front door sash tape position and overlap distance between the front door sash tape EXT-51 DOOR SASH TAPE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > ® Front doar panel @® Front door sash tape @ Rend <3 Vehicle front B 3.5 mm (0.138 in) © 3.5mm (0.138 in) CAUTION: + Degrease front door panel mounting surface for front door sash tape. + Paint grain or dust on mounting surface of front door sash tape may spoil exterior appearance if it remains. Clean the mounting surface and check that no paint grain or dust remains, before starting the operation. + Never reuse front door sash tape. 1. Affix front door sash tape @ to front door panel @ by applying pressure using a squeegee (A) while peel- ing off release coated paper ©. o_ o—/ NOTE: + Peel release coated paper at distance of 10 20 mm (0.384 — 0.787 in) ahead (B) of squeegee and affix front door sash tape. + To prevent any bubbles from forming, slightly lif the portion, not yet affixed using squeegee. so that por- tion dose not contact with panel surface. * Apply pressure and affix at a low and constant speed using squeegee tilted at 40 - 50° angle (pushing direction) (C) or 30 ~ 45° angle (pulling direction) (D) EXT-52 DOOR SASH TAPE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 2 For small radius portion of hemming part, gradually apply pres- sure and affix front door sash tape @ using squeegee (A) in j 4 4-3 steps. id 2 CAUTION: Never wash the vehicle with in 24 hours so as to keep adhe- sive. REAR DOOR SASH TAPE REAR DOOR SASH TAPE : Removal and Installation nea cwnenoaris REMOVAL CAUTION: Never damage painted surface of rear door panel. 1. Remove rear door glass. Refer to GVV-51, "REAR DOOR GLASS : Removal and Installation’. 2. Remove rear door sash molding. Refer to EXT-S0. "REAR DOOR SASH MOLDING - Removal and instal tation’. 3, Remove rear door outside molding. Refer to EXT-56, "REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING : Removal and {ostallation”. 4, Heat rear door sash tape surface using a dryer, and then peel rear door sash tape. INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the figure for rear door sash tape position and overlap distance the rear door sash tape. ® Rear door panel ® Rear door sash tape front @ Rear door sash tape rear EXT-53 DOOR SASH TAPE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > ® Rend <2 * Vehicle front © 3.0mm (0.118 in) D 3.5mm (0.138 in) E 3.5mm (0.138 in) F 3.0. mm (0.118 in) CAUTION * Degrease rear door panel mounting surface for rear door sash tape. + Paint grain or dust on mounting surface of rear door sash tape may spoil exterior appearance if it remains. Clean the mounting surface and check that no paint grain or dust remains, before starting the operation. + Never reuse rear door sash tape. 1. Affix rear door sash tape @ to rear door panel @ by applying pressure using a squeegee (A) while peeling off release coated paper @, re 4 & . NOTE: + Peel release coated paper at distance of 10 - 20 mm (0,394 —0.787 in) ahead (B) of squeegee and affix rear door sash tape. + To prevent any bubbles from forming, slightly lit the portion, not yet affixed using squeegee, so that por- tion dose not contact with panel surface. + Apply pressure and affix at a low and constant speed using squeegee tilted at 40 ~ 50° angle (pushing direction) (C) or 30 — 45° angle (pulling direction) (D) 2. For small radius portion of hemming part, gradually apply pres- sure and affix rear door sash tape @ using squeegee (A) in 13 steps. CAUTION: Never wash the vehicle with in 24 hours so as to keep adhe- sive. — EXT-54 DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING Exploded View ‘SEC. 600+820 ® Rear door panel ® Front door panel @ Front door outside molding @ Rear door outside molding Ay: Paw

2. Apply protective tape (A) on the part to protect it from damage. 3. Disengage rear end of front door outside molding fixing paw! using remover tool (A) and (B). CAUTION: Never lift front door outside molding with excessive force to prevent damage to the part. Paw! 4. Twist front door outside molding toward the direction of the arrow in the figure, and then lift up and remove it. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal, REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING : Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove rear door glass. Refer to GW-51 "REAR 2. Apply protective tape (A) on the part to protect it from damage. EXT-56 DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > ‘3 Disengage fixing paw! of rear door outside molding front and rear end, using remover tool (A) and (B). CAUTION: Never lift rear door outside molding with excessive force to prevent damage to the part. Paw 4. Twist rear door outside molding toward the direction of the arrow inthe figure, and then lift up and remove it, INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. EXT-57 SIDE GUARD MOLDING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SIDE GUARD MOLDING Exploded View SEC. 768 oo Yo @ Front door panel @® Front side guard molding @ Rear side guard molding Double-sied tape a Sener ie ® pwramm(o.oe7iny 1p <2. Vehicle rat 24 Always repiace after every disassembly FRONT SIDE GUARD MOLDING FRONT SIDE GUARD MOLDING : Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: EXT-58 SIDE GUARD MOLDING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Never damage the front door panel. 1. Apply a protective tape (A) on the door panel to protect the painted surface from damage. 2. Cut double-sided tape using a cutter (A) 3. Disengage front side guard molding fixing clips using a remover {00} (A), and then remove front side quard molding, © clo INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: + Always replace double-sided tape with a new one, if front side guard molding is reused. + Remove double-sided tape remaining on front door panel and back of front side guard molding with a double-sided tape remover, after removing front side guard molding. + When installing front side guard molding, visually check the clips, then replace them with new parts if they are damaged. + When installing front side guard molding, check that clips are securely in door panel holes, and press them in. + Never wash the vehicle within 24 hours after installing so as to keep adhesive. REAR SIDE GUARD MOLDING REAR SIDE GUARD MOLDING : Removal and Installation eco onaneesorener) REMOVAL CAUTION: Never damage the rear door panel. EXT-59 SIDE GUARD MOLDING < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Apply a protective tape (A) on the door panel to protect the painted surface from damage. 2. Cut double-sided tape using a cutter (A). 3. Disengage rear side guard molding fixing clips using a remover tool (A), and then remove rear side guard molding. INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: * Always replace double-sided tape with a new one, if rear side guard molding is reused, + Remove double-sided tape remaining on rear door panel and back of rear side guard molding with a double-sided tape remover, after removing rear side guard molding. + When installing rear side guard molding, visually check the clips, then replace them with new parts if they are damaged. + When installing rear side guard molding, check that clips are securely in door panel holes, and press them in. + Never wash the vehicle within 24 hours after installing so as to keep adhesive. EXT-60 SILL COVER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > SILL COVER . Exploded View rvonenarsr SEC. 767 Je @ Sitcover @ Grommet ©) Cp << Veil rent EXT-61 SILL COVER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Removal and Installation oo commoners REMOVAL 1, Remove front filet molding. Refer to EXT-32, "FRONT FILLET MOLDII al and installation”. 2. Remove rear fillet molding. Refer to EXT-33 "REAR F| IG 3. Remove sill cover fixing screws @ of sill cover front side. ) \ \t J \ [ 4, Remove sill cover fixing clip @ of sill cover back side. 5. Remove sill cover mounting bolts of sill cover lower side. 6. Apply protective tape (A) on body to protect the painted surface from damage. <5 Vehicle tront EXT-62 SILL COVER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7. Disengage sill cover fixing clips, using @ remover tool (A), and then remove sill cover Ny etn <3 Vehicle front INSTALLATION Note the following items, install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION + When installing sill cover, visually check the clips, then replace them with new parts if they are dam- aged. ‘+ When installing sill cover, check that clips are securely in door panel holes, and press them in. EXT-63 REAR SPOILER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > REAR SPOILER Exploded View eco cewenrereere SEC. 960 @ Rear spoiler LH @ Rear spoiler RH lp Removal and Installation nrooeeomanseroaT REMOVAL 1, Fully open back door. 2. Remove rear spoiler mounting bolts @. EXT-64 REAR SPOILER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Apply protective tapes (A) on body to protect the painted surface from damage. 4, Disengage rear spoiler fixing clips using a remover tool (A) according to the numerical order 1-3 as shown in the figure, and then remove rear spoiler. ote INSTALLATION Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: + Never damage the body panel. + When installing rear spoiler, visually check the rear spoiler and the cli parts if they are damaged. + When installing rear spoiler, check that clips are securely in body panel holes, and press them in. , then replace them with new EXT-65 BACK DOOR FINISHER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > BACK DOOR FINISHER Exploded View ‘SEC. 251-253-266-280-000 Rear camerafRear view camera (ifequipped) ee } +lp Paw Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove back door inner finisher. Refer to 2. Remove cap cover @. Hands free sensor © Back door fisher cap @ Back oor opener switch assembly @_ License pate lamp © Back door finisher 7_ "Removal and instaltatian' EXT-66 BACK DOOR FINISHER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3, Remove back door finisher mounting nuts 4. Apply protective tape (A) on body to protect the painted surface from damage. 5. Disengage back door finisher fixing clips using a remover tool (A), and then remove back door finisher. 2 Gi INSTALLATION fm Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: + Never damage the back door panel. + When installing back door finisher, visually check the back door finisher and the olips, then replace them with new parts if they are damaged. + When installing back door finisher, check that clips are securely in back door panel holes, and press them in. EXT-67 TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE SECTION FRONT AXLE CONTENTS PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- SIONER" 3 Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- tion After Battery Disconnect Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal Precautions for Drive Shaft PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool Commercial Service Tool Lubricant orfand Sealant SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING .. NVH Troubleshooting Chart a PERIODIC MAINTENANCE FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE Inspection FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Inspection REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE «.jnscautt Exploded View 1" Removal and Installation 1" Inspection 6 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT 6 8 8 7 MR20DD errs MR20DD ° Expladed View MR20DD : Removal and Installation MR20D0 : Inspection ROM ROM : Exploded View ROM : Removal and Installation ROM : Inspection 7 19 25 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT . MR20DD errsessensstsnansnnnnnnne MR20DD Exploded View MR20DD : Removal and installation MR20D0 : Disassembly and Assembly MR20DD : Inspection ROM sntsneseunmenenimnsnenmnannnsensennnennnnAT ROM : Exploded View 48 ROM : Removal and Installation 50 ROM : Disassembly and Assembly 56 ROM : Inspection 60 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (sD8) .. SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Whet Drive Shaft 162 4WD PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- SIONE! 64 Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- tion After Battery Disconnect 64 Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal 65 FAX-1 Precautions for Drive Shaft 68 PREPARATION .. PREPARATION Special Service Tool ‘Commercial Service Tool Lubricant orfand Sealant SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PERIODIC MAINTENANCE FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE .. Inspection FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Inspection REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .. FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE ..sssuu 72 Exploded View 2 Removal and Installation R Inspection 7 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT .. 78 jew 78 MR20DD | Removal and Installation 79 MR20DD : Inspection QR25DE ‘QR25DE ; Exploded View QR25DE | Removal and Installation QR25DE : Inspection ROM... ROM - Exploded View REM. Removal and Installation ROM: Inspection FRONT DRIVE SHAFT csscsssnsnentsnenesenees 400 ‘MR20DD MR20DD MR20DD MR200D MR20DD QR25DE ‘QR2501 QR25DE QR25DE QR25DE ROM ROM ROM ROM ROM Base See Exploded View Removal and installation tot Disassembly and Assembly Inspection m1 Removal and Installation Disassembly and Assembly inspection Expioded View Removal and installation Disassembly and Assembly 131 Inspection ‘SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS se 1 (SDS) .. SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDs) Wheel Bearing Drive Shaft FAX-2 PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > [wo] PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" eron mance The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG" and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG" and “SEAT BELT" of this Service Manual WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. + To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSANJINFINITI dealer. + Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. + Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser- vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. + When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the fn ON oF ene |, Never use ait of electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer, Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. + When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect CAUTION: ‘Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction. + Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the ignition power source and accessory power source to the OFF, then disconnect both battery cables, + After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect both battery cables. + Always use CONSULT to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work. If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results. For vehicle with steering lock unit, ifthe battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and cannot be tumed, If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro- cedure below before starting the repair operation OPERATION PROCEDURE 1, Connect both battery cables. NOTE: ‘Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged, 2, Open driver door, 3, Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (At this time, the steering lock will be released.) 4, Turn the ignition switch to OFF position with driver door open. 5, Wait for 3 minutes or longer with driver door open. NOTE: + Do not close driver door because the steering wheel locks when driver door is closed. FAX-3 PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > [2wo] * The auto ace function is adapted to this vehicle. For this reason, even when the ignition switch is tumed to OFF position, the accessory power source does not turned OFF and continues to be supplied for a certain amount of time. 6. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon- ected and the steering wheel can be turned. 7. Perform the necessary repair operation 8. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn the ignition switch from OFF position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock ‘when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.) 9. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT. Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal aaprainnat + With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. in addition, ACC power is supplied even after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time, + When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC \ EZ) po power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing “How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below. NOTE: Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC detection or ECU data damage may occur. For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat- tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch, NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC. NOTE: The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error. HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below. For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF. refer to Instruction 2. INSTRUCTION 1 1. Open the hood. 2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened 3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. 4 Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse of the specified time, 4D engine = 20 minutes HRA2DDT 12 minutos Kok engine <4 minutes MGR engine = 4 minutes Roll engine =A minutes Vox engine 4 minutos CAUTION: While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. 5, Remove 12V battery terminal CAUTION: After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF) 1, Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry. FAX-4, PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > [2wo] NOTE: Al this moment, ACC power is supplied. Open the driver side door Open the hood, Close the driver side door. Wait at least 3 minutes. CAUTION: While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. 6. Remove 12V battory terminal. CAUTION: After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. Precautions for Drive Shaft ro eonosnmact4 waen CAUTION: Note the following precautions when disassembling and assembling drive shaft. + Joint sub-assembly does not disassemble because it is non-overhaul parts. + Perform work in a dust-free location. + Before disassembling and assembling, clean the parts. + Prevent the entry of foreign objects during disassembly of the service location. + Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be placed over parts. + Paper waste must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adher- ing to parts. + Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with kerosene which shall be removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper waste. FAX-5 PREPARATION < PREPARATION > [ewo] PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool roe conwecoromtt Tool umber ] Tool name vao704000 Removing and Instaling wheel hub lock nut Hub lack nut wrench | 2: B5 mm (3.38 in) Description b asm 26) “evanto7300 ] ttn oatbone Beat band pinot | wvavio750 | Remora ave shat Dive shaft attachment | ievser07800 Pratector 232mm (1.28 in) da, Tnstaling dive shaft Commercial Service Tool ‘nroconrrcra? Tool name Desenpton Dive shat puller ] Rarioving dive chat oink sub Sasarbly &6 FAX-6 PREPARATION < PREPARATION > [2wo) ‘Siang ammer Removing drive shat Ball oint remover Removing hub bolt QB —__# = FAX A A a Removing and instaling steering knuckle and strut assembly —— SSS ‘A: 16 ~ 32 mm (0.63 -1.26 in) Chisel 8: 10mm (0.39 in) or more al] Is | c 40-70mm (1.87 -278 in) L 1: 220 mm (7.87 in) ores S:t4mm (055 in) ormore Lubricant or/and Sealant Name Fil NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent ‘Apply paste [service parts 440037S000)) FAX-7 Desciston ~ Joint sub-assembly inside + Housing inside + Joint sub-assembly NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart aemmes Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. ole a illest g Blels ele Elele las BS B/S )e als Reterence | \ Ze /2 |S] /3 |e /5 z\s|E|2/2 |Z |= i Hle 2/5/52 |2 z\2 2 fl LE § : 5 2 £ 3 és Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS ele| |£| |slé bial ig). leis Ble] lelelziele| jee el2islelelslzi2) |2]a|,, |g aye la lee eles ele le lg la BElE(2 (R/£ (2 (2/2 [2 [8 [8 [5 pave [Nese BE =] = =l=[ =] [=] sHarT —_[sreke fah ojala bel =e) eel els Weise =Te=t=t et) ane Shake xtx[ p=] =) = Pete rout | Warton ze ell beh ber 1s AXLE: ‘Shimmy x [x x x] x xx “baer x EE x oor ally nde orhanding xLeL pL bebe hepatic FAX-8 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [wo] PERIODIC MAINTENANCE FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE Inspection COMPONENT PART Make sure that the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions (wear, damage) are normal, WHEEL HUB ASSEMBLY (BEARING-INTEGRATED TYPE) Check the folowing kets, and replace the pat nscesary Za + Move wheel hub and bearing assembly in the axial direction by hand. Check there is no looseness of wheel bearing. Axial end play + Refer to FAX-62, “Wheel Bearing”. + Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other iegular conditions. If there is any of iegular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. FAX-9 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [2wo] FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Inspection FRONT DRIVE SHAFT INSPECTION Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary. * Check drive shaft mounting point and joint for looseness and other damage. CAUTION: Replace entire drive shaft assembly when noise or vibration occur from drive shaft. + Check boo! for cracks and other damage. FAX-10 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE Exploded View roeownero nears SEC. 400 BOM o0 192,00 @ Sieering knuckle @ Splash guar @ uv bot @® Wheet hub and bearing assembly @ Disc otor © Wheel hub took nut @ Adjusting cap ® Cotter pin Nim thom, ta) (24: Always replace ater every sisassemby Removal and Installation wroweenecoranesis REMOVAL 1. Remove tires. Refer to WWT-61. "Removal and Installation”. 2. Remove front wheel sensor from steering kunckle. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR Removal and instalation” 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. * LHD: Refer to BR-24. "FRONT: Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to BREA "FRONT Exploded View" FAX-11 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] 4. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) | Removal and installation’. + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and installation’. + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111," PI yu and installation”. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116." and Installation’, CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 5. Remove disc rotor. CAUTION: + Put matching marks @ on the wheel hub and bearing assembly and the disc rotor before removing the disc rotor. + Never drop disc rotor. 6. Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000) 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NOTE: Use suitable puller, if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure, 8, Remove wheel hub lock nut. 9. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly 10. Remove splash guard. 11, Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to FSU-17, "Removal and Installation’ 12. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-22, "Removal and Installation’. 13. Separate the connection of strut assembly and steering knuckle as follows. CAUTION: FAX-12 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo) Be sure to keep the following procedure because steering knuckle may be damaged when you enlarge the gap of steering knuckle too much. ‘a. Remove strut mounting bolts from steering knuckle. b. Measure the gap (A) of the steering knuckle. And then mark the enlarged limit (B) to the chisel © Merking Enlarged limit (B) = gap (A) + 2.5 mm (0.098 in) NOTE: Standard of gap: 6.9 + 0.5 mm (2.56 + 0.02 in) c._ Enlarge the gap of the steering knuckle with the chisel (A) (com- mercial service tool) not to surpass a limit as shown in the figure. CAUTION: + Never enlarge the gap more than 2.5mm (0.098in). + Be careful not to damage the projection @ and strut assembly @ with the chisel. G. Separate the connection of strut assembly and steering knuckle CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. + Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the other parts, + Be sure to remove lubricants if lubricant has been used to separate the connection of strut assembly and steering knuckle. FAX-13 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KN! < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > JUCKLE [2wo} 14. Remove hub bolts @ from wheel hub and bearing assembly, using the ball joint remover (A) (commercial service tool). CAUTION: + Remove hub bolt only when necessary. + Never hammer the hub bolt to avoid impact to the wheel hub and bearing assembly. + Pull out the hub bolt in a direction perpendicular to the wheel hub and bearing assembly. 15. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to FAX-16, "Inspection", INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of the removal Hub Bolts + Place a washer ® as shown in the figure to install the hub bolts by using the tightening force of the nut ®. CAUTION: + Check that there is no clearance between wheel hub and bearing assembly, and hub bolt. + Never reuse hub bolt. Drive shaft + Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub an: CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. + Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bear- ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)) to surface @ of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft, CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste = 4.03.0. (0.04-0.10 oz) \d bearing assembly. CAUTION: Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to FAX-11. "Exoloded View" + Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. FAX-14 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] + When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles. CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. Disc rotor CAUTION: + Align the matching marks @ made during removal when reus- ing the disc rotor. + Never drop disc rotor. Strut Assembly and Steering Knuckle Connection CAUTION: Be sure to remove lubricants if lubricant has been used to separate the connection of strut assembly and steering knuckle. + Install the steering knuckle to strut assembly as follows. 1. Set suitable jack under steering knuckle. 2. Align the gap @ of steering knuckle to the projection part @ of strut. 3. Tighten the mounting bolt with pushing up the steering knuckle © until contacts stopper bracket @) end face, using @ suitable jack ‘CAUTION: Check the stable condition when using a jack. + Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-16, “inspection”. FAX-15 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] Inspection nronemmnm ened INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary. + Check components for deformation, cracks, and other damage. + Check boots of transverse link and steering outer socket ball joint for breakage, axial end play, and swing torque. ~ Transverse link: Refer to ESU-18. “Inspection”. ~ Steering outer socket: Refer to ST-26.." INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1, Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". 2. Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-8, “Inspection”. 3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-99, "Work Procedure". FAX-16 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT MR20DD MR20DD : Exploded View arooanmacrrat LEFT SIDE (SEC. 391 ® Chrevtar clip ® dust shieta @ Housing ® Snap ring © Spider assembly © Stopper ring @ Boot band ® Boot @ Shaft @ Damper band @® Dynamic damper @® Joint sub-assembly @ Dustshieis <3: Wheel side 1: Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent. 2: Apply paste farce pats (4400875000)] (29: Always replace ater every isassembsy FAX-17 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > = RIGHT SIDE (CVT) [2wo) SEC.391 Pes (29,35) Pys8 4.9, 05) @ 1A, 98> 6 YG, oo 2 po 2 8 @ Spider assembly @® Snap ring @ 8 ee & em ® oe sna @ see IEG 1: FIINISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent Aoply paste [service parts (440037S000)} BL nm team, to) (£9: Aways replace ater every sisassembly FAX-18 Circular clip Shaft Stopper ring Housing Retainer FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo) RIGHT SIDE (MT) [sec.s91 Fae (a.9, 25) Dust shield Boot band Damper band ® Spider assembly @ Dust shield @ ee ‘Support bearing bracket Wheel sige §@GO969 Joint sub-assembly Boot ‘Dynamic damper ‘Snap ring ‘Support bearing EGB 1: Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent. PA Nim thom, te) (24 Always replace ater every sisassombly Apply paste [service parts (4400378000) MR20DD : Removal and Installation REMOVAL Wheel Side 1, Remove tires. Refer to Circular ap ‘hat ‘Stopper ring Housing Retainer WI-61. "Removal and Installation”. 2, Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal s FAX-19 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24. "FRONT - Exploded View", + RHD: Refer to BR-88. "FRONT ; Exploded View" 4. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMI ‘ON TYPE} | Re : + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBL\ a E) : Removal and Installation” + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON ov and Installation”. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116."" lation", CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation’. 6. Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000), 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NoTt Use suitable puller if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure. 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut 9. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to ESU-17, "Removal 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle, Refer to S1-22. "Removal and Installation’. FAX-20 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 71. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12. Remove boot bands, and then separate boot from joint sub-assembly. 43. Screw drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service tool) into joint sub-assembly screw part to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assem- bly from shaft ‘CAUTION: * Align sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them by pulling directory. + If joint sub-assembly cannot be pulled out, try after removing drive shaft from vehicle. Refer to FAX-42, 14, Remove circular clip @ from shaft 15. Remove boot from shaft Transaxle Side Remove boot after removing drive shatt + Remove: Refer to FAX-36_"MR20DD _ Removal and installation”. * Disassembly: Refer to FAX-42. "MR200D | Disassembly and Assembly’. INSTALLATION Wheel Side 1. Clean the old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper waste. 2. Fill serration slot joint sub-assembly @ with NISSAN genuine grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball groove become full to the brim ‘CAUTION: After applying grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has aozed out. FAX-21 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] 3. Install boot and boot bands to shaft. CAUTION: + Never reuse boot and boot band. + Wrap serration on shaft with tape @ to protect the boot from damage. 4. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft 5. Position the circular clip © on groove at the shaft edge. CAUTION: Never reuse circular clip. NOTE: Drive joint inserter is recommended when installing circular clip @. 6. Align both center axles of the shaft edge and joint sub-assembly, Then assemble shaft with joint sub- assembly holding circular clip. 7. Install joint sub-assembly @ to shaff using plastic hammer. CAUTION: * Check circular clip is properly positioned on groove of the joint sub-assembly. + Confirm that joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged while rotating drive shaft. 8. Fill into the boot inside with the specified amount of grease from large diameter side of boot, Grease amount __; Refer to FAX-62, “Drive Shaft”. FAX-22 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT <= REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > wo] 9. Install the boot securely into grooves (indicated by” marks) shown in the figure ‘CAUTION If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated * by “*” mark) on the shaft or joint subassembly. boot may be removed. Remove all grease from the boot mounting sur- face. 10,,To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installa- tion length (L) to the specified value shown below by inserting the Suitable too! into the inside of the boot from the large diame- S {er sidé of the boot and discharging the inside air ry L + Refer to FAX-62, “Drive Shaft”. CAUTION: + If the boot mounting length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in the boot. + Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with a tip of tool. 11. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with boot bands using the boot band crimping tool (A) (SST: KV40107300), CAUTION: Never reuse boot band. NOTE: ‘Secure boot band so that dimension (M) meets the specification as shown in the figure. M :1,0- 4,0 mm (0.039 - 0.187 in) 12, Check that displacement does not occur when boot is rotated with the joint sub-assembly and shaft fixed. CAUTION: + Reinstall them using boot bands when boot installation positions become incorrect. + Never reuse boot band. 13, Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. FAX-23 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo) 14, Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bearing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface ® of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assem- bly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 1.0 - 3.09 (0.04- 0.10 02) 15. Insert drive shaft to wheel hub and bearing assembly, and then temporarily tighten wheel hub lock nut. CAUTION: + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. 16. Install transverse link to steering knuckle and front suspention member. Refer to FSU-17, "Exploded ey 17. Install steering outer socket to steering knuckle. + LHD: Refer to ST-20, "LHD | Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to ST-21, "RHD : Exploded View! 18. Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to FAX-11, "Exploded View" CAUTION: + Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. 19. When installing a cotter pin @® and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles, CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. 20. Install disc rotor. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation”. 21. Install caliper assembly to steering knuckle. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 Pi and Installation". + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal . and installation”. + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR- and Installation’. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56."t q and Installation”. 22. Install lock plate to strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24, "FRONT ; Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to BR-88, "FRONT : Exploded View", 23. Install wheel sensor to steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR | Removal and 5 24. Install tires to vehicle. Refer to W1-61, "Removal and installation". 25. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX.25, "MR20DD : Inspection". Transaxle Side * Installation: Refer to FAX-36, "MR20DD ; Removal and installation" FAX-24 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2w0) ~ Assembly: Refer to FAX-42, "MIR2ODD _ Disassembly and Assembly MR20DD : Inspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary. + Check components for deformation, cracks, and other damage. + Check boots of transverse link and steering outer socket ball joint for breakage, axial torque. ~ Transverse link: Refer to FSU-18. "Inspection’. ~ Steering outer socket: Refer to ST-26. “inspection”. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 4, Check wheel Exploded View". 2. Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-8, "Inspection! 3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-99, "Work Procedure" ROM R9M : Exploded View end play, and swing 'sor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR LEFT SIDE oon P — = a6 a, Ray _Pe = ZA pad — (90 / / S ® & hoe Je x] oe © Craterip © Denson @ Hors @ site © Spier seat © Stepper ting ey poate es o oa 39 ange a GF esis © Bin wean 1 het sice 1: Fl NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent. 2: Apply paste [service parts (4400375000) (29: Aways replace ater every dsassemby FAX-25 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo) @ ® @ @ @ @ a RIGHT SIDE (CVT) SEC. 391 Gig P2502 6,10) A yo Mow Dust shield Boot band Damper band Spider assembly Dust shila Support bearing bracket Wheel side @SSOe8 Joint sub-assembly ® Cireuier clip Boot ® shat Dynamic damper ® Stopper ring Snap ring ® Housing Support bearing ® Retainer Heat insulator IEG 1: FIINISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent BL nm team, to) (£9: Aways replace ater every sisassembly Aoply paste [service parts (440037S000)} FAX-26 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] RIGHT SIDE (MMT) ‘SEC. 391 TPss0 28,18) , a Pieos.s9 Fisvesiw oe Z ay Sy 8 \ @ Dust shieid @ Joint sub-assembly @ Circular ip @ Boot band @ Boot @ shat ® Stopper ting ® Spider assembly @ Snap rng ® Housing @ Dust shiets ® Support bearing @ Retainer @ Support bearing bracket @ Heatinsulator <3: Wheel side + FI NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent 2: Apply paste [service parts (440087000), Fn kam, toby (Always repace ater every aisassembiy R9M : Removal and Installation aro coor ores REMOVAL Whee! Side 1, Remove tires. Refer to WWI-61. “Removal and Installation”. 2. Remove wheel nsor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR Removal FAX-27 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24. "FRONT - Exploded View", + RHD: Refer to BR-88. "FRONT ; Exploded View" 4. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMI ‘ON TYPE} | Re : + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBL\ a E) : Removal and Installation” + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON ov and Installation”. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116."" lation", CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation’. 6. Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000), 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NoTt Use suitable puller if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure. 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut 9. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to ESU-17, "Removal 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle, Refer to S1-22. "Removal and Installation’. FAX-28 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 71. Remove drive shaft rom wheel hub and bearing assembly CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12. Remove boot bands, and then separate boot from joint sub-assembly. 43. Screw drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service too!) into joint sub-assembly screw part to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assem- bly from shaft ‘CAUTION: + Align sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them by pulling directory. + If joint sub-assembly cannot be pulled out, try after removing drive shaft from vehicle. Refer to FAX-55, "R9M : Disassembly and Assembly". 14, Remove circular clip @ from shaft. 15. Remove boot from shaft Transaxle Side Remove boot after removing drive shaft. + Remove: Refer to FAX.50_"R9M - Removal and Installation”. * Disassembly: Refer to FAX-56. "ROM : Disassembly and Assembly" INSTALLATION Wheel Side 1, Clean the old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper waste. 2. Fill serration slot joint sub-assembly @ with NISSAN genuine grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball groove become full to the brim CAUTION: After applying grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has aozed out. FAX-29 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] 3. Install boot and boot bands to shaft. CAUTION: + Never reuse boot and boot band. + Wrap serration on shaft with tape @ to protect the boot from damage. 4. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft 5. Position the circular clip © on groove at the shaft edge. CAUTION: Never reuse circular clip. NOTE: Drive joint inserter is recommended when installing circular clip @. 6. Align both center axles of the shaft edge and joint sub-assembly, Then assemble shaft with joint sub- assembly holding circular clip. 7. Install joint sub-assembly @ to shaff using plastic hammer. CAUTION: * Check circular clip is properly positioned on groove of the joint sub-assembly. + Confirm that joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged while rotating drive shaft. 8. Fill into the boot inside with the specified amount of grease from large diameter side of boot, Grease amount _; Refer to FAX-62, “Drive Shaft”. FAX-30 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT <= REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > wo] 9. Install the boot securely into grooves (indicated by” marks) shown in the figure ‘CAUTION If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated * by “*” mark) on the shaft or joint subassembly. boot may be removed. Remove all grease from the boot mounting sur- face. 10,,To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installa- tion length (L) to the specified value shown below by inserting the Suitable too! into the inside of the boot from the large diame- S {er sidé of the boot and discharging the inside air ry L + Refer to FAX-62, “Drive Shaft”. CAUTION: + If the boot mounting length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in the boot. + Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with a tip of tool. 11. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with boot bands using the boot band crimping tool (A) (SST: KV40107300), CAUTION: Never reuse boot band. NOTE: ‘Secure boot band so that dimension (M) meets the specification as shown in the figure. M :1,0- 4,0 mm (0.039 - 0.187 in) 12, Check that displacement does not occur when boot is rotated with the joint sub-assembly and shaft fixed. CAUTION: + Reinstall them using boot bands when boot installation positions become incorrect. + Never reuse boot band. 13, Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. FAX-31 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo) 14, Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bearing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface ® of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assem- bly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 1.0- 3.09 (0.04-0.10 02) 15. Insert drive shaft to wheel hub and bearing assembly, and then temporarily tighten wheel hub lock nut. CAUTION: + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. 16. Install transverse link to steering knuckle and front suspention member. Refer to FSU-17, "Exploded ey 17. Install steering outer socket to steering knuckle. + LHD: Refer to ST-20, "LHD | Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to ST-21, "RHD : Exploded View! 18. Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to FAX-11, "Exploded View" CAUTION: + Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. 19. When installing a cotter pin @® and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles, CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. 20. Install disc rotor. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation”. 21. Install caliper assembly to steering knuckle. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 Pi and Installation". + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal . and installation”. + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR- and Installation’. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56."f q and Installation”. 22. Install lock plate to strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24, "FRONT : Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to BR-88, "FRONT : Exploded View", 23. Install wheel sensor to steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR | Removal and 5 24. Install tires to vehicle. Refer to W1-61, "Removal and installation". 25. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-33, "R9M - Inspection’. Transaxle Side + Installation: Refer to FAX-50. "ROM : Removal and Installation’ FAX-32 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [wo] * Assembly: Refer to FAX-56, "ROM : Disassembly and Assembly". ROM : Inspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the following items, and teplace the patt if necessary * Check components for deformation, cracks, and other damage. * Check boots of transverse link and steering outer socket ball joint for breakage, axial end play, and swing torque. - Transverse link: Refer to 3 ESU-18. “Inspection”. = Steering outer socket: Refer to ST:26, “Inspection” = INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1, Check wheel sensor hamess for proper connection. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ; Exploded View". 2. Cheok the whee! alignment. Refer to FSU-8, “Inspection” 3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to 8RC-99, "Work Procedure” FAX-33 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo) FRONT DRIVE SHAFT MR20DD MR20DD : Exploded View sroocommceeei? LEFT SIDE [SEC.391 nm ® o @ Cireviar ep @ Dust siela @ Housing @® Snap ring © Spider assembly @© Stopper ing @ Boot bane @ Boot @ Shaft @ Damper band ® Dynamic damper @® Joint sub-assembly @ Dust shiela Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent Apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] (29: Aways replace ater every cisassembly FAX-34 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo) RIGHT SIDE (CVT) ‘SEC.391 h Feo us,5 Phes i. 55) @ dustshieis © soint sub-assembly @ Circular ap @® Boot band © Boot @© shat @® Damper band ® dynamic damper © Sepper ting @ Spider assembly @ Snap sing ® Housing @® oustshieis @® Suppor nearing @ Retainer ® Suppor bearing bracket <3: Wheel side 1: Fil NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent HEEB 2 Apply paste [service parts (4400378000), Dh nm thom, ta) (29: Aiways replace ater every isassembsy FAX-35 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT [2wo) RIGHT SIDE (Mi) ‘sec.as1 hse 49,35) Pesce. « ; 1 @ @ Dust shits @® soint sub-assembly @ Croulr cp @ Bootband ® Boot @ shat @ Damperband ® Dynamic damper @® stopper rng @ Spider assembly @® Snap ring ® Housing @ Dust shield ® Support bearing @ Retainer {Support bearing bracket Whee! side HEEB: FIINISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent HEEB? Apaly paste (service parts (4400878000)} Lm gam, tio) (24: Aways replace after every disassembly MR20DD : Removal and Installation ero comwacoreeeser REMOVAL Lef Side 1. Remove tires. Refer to WW1-61. "Removal and \nstaliation”. 2, Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRO-212 “FRONT WHEEL SENSOR - Removal FAX-36 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24. "FRONT - Exploded View" + RHD: Refer to * ( 4, Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Rer and installation”. + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE Cal ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation”. + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE! H and installation”. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116. " t - CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation’. 6. Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000) 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NOTE: Use suitable puller, if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure. 8 Remove wheel hub lock nut. 9. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to £SU-17, "Removal and Installation” 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-22. "Removal and Installation”. FAX-37 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > "7. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12. Remove drive shaft from transaxle assembly. + Use the drive shaft attachment (A) (SST: KV40107500) and a sliding hammer (B) (commercial service tool) while inserting tip of the drive shaft attachment between housing and tran- saxle assembly. CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. + Confirm that the circular clip is attached to the drive shaft. Right Side 1. Remove tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation’. 2. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC- and Installation”. 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24, "FRONT ; Exploded View", + RHD: Refer to BR-88, "FRONT : Exploded View’. 4, Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51. [PER ASSEMBLY (1 PI TYPE) “ Removal and Installation’. + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal ‘and Installation’. + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111," and Installation’ + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56. " CALI and Installation’ CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 5. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-11_ "Removal and Installation’. FAX-38 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo} © Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000). 7, Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the ‘wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft. NOTE: Use suitable puller, if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure. 8. Remove whee! hub lock nut. 9. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to ESU-17, ‘Removal and Installation’. 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ‘11. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. ‘CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12. Remove retainer mounting bolts and retainer. 13. Remove drive shaft from transaxle assembly. + Use the drive shaft attachment (SST: KV40107500) and a sliding hammer while inserting tip of the drive shaft attachment between housing and transaxle assembly. CAUTION: Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. 14. If necessary, remove the support bearing bracket mounting bolts and the support bearing bracket, INSTALLATION Left Side Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: Always replace differential side oil seal with new one when installing drive shaft. + MIT: Refer to TM-38. “Removal and Installation”. + CVT: Refer to TM-429. "Removal and Installation”. FAX-39 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] * Place the protector (A) (SST: KV38107900) onto transaxle assem- bly to prevent damage to the differential side oil seal while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install securely. CAUTION: + Check that circular clip is completely engaged. + Never reuse differential side oil seal. Clean the matching surface of whee! hub lock nut and wheel hub an: CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. + Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bear- ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface @ of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 1.03.0 g (0.04-0.10 oz) CAUTION: + Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the ti hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. + When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles. CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to FAX-11. “Exploded View", tightening torque range for the wheel + Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-46, "MR20DD - Inspection" Right Side Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Always replace differential side oil seal with new one when installing drive shaft. + MIT: Refer to * CVT: Refer to TM-429. "Removal and Installation”. FAX-40 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > * Place the protector (A) (SST. KV38107900) onto transaxle assem- bly to prevent damage to the differential side oil seal while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install securely, ~ CAUTION: Never reuse differential side oil seal. + When installing support bearing bracket tighten the mounting bolt with the following procedure. CVT models ~ To install support bearing bracket @ and mounting bolts, tempo- rarily tighten the bolts before tightening to the specified torque, referring to the tightening method and the numerical order shown below: “Temporary tightening 142 Final tightening (Specified torque) 34 ~ Set plate @ so thet the notch part @ becomes upper side. CAUTION: Never reuse plate. ~ Temporarily tighten the bolts before tightening to the specified torque, referring to the tightening method and the numerical order shown below: ‘Temporary tightening 536 Final tightening (Specified torque) 738 (MIT models = To install support bearing bracket @ and mounting bolts, tempo- rary tighten the bolts before tightening to the specified torque, referring to the tightening method and the numerical order shown below: ‘Temporary tightening 192 Final tightening (Speciied torque) aaa Set plate @ so thet the notch part @ becomes upper side. CAUTION: Never reuse plate. = Temporarily tighten the bolts before tightening to the specified torque, referring to the tightening method and the numerical order shown below: “Temporary tightening 556 Final tightening (Specitied torque) 738 CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. FAX-41 Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub and bearing assembly. FRONT DRIVE SHAFT <= REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] * Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bear- ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface @) of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 1.0- 3.09 (0.04-0.10 02) Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to EAX-1 CAUTION: « Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. + When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles. CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. * Perform inspection after i MR20DD : Disassembly and Assembly nrowowwearonsce# DISASSEMBLY Transaxle Assembly Side 1. Fix shaft with a vise CAUTION: Protect shaft using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise. 2. Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from housing, Remove stopper ring, 4, Put matching marks on housing and shaft, and then pull out housing from shaft. CAUTION: Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Never scratch the surfaces. 5. Putmatching marks @ on the spider assembly and shaft CAUTION: Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Never scratch the surfaces. FAX-42 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 6. Remove snap ring @, and then remove spider assembly from shaft Remove boot from shaft Remove circular clip from housing (left side) Remove dust shield from housing, (0. Clean old grease on housing with paper waste zoen ‘Support Bearing 1, Remove dust shield from housing rf 2, Remove snap ring @, 3. Press out support bearing from housing 4, Remove dust shield Dynamic Damper Remove damper bands, then remove dynamic damper from shaft Wheel Side 4. Fix shaft with a vise um or copper plates when fixing with a vise. 2, Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from joint sub-assembly. FAX-43 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] 3. Screw drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service tool) into joint sub-assembly Screw part to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assem- bly from shaft. CAUTION: + If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or ‘more unsuccessful attempts, replace shaft and joint sub assembly as a set. + Align sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them by Pulling directory. 4. Remove circular clip from shaft 5. Remove boot from shaft 6. Clean old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper towels while rotating ball cage. ASSEMBLY Transaxle Assembly Side 1. Wiap serration on shaft with tape @ to protect boot from dam- age. Install new boot and boot bands to shaft. CAUTION: Never reuse boot and boot band. 2. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft. 3. To install the spider assembly (D, align it with the matching marks @ on the shaft @ put during the removal, and direct the serration mounting surface @ to the shaft 4. Secure spider assembly onto shaft with snap ring @. CAUTION: Never reuse snap ring. 5. Apply the appropriate amount of grease to spider assembly and sliding surface. 6. Assemble the housing onto spider assembly, and apply the bal- ance of the specified amount grease. Grease amount _; Refer to FAX-62, “Drive Shaft”, 7. Align matching marks put during the removal of housing : rors 8. Install stopper ring, CAUTION: Never reuse stopper ring. FAX-44 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > f2wo} a. 10. 1 12. 13, 14. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by ™” marks) shown in the figure, CAUTION: If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated by “*” mark) on shaft or housing, boot may be removed. Remove all grease from the surface. ‘To prevent from deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installa- tion length to the value shown below (L) by inserting the suitable tool into the inside of boot from the large diameter side of boot and discharging inside air. L + Refer to FAX-62, “Drive Shaft’ CAUTION: + If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in boot. tool. * Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of Install new boot bands securely CAUTION: Never reuse boot band. Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawis (4a) into holes to temporary installation. NOTE: For the large diameter side, fit projection @ and guide slit © at first Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band. Insert tip of band below end of the pawl. Secure housing and shaft, and then make sure that they are in the correct position when rotating boot Install them with new boot band when the mounting positions become incorrect. Install dust shield (left side) CAUTION: Never reuse dust shield. Install circular clip to housing (left side). CAUTION: Never reuse circular ‘Support Bearing 1 Install dust shield on housing, CAUTION: Never reuse dust shield. FAX-45 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT <= REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [ewo] 2. Press support bearing @ onto housing to using the suitable tool @ 3. Install snap ring. CAUTION: Never reuse snap ring. 4. Install dust shields, CAUTION: Never reuse dust shields. Dynamic Damper + Install damper bands securely as shown in the figure. + Secure dynamic damper with bands in the following specified posi- tion when removing CAUTION: Never reuse bands. Demission ? Refer to FAX-62, "Drive Shaft”. ‘Wheel Side For further details, refer to the installation procedure of "EAX-19. "M2000 + Removal and Installation”” for the drive shaft boot MR2O0DD : Inspection rocco INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL + Move joint up/down, leftright, and in the axial directions. Check for motion that is not smooth and for signifi- cant looseness. FAX-46 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Ewo) * Check boot for cracks, damage, and leakage of grease. * Disassemble drive shaft and exchange malfunctioning part if there is a non-standard condition, INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Shaft Check shaft for runout, cracks, or other damage. Replace if there are: Dynamic Damper Check damper for cracks or wear. Replace if necessary, Joint Sub-Assembly (Wheel Side) Check the following: + Joint sub-assembly for rough rotation and excessive axial looseness + The inside of the joint sub-assembly for entry of foreign material + Joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks, and fractures inside of joint sub-assembly Replace joint sub-assembly if there are any non-standard conditions of components. Housing and Spider assembly (Transaxle Side) Replace housing and spider assembly if there is scratching or wear of housing roller contact surface or spider roller contact surface, NOTE: Housing and spider assembly are used in a set. ‘Support Bearing (Right Side) Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. Replace support bearing if there are any non-standard conditions, ‘Support Bearing Bracket (Right Side) Check for bending, cracks, or damage. Replace support bearing bracket if there are any non-standard condi- tions. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-212. "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR _ 2. Check the wheel alignment, Refer to FSU-8. "Insnection’ 3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to SIRC-99. "Work Procedure" ROM FAX-47 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo) ROM : Exploded View LEFT SIDE SEC. 391 ® Circular cip @ Dust shies @ Housing ® Snap rng © Spider assembly ® Swopper rng @ Beotbana @ Boot @ shen @ Damperband ® Dynamic damper ® soint sub-assembly @ Dust shietd [2wo] RIGHT SIDE (CVT) ‘SEC. 291 125.026, 16) S Bhse0 (49.55) @ dustshieis © soint sub-assembly @ Circular ap @® Boot band © Boot @© shat @® Damper band ® dynamic damper © Sepper ting @ Spider assembly @ Snap sing ® Housing @® oustshieis @® Suppor nearing @ Retainer ® Suppor bearing bracket @ Heat insulator <3: Wheel side 1: Fil NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent HEEB 2 Apply paste [service parts (4400378000), Dh nm thom, ta) (29: Aiways replace ater every isassembsy FAX-49 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT [2wo) RIGHT SIDE (Mi) SEC. 391 ee 250 25,18) oes @ Dust shits @® soint sub-assembly @ Croulr cp @ Bootband ® Boot @® shat ® Stopper eng @® Spider assemby @® Snap ring @ Housing @ Dust shield ® Support bearing @ Retainer ® Support bearing bracket @ Heat insulator <1 Whee! side EB FILNISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent. 2: Apply paste service parts (440037S000)] Bh vm cam, toe) Ep: Aivays replace ater every cisassembly R9M : Removal and Installation oo cwmimamere REMOVAL Left Side 1. Remove tires. Refer to W1-61, "Removal and installation”. 2, Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-212. “FRONT WHEEL SENSOR - Removal FAX-50 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24. "FRONT - Exploded View" + RHD: Refer to * ( 4, Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Rer and installation”. + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE Cal ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation”. + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE! H and installation”. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116. " t - CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation’. 6. Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000) 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NOTE: Use suitable puller, if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure. 8 Remove wheel hub lock nut. 9. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to £SU-17, "Removal and Installation” 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-22. "Removal and Installation”. FAX-51 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > "7. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12. Remove drive shaft from transaxle assembly. + Use the drive shaft attachment (A) (SST: KV40107500) and a sliding hammer (B) (commercial service tool) while inserting tip of the drive shaft attachment between housing and tran- saxle assembly. CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. + Confirm that the circular clip is attached to the drive shaft. Right Side 1. Remove tires. Refer to WT-61, "Removal and Installation’. 2. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC- and Installation”. 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24, "FRONT ; Exploded View", + RHD: Refer to BR-88, "FRONT : Exploded View’. 4, Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51. [PER ASSEMBLY (1 PI TYPE) “ Removal and Installation’. + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal ‘and Installation’. + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111," and Installation’ + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56. " CALI and Installation’ CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 5. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-11_ "Removal and Installation’. FAX-52 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo} © Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000). 7, Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the ‘wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft. NOTE: Use suitable puller, if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure. 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut. 9, Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to FSU-I7. ‘Removal and Installation’. 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-22. and | " 11, Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly, CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12. Remove retainer mounting bolts and retainer. 13. Remove drive shaft from transaxle assembly. + Use the drive shaft attachment (SST: KV40107500) and a sliding hammer while inserting tip of the drive shaft attachment between housing and transaxle assembly. CAUTION: Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. 14. If necessary, remove the support bearing bracket mounting bolts, support bearing bracket and the heat insulator. INSTALLATION Left Side Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: Always replace differential side oil seal with new one when installing drive shaft. + MIT: Refer to TM-118. "Removal and Installation". + CVT: Refer to TM-690. “Removal and Installation". FAX-53 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT <= REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] * Place the protector (A) (SST: KV38107900) onto transaxle assem- bly to prevent damage to the differential side oil seal while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install securely. CAUTION: + Check that circular clip is completely engaged. + Never reuse differential side oil seal. + Clean the matching surface of whee! hub lock nut and wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. * Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bear- ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 1.0-3.0g (0.04 -0.10 02) Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to FAX-11. "Explodad View", CAUTION: «Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. + When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles. CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. + Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX.60. "R9M _ Inspection’. Right Side Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: Always replace differential side oil seal with new one when installing drive shaft. + MIT: Refer to TM-118, "Removal and Installation”, oO ‘efer to TM-690, "Removal and Installation”. FAX-54 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > * Place the protector (A) (SST: KV38107900) onto transaxle assem- bly to prevent damage to the differential side oil seal while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install securely, CAUTION: Never reuse differential side oil seal. AY [ I. + When installing support bearing bracket tighten the mounting bolt with the followi ~ To install support bearing bracket ( and mounting bolts, tempo- rary tighten the bolts before tightening to the specified torque, referring to the tightening method and the numerical order shown below: ‘Temporary tightening 192 Final tightening (Specified torque) 344 ~ Set plate @ so thet the notch part @ becomes upper side. CAUTION: Never reuse plate. ~ Temporarily tighten the bolts before tightening to the specified ing procedure. 1.3 57 torque, referring to the tightening method and the numerical order shown below: “Temporary tightening 556 Final tightening (Speciid torque) 738 + Instal the heat insulator @ to touch a projection @ of the bracket @ ‘as shown in figure. + Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub and bearing assembly CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. + Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bear- ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface @) of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 1.0~3.0.g (0.04 - 0.10 oz) FAX-55 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] + Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to FAX-11, exploded View" CAUTION: + Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. + When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. + Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-60. "ROM _ inspection’. ROM : Disassembly and Assembly riser DISASSEMBLY Transaxle Assembly Side 1. Fix shaft with a vise. CAUTION: Protect shaft using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise. 2, Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from housing Remove stopper ring 4. Put matching marks on housing and shaft, and then pull out housing from shaft. CAUTION: Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Never scratch the surfaces. 5. Putmatching marks @ on the spider assembly and shaft CAUTION: Use paint or an eq scratch the surfaces. lent for matching marks. Never 6. Remove snap ring @, and then remove spider assembly from shaft. Remove boot from shaft. Remove circular clip from housing (left side) Remove dust shield from housing. 0. Clean old grease on housing with paper waste. ‘Support Bearing FAX-56 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 7 2. 3 4 Remove dust shield from housing f2wo} 4 Remove snap ring (. Press out support bearing from housing, Remove dust shield Dynamic Damper (If equipped) Remove damper bands, then remove dynamic damper from shaft. Wheel Side 4 4 5. 6. Fix shaft with a vise CAUTION: Protect shaft using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise. Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from joint sub-assembly. Screw drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service tool) into joint sub-assembly screw part to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more, ‘Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assem- bly from shaft. CAUTION: + If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more unsuccessful attempts, replace shaft and joint sub assembly as a set. + Align sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them by pulling directory. Remove circular clip from shaft Remove boot from shaft Clean old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper towels while rotating ball cage. ASSEMBLY FAX-57 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] Transaxle Assembly Side 1. Wrap serration on shaft with tape @ to protect boot from dam- age. Install new boot and boot bands to shaft. CAUTION: Never reuse boot and boot band. 2, Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft 3. To install the spider assembly (, align it with the matching marks @) on the shaft @) put during the removal, and direct the serration mounting surface @ to the shaft 4. Secure spider assembly onto shaft with snap ring @. CAUTION: Never reuse snap ring. 5. Apply the appropriate amount of grease to spider assembly and sliding surface. 6. Assemble the housing onto spider assembly, and apply the bal- ance of the specified amount grease. Grease amount tefer to FAX-62, “Drive Shaft”. 7. Align matching marks put during the removal of housing. roves 8. Install stopper ring CAUTION: Never reuse stopper ring. 9. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*" marks) shown in the figure. CAUTION: If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated by “*" mark) on shaft or housing, boot may be removed. Remove all grease from the surface. 10. To prevent from deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installa tion length to the value shown below (L) by inserting the suitable tool into the inside of boot from the large diameter side of boot and discharging inside air. L CAUTION: + If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in boot. + Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of tool. 11. Install new boot bands securely. CAUTION: Never reuse boot band. tefer to FAX-62. "Drive Shaft”. FAX-58 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > f2wo} ‘@. Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawis (4a) into holes to temporary installation, NOTE: For the large diameter side, fit projection ® and guide sit @ at first Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band. Insert tip of band below end of the paw! SSS 12, Secure housing and shaft, and then make sure that they are in the correct position when rotating boot. Install them with new boot band when the mounting positions become incorrect 13. Install dust shield (left side) CAUTION: Never reuse dust shield. 14. Install circular clip to housing (left side). CAUTION: Never reuse circular ‘Support Bearing 1. Install dust shield on housing, CAUTION: Never reuse dust shield. 2. Press support bearing @ onto housing to using the suitable tool (A). 3. Install snap ring CAUTION: Never reuse snap ring. FAX-59 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [2wo] 4, Install dust shields. CAUTION: Never reuse dust shields. Dynamic Damper (If equipped) + Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit paws (4m into holes to temporary installation. NOTE: For the large diameter side, ft projection @ and guide sit @ at rst + Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band. + Insert tip of band below end of the pawl. + Secure dynamic damper with bands in the following specified posi- tion when removing, CAUTION: Never reuse bands. Demission + Refer to FAX-62, "Drive Shaft". Wheel Side For further details, refer to the installation procedure of "FAX.27. 'RSM Removal and Installation” for the drive shaft boot ROM : Inspection nrcicemencom2¥6 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL + Move joint up/down, leftright, and in the axial directions. Check for motion that is not smooth and for signifi- cant looseness. FAX-60 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > Ewo) * Check boot for cracks, damage, and leakage of grease. * Disassemble drive shaft and exchange malfunctioning part if there is anon-standard condition, INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY fra Shaft Check shaft for runout, cracks, or other damage. Replace if there are Dynamic Damper (If equipped) ‘Check damper for cracks or wear. Replace if necessary, Joint Sub-Assembly (Wheel Side) Check the following: + Joint sub-assembly for rough rotation and excessive axial looseness + The inside of the joint sub-assembly for entry of foreign material + Joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks, and fractures inside of joint sub-assembly Replace joint sub-assembly if there are any non-standard conditions of components. Housing and Spider assembly (Transaxle Side) Replace housing and spider assembly if there is scratching or wear of housing roller contact surface or spider roller contact surface, NOTE: Housing and spider assembly are used in a set. ‘Support Bearing (Right Side) Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. Replace support bearing if there are any non-standard conditions, ‘Support Bearing Bracket (Right Side) Check for bending, cracks, or damage. Replace support bearing bracket if there are any non-standard condi- tions. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-212. "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR _ Exploded View". 2. Check the wheel alignment, Refer to FSU-5. "Insnection’ 3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to SIRC-99. "Work Procedure" FAX-61 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [wo], SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing aime Tavalend pay ‘a6 mm [0.002 hy ores Drive Shaft wrioommwnny sins MR20DD cur Sendard ‘tem Tataice Right sce Wheel sie T1S= 1959 (608-4762) ‘Grease quentiy Transaxle side 75105 g (818-687 ez) 5 wheel se 1415 mm GS7Iny Sere es Transane side 198.9mm (775i) 108: mm (7-48 in} [A 273—279 mm (10.75 — 10.9819) 243248 mm (@57 -8.80 In) Dimension of namic camper” | iam EE *: For measuring position. Refer to FAX-42, "MR20DD : Disassembly and Assembly". wr Sendra tem Tatace Rint se Weal se Ti6— 135 9 (408 ATE oz) (Grease quantity Transaxle side 175106 9 (618-687 02) A Wheel side 4415 mm (667 in) Bole ea ae Transaxle side 202.1 mm (79819) 188.8 mm (7-44in) a 213-27 mm(10.75-1098in) | 243-249 mm (@67—9.80 in) Dimension of dynamic damper’ | eit = For measuring postion, Refer fo 7 Z ROM cur Biendard tem Tetisie Renae Wheel ste T45— 165 g(5 1158202) ‘Grease quantity Transaie side 265 — 286 g (836 - 1005 c2) C Wheel se 145mm (871m) insta ae Transanie side 198.1 mm (772i) 1841 mm (7.25in) ae a 255-261 mm {10.04-1028in) | 205-211 mm (6.07 -8.31 in) Dimension of dynamic dam rension of namic damper” | aie Guat *: For measuring position. Refer to FAX-56. "ROM ; Disassembly and Assembly". Mr FAX-62 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [wo] = Standard Tetsae Right se Wheel ae TAS 105 g(6.11 58202) Grease quantty “Transaxie side 265 286 g (036 — 10.05 02) ; Wheel side 145mm (ET in) ee Transexe side 198. mm (TIBI etm (725m) [A 207-218 mn (8.15 —8.39n) = Dimension of namie damper” ATR ISH — *: For measuring position. Refer to FAX-55, "ROM; Disassembly anid AssombI FAX-63 PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > fawo] PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" wporcomeno0 censor ‘The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER’, used along vith a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG" and “SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual. WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. + To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. + Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. + Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser- vice Manual. SRS wiring hamesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS WARNING: Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. + When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing serious injury. + When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect CAUTION: Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction. + Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the ignition power source and accessory power source to the OFF, then disconnect both battery cables, + After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect both battery cables. + Always use CONSULT to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work. If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results. For vehiole with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering whee! will lock and cannot be tumed. If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro- cedure below before starting the repair operation. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Connect both battery cables. NOTE: ‘Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged, 2. Open driver door. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (At this time, the steering lock will be released.) 4, Tum the ignition switch to OFF position with driver door open. 5. Wait for 3 minutes or longer with driver door open. NOTE: + Do not close driver door because the steering wheel locks when driver door is closed. FAX-64 PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > [ao] = The auto aco function is adapted to this vehicle. For this reason, even when the ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the accessory power source does not turned OFF and continues to be supplied for a certain amount of time. 6. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon- nected and the steering wheel can be turned. 7. Perform the necessary repair operation. 8. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn the ignition switch from OFF position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.) 9. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT. Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal sei + With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key of remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even after the ignition switch is tuned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time + When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC. power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing “How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below. NOTE: ‘Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition switch is tured OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC detection or ECU data damage may occur. For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat- tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of ‘main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected, ‘After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result’ of all ECUs and erase DTC. NOTE: ‘The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error, HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 or Instruction 2 described below. For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2. INSTRUCTION 1 1, Open the hood. 2. Tum key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened. 3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. 4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse of the specified time. DéDengine 20 minutes HRAZDDT 12 minutos Kok engine 4 minutes MOR engine 4 minutes ROM engine 4 minutes Vox engine 4 minutes CAUTION: While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. 5. Remove 12V battery terminal. CAUTION: After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF) 1. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry. FAX-65 PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > fawo] NO At this moment, ACC power is supplied ‘Open the driver side door. ‘Open the hood. Close the driver side door. Wait at least 3 minutes, CAUTION: While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function, 6. Remove 12V battery terminal. CAUTION: After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. Precautions for Drive Shaft wreioemenseco4o9 CAUTION: Note the following precautions when disassembling and assembling drive shaft. + Joint sub-assembly does not disassemble because it is non-overhaul parts. + Perform work in a dust-free location. + Before disassembling and assembling, clean the parts. + Prevent the entry of foreign objects during disassembly of the Service location. + Disassemble parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be placed over parts. + Paper waste must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adher- ing to parts. + Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with kerosene which shall be removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper waste. FAX-66 PREPARATION <= PREPARATION > [awn] PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool Tool number T Fee Description Kv40104000 |” Removing and Instaling wheel hub lock nut Hub lock nut wrench 2: 85 mm (3.35 in) b. 85 mm (2.58 in) v40107300 Boot band crimping tool | instating boot bend Kvao107800 Fmaving drive shat Drive shaft attachment KV36107800 Instaling drive shaft Protector 2 32 mm (1.2 in) ala, Commercial Service Tool Teolname ‘Description Drive shat puller —— Romaving drive shaft joint sub assembly FAX-67 < PREPARATION > PREPARATION [awp} Siding hammer Ball joint remover Chisel a eP SS —S Ranoving drive shat Removing hub bolt Removing and instaliing steering knuckle and strut assembly ‘A: 16 ~32 mm (0.63 - 1.26 in) B: 10 mm (0.39 in) or more ©: 40-70 mm (1.87 2.76 in) 220 mm (7.87 in) or less, S:14 mm (0.55 in) or more Lubricant or/and Sealant Name Description huine grease or equivale ~ Joint sub-assembly inside Fill NISSAN Genuine gt equivalent ease ‘Apply paste [service parts (440087S000)] + Joint sub-assembly FAX-68 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING < SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [4wp] SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart rN, Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. ale : 2/8 ]8]8]e] es] se Reference ' (ays (dle lz ee] 2 [5 | Z Zlslzlz lf lzlz | alse le lz ls|s = [= |2|2|8|2 |g 3 5 % 5 g 5 i 5 Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS ele! [2] |sle * Flo Fe! ere l2/2|] fale ere eleleigie| [Elz] le Slelblalelzlele] [2/4 lyle Plelalele iglesia lal lS le &/SlelFls ls lelele|2|8| S| oe Lee aE xl =p=l = =| sur [anise ee Noise ep tettet=t = Shake Ec Symptom Front | Wbraon xl el >see pel AXLE [Shimmy *[ x % ¥ | ™] x (Huser x eel els oor quality rae orhanding xleL_l*L Lele Thppleable FAX-69 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > fawo] PERIODIC MAINTENANCE FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE Inspection seo COMPONENT PART Make sure that the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions (wear, damage) are normal, WHEEL HUB ASSEMBLY (BEARING-INTEGRATED TYPE) Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary. * Move wheel hub and bearing asseriby in he axial direction by hand, Check there is no looseness of wheel earing Axial end play + Refer to FAX-137, "Wheel Bearing”, + Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there is any of irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly, FAX-70 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [4wp] FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Inspection oo cowrccees FRONT DRIVE SHAFT INSPECTION Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary. * Check drive shaft mounting point and joint for looseness and other damage. CAUTION: Replace entire drive shaft assembly when noise or vibration occur from drive shaft. * Check boot for cracks and other damage. FAX-71 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wp) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE Exploded View inroocmenco ensue? ‘SEC. 400 BOP 02.00 @ Steering knuckle @ Splash guars @ Hub batt @® Whee! hub and bearing assembly @)_ Disc rotor © Whes! hub lock nut @ Adjusting cap ® Cotter pin BL sem team, ro) (£4: Atways replace ater every sisassembly Removal and Installation nvopmmmnanuct REMOVAL 1. Remove tires. Refer to W1-61, "Removal and installation”, 2. Remove front wheel sensor from steering kunckle. Refer to SRC-212. "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR Re and In: r. 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to 8R-24, "FRONT : Exploded View’. + RHD: Refer to BR-88. "FRONT - Exploded View". FAX-72 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [awo] a 10. “ 12, 13, Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work * LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51. "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE): Removal and Installation”. + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR:56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) ; Removal "i + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111" ¥ and Installation”. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116." and Installation’. CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. CAUTION: + Put matching marks @® on the wheel hub and bearing assembly and the disc rotor before removing the disc rotor. + Never drop disc rotor. Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000), Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood, Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NOTE: Use suitable puller, if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure. Remove wheel hub lock nut Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly. Remove splash guard. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to FSU-i7, ‘Removal and Installation”. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-22, "Removal and Installation”. ‘Separate the connection of strut assembly and steering knuckle as follows. CAUTION: FAX-73 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wD] Be sure to keep the following procedure because steering knuckle may be damaged when you enlarge the gap of steering knuckle too much. ‘a. Remove strut mounting bolts from steering knuckle. b. Measure the gap (A) of the steering knuckle. And then mark the enlarged limit (B) to the chisel © Marking Enlarged limit (B) = gap (A) + 2.5 mm (0.098 in) NoTr Standard of gap: 6.9 + 0.5 mm (2.56 + 0.02 in) c. Enlarge the gap of the steering knuckle with the chisel (A) (com- mercial service tool) not to surpass a limit as shown in the figure. CAUTION: + Never enlarge the gap more than 2.5mm (0.098in). * Be careful not to damage the projection @ and strut assembly @ with the chisel. d. Separate the connection of strut assembly and steering knuckle. CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. * Be careful not to overextend slide joint. + Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the other parts. + Be sure to remove lubricants if lubricant has been used to separate the connection of strut assembly and steering knuckle. FAX-74 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 74, Remove hub bolts @ from wheel hub and bearing assembly, using the ball joint remover (A) (commercial service tool) CAUTION: + Remove hub bolt only when necessary. + Never hammer the hub bolt to avoid impact to the wheel hub and bearing assembly. + Pull out the hub bolt in a direction perpendicular to the wheel hub and bearing assembly. 15. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to FAX-77, *insoection INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of the removal Hub Bolts + Place a washer @) as shown in the figure to install the hub bolts © by using the tightening force of the nut 6) CAUTION: * Check that there is no clearance between wheel hub and bearing assembly, and hub bolt. + Never reuse hub bolt. Drive shaft * Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub an« CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. * Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bear- ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface @ of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 4.0-3.0.g (0.04- 0.10 oz) \d bearing assembly. CAUTION: * Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut, + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock ni + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. FAX-75 Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to EAX.72. "Exploded View" ut. Never use a power tool. FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] + When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rates. ‘CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. Disc rotor CAUTION: * Align the matching marks @® made during removal when reus- ing the disc rotor. + Never drop disc rotor. Strut Assembly and Steering Knuckle Connection CAUTION: Be sure to remove lubricants if lubricant has been used to separate the connection of strut assembly and steering knuckle. + Install the steering knuckle to strut assembly as follows, 1. Set suitable jack under steering knuckle, 2. Align the gap @ of steering knuckle to the projection part ® of A ms \ u eal 3. Tighten the mounting bolt with pushing up the steering knuckle © until contacts stopper bracket @ end face, using a suitable Ar jack Ny CAUTION: aS & Check the stable condition when using a jack. Ds Le PA veniaancz + Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-77. “inspection”. FAX-76 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] Tnspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the following items, and teplace the part if necessary * Check components for deformation, cracks, and other damage. * Check boots of transverse link and steering outer socket ball joint for breakage, axial end play, and swing torque. - Transverse link: Refer to FSU-18, “Inspection”, - Steering outer socket: Refer to ST-26. " r. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1, Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". 2. Cheok the wheel alignment. Refer to ESU-8. “Inspection” 3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-99, "Work Procedure” FAX-77 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo) FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT MR20DD MR20DD : Exploded View sonoma LEFT SIDE (SEC. 391 @ Circular cp ® dust shield @ Housing @® Snap cing ® Spider assembly © Stopper ring @ Boot bang ® Boot @ Shan @ Damper band @ Dinamic damper @® Joint sub-assembly @ Dust shieta Wheel side Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent Apply paste [service parts (4400378000) (29: Aways replace ater every cisassembly FAX-78 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] RIGHT SIDE ‘SEC.a9 \ Pee (2, 35) &® Fassc2s's0 B. // Phe 40.05) oN © dust shiis © sont sub-assembly @ Cicuiaretip @ Beet band @ Boot © Stat @ Damper vane ® dynamic damper @® Stopper rg @ Sviderassembiy ® Snap sing @ Housing @ Dustshieie @ Supportdearng @ Fetaner ® _Soppon bearing bracket <3: Whe side EB 1: FI NISSAN Genuine grease or eauivalent. ‘Apply paste service pats 440037000) PA Nim thom, te) (8$: Always replace ater every cisassembiy, MR20DD : Removal and Installation swooumeiren REMOVAL Whee! Side 1, Remove tires. Refer to WT-61. "Removal and Installation”. 2, Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR « Removal and Installation’. FAX-79 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24. "FRONT - Exploded View", + RHD: Refer to BR-88. "FRONT ; Exploded View" 4. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMI ‘ON TYPE} | Re : + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBL\ a E) : Removal and Installation” + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON ov and Installation”. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116."" lation" CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and installation’. 6. Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000). 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NoTt Use suitable puller if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure. 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut 9. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to ESU-17, "Removal 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle, Refer to S1-22. "Removal and Installation’. FAX-80 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 71. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12. Remove boot bands, and then separate boot from joint sub-assembly. 43. Screw drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service tool) into joint sub-assembly screw part to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assem- bly from shaft ‘CAUTION: * Align sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them by pulling directory. + If joint sub-assembly cannot be pulled out, try after removing drive shaft from vehicle. Refer to FAX-42, 14, Remove circular clip @ from shaft 15. Remove boot from shaft. Transaxle Side Remove boot after removing drive shaft. + Remove: Refer to EAX-401. "MR200D _ Removal and installation” + Disassembly: Refer to FAX-107, “MR20DD * Disassembly and Assembly" INSTALLATION Wheel Side 1. Clean the old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper waste. 2. Fill serration slot joint sub-assembly @ with NISSAN genuine grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball groove become full to the brim ‘CAUTION: After applying grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has aozed out. FAX-81 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo) 3. Install boot and boot bands to shaft. CAUTION: + Never reuse boot and boot band. + Wrap serration on shaft with tape @ to protect the boot from damage. 4. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft 5. Position the circular clip © on groove at the shaft edge. CAUTION: Never reuse circular clip. NOTE: Drive joint inserter is recommended when installing circular clip @. 6. Align both center axles of the shaft edge and joint sub-assembly, Then assemble shaft with joint sub- assembly holding circular clip. 7. Install joint sub-assembly @ to shaff using plastic hammer. CAUTION: * Check circular clip is properly positioned on groove of the joint sub-assembly. + Confirm that joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged while rotating drive shaft. 8. Fill into the boot inside with the specified amount of grease from large diameter side of boot, Grease amount + Refer to FAX-137, “Drive Shaft”. FAX-82 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [awo] 9. Install the boot securely into grooves (Indicated by” marks) shown in the figure CAUTION If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated * by “*” mark) on the shaft or joint subassembly. boot may be removed. Remove all grease from the boot mounting sur- face. 10,,To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot instalia- tion length (L) to the specified value shown below by inserting the suitable too! into the inside of the boot from the large diame- Ss ter side of the boot and discharging the inside air. ceasaia: rd L : Refer to FAX-137, “Drive Shaft". CAUTION: + If the boot mounting length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in the boot. + Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with a tip of tool. 11. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with boot bands using the boot band crimping tool (A) (SST: KV40107300), CAUTION: Never reuse boot band. NOTE: ‘Secure boot band so that dimension (M) meets the specification as shown in the figure. M :1.0~ 4.0 mm (0.039 - 0.157 in) 12. Check that displacement does not occur when boot is rotated with the joint sub-assembly and shaft fixed. CAUTION: + Reinstall them using boot bands when boot installation positions become incorrect. + Never reuse boot band. 13, Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. FAX-83 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] 14, Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bearing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface ® of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assem- bly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 1.0-3.0g (0.04-0.10 02) 15. Insert drive shaft to wheel hub and bearing assembly, and then temporarily tighten wheel hub lock nut. CAUTION: + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. 16. Install transverse link to steering knuckle and front suspention member. Refer to FSU-17, "Exploded ey 17. Install steering outer socket to steering knuckle. + LHD: Refer to ST-20, "LHD | Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to ST-21."RHD : Exploded View! 18. Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to FAX-72, "Exploded View’. CAUTION: + Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. 19. When installing a cotter pin @® and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. 20. Install disc rotor. Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and installation" 21. Install caliper assembly to steering knuckle. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer fo 8-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PI and Installation". + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal f . and Installation”. + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR- and Installation’. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56. q and Installation”. 22. Install lock plate to strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24, "FRONT : Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to BR-88, "FRONT : Exploded View", 23. Install wheel sensor to steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR | Removal and 5 24. Install tires to vehicle. Refer to W1-61, "Removal and installation". 25. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-85, "MR20DD : Inspection". Transaxle Side * Installation: Refer to FAX-101, "MR20DD ; Removal and Installation’. FAX-84 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] ~ Assembly: Refer to FAX-107, "NIRZODD Disassembly and Assembly" MR2O0DD : Inspection nrceewencoect'2 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary. + Check components for deformation, cracks, and other damage. + Check boots of transverse link and steering outer socket ball joint for breakage, axial end play, and swing torque. ~ Transverse link: Refer to FSU-18. "Inspection’. ~ Steering outer socket: Refer to ST-26. “inspection”. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION fra 4, Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR. Exploded View". 2. Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-8, "Inspection! 3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-99, "Work Procedure" QR25DE QR25DE : Exploded View eroweommereanee'y LEFT SIDE [Sec.391 Dust shield Spider assembly Boot Circular clip ‘Snap ring Boot band Housing ‘Stopper ring Shatt Se@e@e8 8SeG6e Damper band Dust shield [4wo) RIGHT SIDE (SEC. 391 @ dust she @ soi aivassemby @ Cheuareip @ Boot band @ oat © sun @ Damper band © dynamic camper © sepperog @ Spider assembly ® Snap ring ® Housing @ Dustane @ Support beara @ Retainer Suppor besrr bracket ©: Whee ste EEG 1: Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent. HEEB 2: Anply paste (service parts (440037S000)) Dn tam, n) #54: Always replace ater every disassembly QR25DE : Removal and Installation incon REMOVAL Wheel Side 1. Remove tires. Refer to WW1-61. "Removal and Installation”. 2, Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRO-212 “FRONT WHEEL SENSOR - Removal FAX-86 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. + LHD; Refer to BR-24. "FRONT - Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to * 3 4, Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) : Rer and installation”. + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE Cal ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation”. + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE M and installation”. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116. " ‘and Installation”. CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation" 6. Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000) 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NOTE: Use suitable puller, if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure. 8 Remove wheel hub lock nut. 9. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to £SU-17, "Removal and Installation” 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-22. "Removal and Installation’. FAX-87 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 77. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12. Remove boot bands, and then separate boot from joint sub-assembly. 13. Screw drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service tool) into joint sub-assembly screw part to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assem- bly from shaft. CAUTION: + Align sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them by pulling directory. + If joint sub-assembly cannot be pulled out, try after removing drive shaft from vehicle. Refer to FAX-119, 14. Remove circular clip @ from shaft. 15. Remove boot from shat. ‘Transaxle Side Remove boot after removing drive shaft. + Remove: Refer to FAX-113. "QR25DE - Removal and Installation” + Disassembly: Refer to FAXTI9 "QR25DE Disassembly and Assembly" INSTALLATION Wheel Side 1. Clean the old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper waste. 2. Fill serration slot joint sub-assembly @ with NISSAN genuine grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball groove become full to the brim. CAUTION: After applying grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has oozed out. FAX-88 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wb) 3. _ Install boot and boot bands to shaft. CAUTION: + Never reuse boot and boot band. + Wrap serration on shaft with tape @ to protect the boot from damage. PO ( re 4. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft 5. Position the circular clip @ on groove at the shaft edge CAUTION: Never reuse circular clip. NOTE: Drive joint inserter is recommended when installing circular clip 6. Align both center axles of the shaft edge and joint sub-assembly, Then assemble shaft with joint sub- assembly holding circular clip. 7. Install joint sub-assembly @ to shaft using plastic hammer. CAUTION: * Check circular clip is properly positioned on groove of the joint sub-assembly. + Confirm that joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged while rotating drive shaft. 8, Fill into the boot inside with the specified amount of grease from large diameter side of boot. Grease amount + Refer to FAX-137, "Drive Shaft”. FAX-89 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [awo] 3, Install the boot securely into grooves (Indicated by" marks) shown in the figure. CAUTION If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated by “*” mark) on the shaft or joint subassembly. boot may be \ removed. Remove all grease from the boot mounting sur- face. 10. To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installa- tion length (L) to the specified value shown below by inserting the suitable tool into the inside of the boot from the large diame- ter side of the boot and discharging the inside air. siicaas fs Refer to FAX-137, "Drive Shaft”. CAUTION: + Ifthe boot mounting length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in the boot. + Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with a tip of tool. 11. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with boot bands using the boot band crimping tool (4) (SST: KV40107300). CAUTION: A | Never reuse boot band. NOTE: ‘Secure boot band so that dimension (M) meets the specification as shown in the figure. u £4.04. mm (0.039 - 0.187 in) 12. Check that displacement does not occur when boot is rotated with the joint sub-assembly and shaft fixed. CAUTION: + Reinstall them using boot bands when boot installation positions become incorrect. + Never reuse boot band. 13. Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. FAX-90 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] 14 15, 16 17, 18. 19, 20. 2 22, 23. 24, 25. lean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bearing assembly, And then apply paste [service parts (4400378000) to surface @) of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assem- bly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 1.0- 3.0 g (0.04 - 0.10 oz) Insert drive shaft to wheel hub and bearing assembly, and then temporarily tighten wheel hub lock nut CAUTION: + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. Install transverse link to steering knuckle and front suspention member. Refer to FSU-17, "Exploded View". Install steering outer socket to steering knuckle. + LHD: Refer te S20 WHO Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to ST-21.” Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to i specified torque. Refer to FAX-72, "Exploded View", CAUTION: * Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles. CAUTION: FB Never reuse cotter pi Install disc rotor. Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation”. Install caliper assembly to steering knuckle + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51. "BRAKE CA\ Y (1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation’. + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE): Removal and Installation’. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal i a Install lock plate to strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24, "FRONT : Exploded View’. + RHD: Refer to BR-86. "FRONT: Exploded View" Install wheel sensor to steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR « Removal and < Install tires to vehicle Refer to VWT-61. "Removal and Installation’. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-92, "QR25DE - Inspection’ Transaxle Side * Installation: Refer to FAX-113, "QR25DE : Removal and Installation’. FAX-91 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wp) ‘Assembly: Refer to FAX-119, "QR25DE_ Dissssembiy and Assembi™ QR25DE : Inspection nrocenancronss INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary. + Check components for deformation, cracks, and other damage. + Check boots of transverse link and steering outer socket ball joint for breakage, axial end play, and swing torque. ~ Transverse link: Refer to FSU-18. "inspection" ~ Steering outer socket: Refer to ST-25. "inspection" INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check wheel sensor hamess for proper connection, Refer to 8RC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR Exploded View" 2. Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-8, "Inspection’. 3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-99. "Work Procedure". ROM ROM : Exploded View ‘eroecummoresr LEFT SIDE SEC. 391 © Ciesla @® dust iets @ Housing ® Snap ing © Spider assembly @ Stopper rng @ Boot bend @ Boot @ shor @ Damper band ® Dynamic damper ® Joint sub-assembly @ Dust shield wee! sige EB 1: FILNISSAN Genuine grease or equvelent. EGR 2 Asal pate [service parts (4400378000)] (24: Aways replace ator every clsassembly FAX-92 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] RIGHT SIDE ‘SEC. 391 ey 0, Sr 2 (49.25) Ay (42.99) Haven) @ Dust shieid @ Joint sub-assembly @ Circular ip @ Boot band @ Boot @ shat ® Stopper ting ® Spider assembly @ Snap rng ® Housing @ Dust shiets ® Support bearing @ Retainer @ Support bearing bracket @ Heatinsulator <3: Wheel side + FI NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent 2: Apply paste [service parts (440087000), Fn kam, toby (Always replace ater every disassembly R9M ; Removal and Installation wrote REMOVAL Whee! Side 1, Remove tires. Refer to WI-61, “Removal and Installation”. 2. Remove wheel nsor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR Removal FAX-93 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24. "FRONT - Exploded View", + RHD: Refer to BR-88. "FRONT ; Exploded View" 4. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMI ‘ON TYPE} | Re : + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBL\ a E) : Removal and Installation” + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON ov and Installation”. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116."" lation" CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and installation’. 6. Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000). 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NoTt Use suitable puller if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure. 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut 9. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to ESU-17, "Removal 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle, Refer to S1-22. "Removal and Installation’. FAX-94 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 71. Remove drive shaft rom wheel hub and bearing assembly CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12. Remove boot bands, and then separate boot from joint sub-assembly. 43. Screw drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service too!) into joint sub-assembly screw part to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assem- bly from shaft ‘CAUTION: * Align sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them by pulling directory. + If joint sub-assembly cannot be pulled out, try after removing drive shaft from vehicle. Refer to FAX-131, "RM iDisassembly and Assembly”. 14, Remove circular clip @ from shaft. 15. Remove boot from shaft Transaxle Side Remove boot after removing drive shaft. + Remove: Refer to FAX-125, "RSM _ Removal and Installation" + Disassembly: Refer to FAX-131. "ROM | Disassembly and Assembly" INSTALLATION Wheel Side 1, Clean the old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper waste. 2. Fill serration slot joint sub-assembly @ with NISSAN genuine grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball groove become full to the brim CAUTION: After applying grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has aozed out. FAX-95 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo) 3. Install boot and boot bands to shaft. CAUTION: + Never reuse boot and boot band. + Wrap serration on shaft with tape @ to protect the boot from damage. 4. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft 5. Position the circular clip © on groove at the shaft edge. CAUTION: Never reuse circular clip. NOTE: Drive joint inserter is recommended when installing circular clip @. 6. Align both center axles of the shaft edge and joint sub-assembly, Then assemble shaft with joint sub- assembly holding circular clip. 7. Install joint sub-assembly @ to shaff using plastic hammer. CAUTION: * Check circular clip is properly positioned on groove of the joint sub-assembly. + Confirm that joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged while rotating drive shaft. 8. Fill into the boot inside with the specified amount of grease from large diameter side of boot, Grease amount + Refer to FAX-137, “Drive Shaft”. FAX-96 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT <= REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [awo] 9. Install the boot securely into grooves (indicated by” marks) shown in the figure ‘CAUTION If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated * by “*” mark) on the shaft or joint subassembly. boot may be removed. Remove all grease from the boot mounting sur- face. 10,,To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot instalia- tion length (L) to the specified value shown below by inserting the suitable too! into the inside of the boot from the large diame- Ss ter side of the boot and discharging the inside air. ceasaia: rd L : Refer to FAX-137, “Drive Shaft". CAUTION: + If the boot mounting length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in the boot. + Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with a tip of tool. 11. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with boot bands using the boot band crimping tool (A) (SST: KV40107300), CAUTION: Never reuse boot band. NOTE: ‘Secure boot band so that dimension (M) meets the specification as shown in the figure. M :1,0- 4,0 mm (0.039 - 0.187 in) 12, Check that displacement does not occur when boot is rotated with the joint sub-assembly and shaft fixed. CAUTION: + Reinstall them using boot bands when boot installation positions become incorrect. + Never reuse boot band. 13, Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. FAX-97 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] 14. Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bearing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface @ of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assem- bly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 1.0- 3.09 (0.04-0.10 02) 15. Insert drive shaft to wheel hub and bearing assembly, and then temporarily tighten wheel hub lock nut. CAUTION: + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. 16. Install transverse link to steering knuckle and front suspention member. Refer to FSU-17, "Exploded Nheahe 17. Install steering outer socket to steering knuckle. + LHD: Refer to ST-20, "LHD | Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to ST-21."RHD : Exploded View" 18. Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to FAX-72. " i CAUTION: + Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. 19. When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. 20. Install disc rotor, Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and Installation". 21. Install caliper assembly to steering knuckle. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PE) : Rem and Installation". + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal . and installation”. + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR- and Installation’. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56. q and Installation”. 22. Install lock plate to strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24, “FRONT : Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to BR-88, "FRONT : Exploded View", 23. Install wheel sensor to steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR | Removal and 4 24. Install tires to vehicle. Refer to WWI-61, "Removal and installation". 25. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX.99. "R9M - Inspection" Transaxle Side * Installation: Refer to FAX-125, "R9M : Removal and Installation’. FAX-98 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] + Assembly: Refer to FAX-131, "ROM : Disassembly and Assembly". ROM : Inspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the following items, and teplace the patt if necessary * Check components for deformation, cracks, and other damage. * Check boots of transverse link and steering outer socket ball joint for breakage, axial end play, and swing torque. - Transverse link: Refer to 3 ESU-18. “Inspection”. = Steering outer socket: Refer to ST:26, “Inspection” = INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1, Check wheel sensor hamess for proper connection. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ; Exploded View". 2. Cheok the whee! alignment. Refer to FSU-8, “Inspection” 3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to 8RC-99, "Work Procedure” FAX-99 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo) FRONT DRIVE SHAFT MR20DD MR20DD : Exploded View nrovamaane LEFT SIDE [SEC.391 @ Circular cp ® dust shield @ Housing @® Snap cing ® Spider assembly © Stopper ring @ Boot bang ® Boot @ Shan @ Damper band @ Dinamic damper @® Joint sub-assembly @ Dust shieta Wheel side Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent Aoply paste [service parts (440037$000)) (69: Aways replace ater every dlsassembiy FAX-100 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] RIGHT SIDE ‘SEC.39 Pies ceo. 10) P0149, 05) Phae 40.05) © dust shies ® sont sub-assembly @ Cicuiaretip @ Bock band ® Boot © Stat @ Damper vane ® dynamic damper @® Stopper rg @ Seiderassembiy ® Snap sing @ Housing @ Dustshieie @ Suppordearng @ Fetaner ® _Soppor bearing bracket <3 Whe sige EER: FI NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent 2: Apply paste [eric pats (4400378000) Nim thom, te) (8$: Always replace ater every cisassembiy, MR20DD : Removal and Installation erooucenesi? REMOVAL Left Side 1. Remove tires. Refer to WT-61. "Removal and Installation”. 2, Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation. FAX-101 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24. "FRONT - Exploded View", * RHD: Refer to BR-88. "FRONT : Exploded View". 4. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMI ‘ON TYPE} | Re : + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBL\ a E) : Removal and Installation” + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON ov and Installation”. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116."" lation" CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and installation’. 6. Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000). 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NoTt Use suitable puller if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure. 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut 9. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to ESU-17, "Removal 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle, Refer to S1-22. "Removal and Installation’. FAX-102 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 71. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12. Remove drive shaft from transaxle assembly. + Use the drive shaft attachment (A) (SST: KV40107500) and a sliding hammer (B) (commercial service tool) while inserting tip of the drive shaft attachment between housing and tran- saxle assembly, CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. * Confirm that the circular clip is attached to the drive shaft. Right Side 1. Remove tires. Refer to WI:61. "Removal and Installation’. 2. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle, Refer to BRC-! and Installation’. 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. * LHD: Refer to BR-24, "FRONT - Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to BR-68, "FRONT ; Exploded View", 4. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) . Removal + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) . Removal and Installation". + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, " A IN a and installation". + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116, "BRA\ Pr Y (2 PISTON TYPE) : Rer sand Installatio CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 5. Remove disc rotor. Refer to F FAX-103 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] 6 Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000) 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NOTE: Use suitable puller, if whee! hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even afier performing the above pro- cedure, 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut. 9, Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member, Refer to FSU-17. "Removal and installation’, 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle, Refer to ST-22. "i installation’. ‘11. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12, Remove retainer mounting bolts and retainer. 13. Remove drive shaft from transfer assembly. + Use the drive shaft attachment (SST: KV40107500) and a sliding hammer while inserting tip of the drive shaft attachment between housing and transfer assembly. CAUTION: Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. 14. If necessary, remove the support bearing bracket mounting bolts and the support bearing bracket INSTALLATION Left Side Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: Iways replace differential side oil seal with new one when installing drive shaft. Refer to TN-429. “Removal and Installation”. FAX-104 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] * Place the protector (A) (SST: KV38107900) onto transaxle assem- bly to prevent damage to the differential side oil seal while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install securely. CAUTION: + Check that circular clip is completely engaged. + Never reuse differential side oil seal. Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub an CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bear- ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface @ of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 1.0- 3.0 g (0.04- 0.10 oz) Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to £ CAUTION: * Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the ti hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub fock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. 72." ightening torque range for the wheel + Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-111, "MR200D - Inspection" Right Side Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: Always replace transfer cover oil seal (inner) and transfer cove installing drive shaft. Refer to DLN-78. " FAX-105 F oil seal (outer) with new one when FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] * Place the protector (A) (SST. KV38107900) onto transfer assembly to prevent damage to the transfer cover oil seal (inner) and transfer cover oil seal (outer) while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install securely. CAUTION: Li Never reuse transfer cover oil seal (inner) and transfer cover oil seal (outer). + When installing support bearing bracket tighten the mounting bolt with the following procedure. ~ To install support bearing bracket @ and mounting bolts, tempo- [— 7. = rarily tighten the bolts before tightening to the specified torque, |") referring to the tightening method and the numerical order shown below’ Temporary tahtening 492 Final tightening (Specied torque) 344 ~ Set plate @ so thet the notch part @ becomes upper side. CAUTION: Never reuse plate. ~ Temporarily tighten the bolts before tightening to the specified poise torque, referring to the tightening method and the numerical order shown below: Temporary tightening 546 Final tightening (Specified torave) 198 + Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matchi 1g surface. + Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and whee! hub and bear- ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface @ of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft, Amount paste: 1.0 - 3.0g (0.04-0.10 oz) + Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to FAX-72. "Exploded View". CAUTION: + Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. FAX-106 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT <= REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [awo] * When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles. CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. @® vos | + Perform inspection after installation. Refer to EAX-111, "82000 - inspection" MR20DD : Disassembly and Assembly wcwomncnoae'® DISASSEMBLY Transaxle Assembly Side 4. Fixshaft with a vise CAUTION: Protect shaft using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise. 2. Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from housing. Remove stopper ring 4. Put matching marks on housing and shaft, and then pull out housing from shaft. CAUTION: Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Never scratch the surfaces. 5. Put matching marks @ on the spider assembly and shaft. CAUTION: Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Never scratch the surfaces. 6. Remove snap ring @, and then remove spider assembly from shaft 7. Remove boot from shaft 8. Remove circular clip from housing (eft side). 9. Remove dust shield from housing, 10. Clean old grease on housing with paper waste ‘Support Bearing FAX-107 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT (awo] 1. Remove dust shield from housing. 2. Remove snap ring @. 3. Press out support bearing from housing, 4. Remove dust shield Dynamic Damper Remove damper bands, then remove dynamic damper from shaft. Wheel Side 1. Fix shaft with a vise, CAUTION: art Protect shaft using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise. 2, Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from joint sub-assembly. 3. Sorew drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service tool) into joint sub-assembly screw part fo a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more, Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assem- bly from sha. CAUTION: + If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more unsuccessful attempts, replace shaft and joint sub assembly as a set. + Align sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them by Pulling directory. 4. Remove circular clip from shaft 5. Remove boot from shaft UE, 6. Clean old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper towels while rotating ball cage. ASSEMBLY FAX-108 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] Transaxle Assembly Side 1. Wrap serration on shaft with tape @ to protect boot from dam- age. Install new boot and boot bands to shaft CAUTION: Never reuse boot and boot band. 2. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft. 3. To install the spider assembly @, align it with the matching marks @ on the shaft @ put during the removal, and direct the serration mounting surface ® to the shaft 4. Secure spider assembly onto shaft with snap ring @. CAUTION: Never reuse snap ring. 5. Apply the appropriate amount of grease to spider assembly and sliding surface. 6. Assemble the housing onto spider assembly, and apply the bal ance of the specified amount grease. Grease amount __: Refer to FAX-137. “Drive Shaft”. 7. Align matching marks put during the removal of housing. " rowuiee 8. Install stopper ring. CAUTION: Never reuse stopper ring. 9. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks) shown inthe figure. CAUTION: vf If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated by “*” mark) on shaft or housing, boot may be removed. | Remove all grease from the surface. | 10. To prevent from deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installa~ U tion length to the value shown below (L) by inserting the suitable tool into the inside of boot from the large diameter side of boot and discharging inside air. Ss it : Refer to FAX-137, "Drive Shaft’. = CAUTION: + If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in boot. + Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of tool. 11, Install new boot bands securely. CAUTION: Never reuse boot band. FAX-109 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT (awo} @. Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawls (4) into holes to temporary installation, NOTE: For the large diameter side, fit projection @ and guide slit @ at first. Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band, Insert tip of band below end of the paw! 12 Ss Secure housing and shaft, and then make sure that they are in the correct position when rotating boot. Install them with new boot band when the mounting positions become incorrect. 13. Install dust shield (left side), CAUTION: Never reuse dust shield. Install circular clip to housing (left side), CAUTION: Never reuse circular clip. ‘Support Bearing 1. Install dust shield on housing CAUTION: Never reuse dust shield. Press support bearing @ onto housing to using the suitable tool (a) Install snap ring. CAUTION: Never reuse snap ring. 14 FAX-110 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4, Install dust shields. CAUTION: Never reuse dust shields. Dynamic Damper + Install damper bands securely as shown in the figure, + Secure dynamic damper with bands in the following specified posi- tion when removing, CAUTION: Never reuse bands. Demission + Refer to FAX-137. "Drive Shaft”. Wheel Side [4wo] For further details, refer to the installation procedure of "EAX-79. "MR20DD Removal and installation” for the drive shaft boot MR20DD : Inspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL + Move joint up/down, leftright, and in the axial directions. Check for motion that is not smooth and for signifi- cant looseness. * Check boot for cracks, damage, and leakage of grease. + Disassemble drive shaft and exchange malfunctioning part if there is a non-standard condition, ae INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY FAX-111 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo} Shaft Check shaff for runout, cracks, or other damage. Replace if there are Dynamic Damper Check damper for cracks or wear. Replace if necessary. Joint Sub-Assembly (Wheel Side) Check the following + Joint sub-assembly for rough rotation and excessive axial looseness. + The inside of the joint sub-assembly for entry of foreign material + Joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks. and fractures inside of joint sub-assembly Replace joint sub-assembly if there are any non-standard conditions of components, Housing and Spider assembly (Transaxle Side) Replace housing and spider assembly if there is scratching or wear of housing roller contact surface or spider roller contact surface. NOTE: Housing and spider assembly are used in a set. ‘Support Bearing (Right Side) ‘Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. Replace support bearing if there are any non-standard conditions. ‘Support Bearing Bracket (Right Side) Check for bending, cracks, or damage. Replace support bearing bracket if there are any non-standard condi- tions. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 4. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection, Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR. Exploded Vie 2. Check the wheel alignment, Refer to ESU-6, "Inspection", 3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-99, ‘Wark Procedure QR25DE QR25DE : Exploded View erveenewecremuas LEFT SIDE [sEC.391 ® Ciruar ef ® dustshiers @ Housing @ Snap cing ® Spider assembly ® Stopper sing @® Bootband ® Boot @ shat @ _Damperband @® Dynamic damper ® soint sub-assembly FAX-112 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wp) @ Dostshis 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24. "FRONT - Exploded View", * RHD: Refer to BR-88. "FRONT : Exploded View". 4. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMI ‘ON TYPE} | Re : + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBL\ a E) : Removal and Installation” + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON ov and Installation”. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116."" lation" CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and installation’. 6. Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000). 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NoTt Use suitable puller if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure. 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut 9. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to ESU-17, "Removal 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle, Refer to S1-22. "Removal and Installation’. FAX-114 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 71. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12. Remove drive shaft from transaxle assembly. + Use the drive shaft attachment (A) (SST: KV40107500) and a sliding hammer (B) (commercial service tool) while inserting tip of the drive shaft attachment between housing and tran- saxle assembly, CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. * Confirm that the circular clip is attached to the drive shaft. Right Side 1. Remove tires. Refer to WI:61. "Removal and Installation’. 2. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle, Refer to BRC-! and Installation’. 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. * LHD: Refer to BR-24, "FRONT - Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to BR-68, "FRONT ; Exploded View", 4. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) . Removal + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) . Removal and Installation". + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, " A IN a and installation". + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116, "BRA\ Pr Y (2 PISTON TYPE) : Rer sand Installatio CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 5. Remove disc rotor. Refer to F FAX-115 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] 6 Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000) 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NOTE: Use suitable puller, if whee! hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even afier performing the above pro- cedure, 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut. 9, Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member, Refer to FSU-17. "Removal and installation’, 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle, Refer to ST-22. "i installation’. ‘11. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12, Remove retainer mounting bolts and retainer. 13. Remove drive shaft from transfer assembly. + Use the drive shaft attachment (SST: KV40107500) and a sliding hammer while inserting tip of the drive shaft attachment between housing and transfer assembly. CAUTION: Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. 14. If necessary, remove the support bearing bracket mounting bolts and the support bearing bracket INSTALLATION Left Side Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: Iways replace differential side oil seal with new one when installing drive shaft. Refer to TN-429. “Removal and Installation”. FAX-116 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] * Place the protector (A) (SST: KV38107900) onto transaxle assem- bly to prevent damage to the differential side oil seal while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install securely. CAUTION: + Check that circular clip is completely engaged. + Never reuse differential side oil seal. Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub an CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bear- ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface @ of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 1.0- 3.0 g (0.04- 0.10 oz) Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to £ CAUTION: * Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the ti hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub fock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. 72." ightening torque range for the wheel + Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-123, "QR25DE : Inspection”. Right Side Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: Always replace transfer cover oil seal (inner) and transfer cove installing drive shaft. Refer to DLN-79." ft FAX-117 F oll seal (outer) with new one when FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] * Place the protector (A) (SST. KV38107900) onto transfer assembly to prevent damage to the transfer cover oil seal (inner) and transfer cover oil seal (outer) while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft ry sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install securely. CAUTION: Li Never reuse transfer cover oil seal (inner) and transfer cover il seal (outer). + When installing support bearing bracket tighten the mounting bolt with the following procedure. ~ To install support bearing bracket @ and mounting bolts, tempo- rarily tighten the bolts before tightening to the specified torque, referring to the tightening method and the numerical order shown below’ Temporary tahtening 492 Final tightening (Specied torque) 3944549657 ~ Set plate @ so thet the notch part @ becomes upper side. CAUTION: Never reuse plate. - Temporarily tighten the bolts before tightening to the specified torque, referring to the tightening method and the numerical order shown below: Temporary tightening Bae Final tightening (Specified torque) 04 + Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matchi ig surface. + Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and whee! hub and bear- ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface @ of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft, Amount paste: 1.0 - 3.0g (0.04-0.10 oz) * Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to FAX-72 "Exploded View". ‘CAUTION: + Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. FAX-118 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT <= REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [awo] * When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles. CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. @ vo | * Perform inspection after installation. Refer to EAX-123, “QR25DE _ Inspection’, QR25DE : Disassembly and Assembly wcwowareo ess DISASSEMBLY Transaxle Assembly Side 4. Fixshaft with a vise CAUTION: Protect shaft using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise. 2. Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from housing. Remove stopper ring 4. Put matching marks on housing and shaft, and then pull out housing from shaft. CAUTION: Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Never scratch the surfaces. 5. Put matching marks @ on the spider assembly and shaft. CAUTION: Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Never scratch the surfaces. 6. Remove snap ring @, and then remove spider assembly from shaft 7. Remove boot from shaft 8. Remove circular clip from housing (eft side). 9. Remove dust shield from housing, 10. Clean old grease on housing with paper waste ‘Support Bearing FAX-119 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT (awo] 1. Remove dust shield from housing. 2. Remove snap ring @. 3. Press out support bearing from housing, 4. Remove dust shield Dynamic Damper Remove damper bands, then remove dynamic damper from shaft. Wheel Side 1. Fix shaft with a vise, CAUTION: art Protect shaft using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise. 2, Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from joint sub-assembly. 3. Sorew drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service tool) into joint sub-assembly screw part fo a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more, Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assem- bly from sha. CAUTION: + If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more unsuccessful attempts, replace shaft and joint sub assembly as a set. + Align sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them by Pulling directory. 4. Remove circular clip from shaft 5. Remove boot from shaft UE, 6. Clean old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper towels while rotating ball cage. ASSEMBLY FAX-120 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] Transaxle Assembly Side 1. Wrap serration on shaft with tape @ to protect boot from dam- age. Install new boot and boot bands to shaft CAUTION: Never reuse boot and boot band. 2. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft. 3. To install the spider assembly @, align it with the matching marks @ on the shaft @ put during the removal, and direct the serration mounting surface ® to the shaft 4. Secure spider assembly onto shaft with snap ring @. CAUTION: Never reuse snap ring. 5. Apply the appropriate amount of grease to spider assembly and sliding surface. 6. Assemble the housing onto spider assembly, and apply the bal ance of the specified amount grease. Grease amount __: Refer to FAX-137. “Drive Shaft”. 7. Align matching marks put during the removal of housing. " rowuiee 8. Install stopper ring. CAUTION: Never reuse stopper ring. 9. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks) shown inthe figure. CAUTION: vf If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated by “*” mark) on shaft or housing, boot may be removed. | Remove all grease from the surface. | 10. To prevent from deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installa~ U tion length to the value shown below (L) by inserting the suitable tool into the inside of boot from the large diameter side of boot and discharging inside air. Ss it : Refer to FAX-137, "Drive Shaft’. = CAUTION: + If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in boot. + Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of tool. 11, Install new boot bands securely. CAUTION: Never reuse boot band. FAX-121 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT (awo} @. Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawls (4) into holes to temporary installation, NOTE: For the large diameter side, fit projection @ and guide slit @ at first. Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band, Insert tip of band below end of the paw! 12 Ss Secure housing and shaft, and then make sure that they are in the correct position when rotating boot. Install them with new boot band when the mounting positions become incorrect. 13. Install dust shield (left side), CAUTION: Never reuse dust shield. Install circular clip to housing (left side), CAUTION: Never reuse circular clip. ‘Support Bearing 1. Install dust shield on housing CAUTION: Never reuse dust shield. Press support bearing @ onto housing to using the suitable tool (a) Install snap ring. CAUTION: Never reuse snap ring. 14 FAX-122 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 4, Install dust shields. CAUTION: Never reuse dust shields. Dynamic Damper + Install damper bands securely as shown in the figure, + Secure dynamic damper with bands in the following specified posi- tion when removing, CAUTION: Never reuse bands. Demission + Refer to FAX-137. "Drive Shaft”. Wheel Side [4wo] For further details, refer to the installation procedure of "FAX-86. "OR25DE - Removal and installation" for the drive shaft boot QR25DE : Inspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL + Move joint up/down, leftright, and in the axial directions. Check for motion that is not smooth and for signifi- cant looseness. * Check boot for cracks, damage, and leakage of grease. + Disassemble drive shaft and exchange malfunctioning part if there is a non-standard condition, ae INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY FAX-123 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT <= REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wp) Shat Check shaff for runout, cracks, or other damage. Replace if there are Dynamic Damper Check damper for cracks or wear. Replace if necessary. Joint Sub-Assembly (Wheel Side) Check the following + Joint sub-assembly for rough rotation and excessive axial looseness. + The inside of the joint sub-assembly for entty of foreign material + Joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks. and fractures inside of joint sub-assembly Replace joint sub-assembly if there are any non-standard conditions of components, Housing and Spider assembly (Transaxle Side) Replace housing and spider assembly if there is scratching or wear of housing roller contact surface or spider roller contact surface. NOTE: Housing and spider assembly are used in a set. ‘Support Bearing (Right Side) ‘Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. Replace support bearing if there are any non-standard conditions. ‘Support Bearing Bracket (Right Side) Check for bending, cracks, or damage. Replace support bearing bracket if there are any non-standard condi- tions. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1 snsor harness for proper connection, Refer to BRC-212, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR 2. Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-8, "Inspection". 3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-99, ‘Wark Procedure ROM ROM : Exploded View roeeneecoente| LEFT SIDE SEC. 391 ® Circular of ® dust shies @ Housing @ Snap cing ® Spider assembly ® Stopper sing @® Bootbana ® Boot @ shat @ Damper band @® Dynamic damper @® soint sub-assembly FAX-124 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] @ Dust shieis <3 Wheel side EBS + FI NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent ‘Apply paste [service pats (440087S000)] (2h Always replace ater every cisassembly RIGHT SIDE SEC. 391 aI) | &@ @® dust shies ® Joint sub-assembly @ Crreviar ap ® Bootband © Boot @ shah @ Seppe ring @© Spider assembly @ snap ting @ Housing @ Oustshietd ® Support bearing @ Retainer @ Suppor bearing bracket @ Heat insulator <3 Wheel side Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent Apply paste [service parts (440037S000)) Ph. vm thom, tb) (Gs: Alnaysrepace ater every isassembiy R9M : Removal and Installation sro cmnmenots REMOVAL Left Side 1. Remove tires. Refer to WI-61, "Removal and Installation’, 2. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRO-212. 'FRONT WHEEL SENSOR * Removal and Installation" FAX-125 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. + LHD: Refer to BR-24. "FRONT - Exploded View", * RHD: Refer to BR-88. "FRONT : Exploded View". 4. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMI ‘ON TYPE} | Re : + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBL\ a E) : Removal and Installation” + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON ov and Installation”. + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116."" lation" CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-72, "Removal and installation’. 6. Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000). 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NoTt Use suitable puller if wheel hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro- cedure. 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut 9. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member. Refer to ESU-17, "Removal 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle, Refer to S1-22. "Removal and Installation’. FAX-126 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > 71. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12. Remove drive shaft from transaxle assembly. + Use the drive shaft attachment (A) (SST: KV40107500) and a sliding hammer (B) (commercial service tool) while inserting tip of the drive shaft attachment between housing and tran- saxle assembly, CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. * Confirm that the circular clip is attached to the drive shaft. Right Side 1. Remove tires. Refer to WI:61. "Removal and Installation’. 2. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle, Refer to BRC-! and Installation’. 3. Remove lock plate @ from strut assembly. * LHD: Refer to BR-24, "FRONT - Exploded View". + RHD: Refer to BR-68, "FRONT ; Exploded View", 4. Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work + LHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-51, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (1 PISTON TYPE) . Removal + LHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-56, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) . Removal and Installation". + RHD (1 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-111, " A IN a and installation". + RHD (2 PISTON TYPE): Refer to BR-116, "BRA\ Pr Y (2 PISTON TYPE) : Rer sand Installatio CAUTION: Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 5. Remove disc rotor. Refer to F FAX-127 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] 6 Remove cotter pin, adjusting cap and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a hub lock nut wrench (A) (SST: KV40104000) 7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the wood to disengage wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft NOTE: Use suitable puller, if whee! hub and bearing assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even afier performing the above pro- cedure, 8. Remove wheel hub lock nut. 9, Remove transverse link from steering knuckle and front suspension member, Refer to FSU-17. "Removal and installation’, 10. Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle, Refer to ST-22. "i installation’. ‘11. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: + Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. + Be careful not to overextend slide joint. 12, Remove retainer mounting bolts and retainer. 13. Remove drive shaft from transaxle assembly. + Use the drive shaft attachment (SST: KV40107500) and a sliding hammer while inserting tip of the drive shaft attachment between housing and transaxle assembly CAUTION: Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint. 14. If necessary, remove the support bearing bracket mounting bolts, support bearing bracket and the heat insulator. INSTALLATION Left Side Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION: Always replace differential side oll seal with new one when installing drive shaft. Refer to TM-119, “Removal and Installation”. FAX-128 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] * Place the protector (A) (SST: KV38107900) onto transaxle assem- bly to prevent damage to the differential side oil seal while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install securely. CAUTION: + Check that circular clip is completely engaged. + Never reuse differential side oil seal. Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub an CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bear- ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface @ of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 1.0- 3.0 g (0.04- 0.10 oz) Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to £ CAUTION: * Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the ti hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub fock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap @, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. 72." ightening torque range for the wheel + Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-135, "ROM : Inspection’ Right Side Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Always replace differential side oil seal with new one when installing drive shaft. Refer to TM-118, “Removal and Installation”. FAX-129 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wD] + Place the protector (A) (SST: KV38107900) onto transaxle assem- bly to prevent damage to the differential side oll seal while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with @ hammer to install securely, CAUTION: Never reuse differential side oil seal. + When installing support bearing bracket tighten the mounting bolt with the following procedure. - To install support bearing bracket @ and mounting bolts, tempo- rarily tighten the bolts before tightening to the specified torque, referring to the tightening method and the numerical order shown below: 142 344 Temporary tanning Final tightening (Specied torave) ~ Set plate @ so thet the notch part @) becomes upper side. ‘CAUTION: Never reuse plate. ey 1a - Temporarily tighten the bolts before tightening to the specified torque, referring to the tightening method and the numerical order shown below: 536 7398 Temporary tightening Final tightening (Specifed torave) + Instal the heat insulator @ to touch a projection @ of the bracket @ ‘as shown in figure. + Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub an: CAUTION: Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface. + Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub and bear- ing assembly. And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface @) of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. ‘CAUTION: Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft. Amount paste: 1.0-3.0.g (0.04 0.10 oz) \d bearing assembly FAX-130 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [awo] = Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to FAX-72, "Exploded View CAUTION: + Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel hub lock nut. + Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool. + Never reuse wheel hub lock nut. When installing a cotter pin @ and adjusting cap ®, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles. CAUTION: Never reuse cotter pin. + Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-135. "! ection”. ROM : Disassembly and Assembly wei DISASSEMBLY Transaxle Assembly Side 1. Fix shaft with a vise. CAUTION: Protect shaft using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise. 2, Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from housing Remove stopper ring 4. Put matching marks on housing and shaft, and then pull out housing from shaft CAUTION: Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Never scratch the surface: 5. Put matching marks @ on the spider assembly and shaft CAUTION: Use paint or an eqt scratch the surfaces. lent for matching marks. Never 6. Remove snap ring @, and then remove spider assembly from shaft. Remove boot from shaft. Remove circular clip from housing (left side), Remove dust shield from housing, 0, Clean old grease on housing with paper waste ‘Support Bearing FAX-131 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT (awo] 1. Remove dust shield from housing. 2. Remove snap ring @. 3. Press out support bearing from housing, 4. Remove dust shield Dynamic Damper (if equipped) Remove damper bands, then remove dynamic damper from shaft. Wheel Side 1. Fix shaft with a vise, CAUTION: art Protect shaft using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise. 2, Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from joint sub-assembly. 3. Sorew drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service tool) into joint sub-assembly screw part fo a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more, Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assem- bly from sha. CAUTION: + If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more unsuccessful attempts, replace shaft and joint sub assembly as a set. + Align sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them by Pulling directory. 4. Remove circular clip from shaft 5. Remove boot from shaft UE, 6. Clean old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper towels while rotating ball cage. ASSEMBLY FAX-132 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] Transaxle Assembly Side 1. Wrap serration on shaft with tape @ to protect boot from dam- age. Install new boot and boot bands to shaft CAUTION: Never reuse boot and boot band. 2. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft. 3. To install the spider assembly @, align it with the matching marks @ on the shaft @ put during the removal, and direct the serration mounting surface ® to the shaft 4. Secure spider assembly onto shaft with snap ring @. CAUTION: Never reuse snap ring. 5. Apply the appropriate amount of grease to spider assembly and sliding surface. 6. Assemble the housing onto spider assembly, and apply the bal ance of the specified amount grease. Grease amount __: Refer to FAX-137. “Drive Shaft”. 7. Align matching marks put during the removal of housing. " rowuiee 8. Install stopper ring. CAUTION: Never reuse stopper ring. 9. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks) shown inthe figure. CAUTION: vf If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated by “*” mark) on shaft or housing, boot may be removed. | Remove all grease from the surface. | 10. To prevent from deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installa~ U tion length to the value shown below (L) by inserting the suitable tool into the inside of boot from the large diameter side of boot and discharging inside air. Ss it : Refer to FAX-137, "Drive Shaft’. = CAUTION: + If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage in boot. + Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of tool. 11, Install new boot bands securely. CAUTION: Never reuse boot band. FAX-133 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT (awo} @. Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawls (4) into holes to temporary installation, NOTE: For the large diameter side, fit projection @ and guide slit @ at first. Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band, Insert tip of band below end of the paw! 12 Ss Secure housing and shaft, and then make sure that they are in the correct position when rotating boot. Install them with new boot band when the mounting positions become incorrect. 13. Install dust shield (left side), CAUTION: Never reuse dust shield. Install circular clip to housing (left side), CAUTION: Never reuse circular clip. ‘Support Bearing 1. Install dust shield on housing CAUTION: Never reuse dust shield. Press support bearing @ onto housing to using the suitable tool (a) Install snap ring. CAUTION: Never reuse snap ring. 14 FAX-134 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [4wo] 4, Install dust shields. CAUTION: Never reuse dust shields. Dynamic Damper (tf equipped ) + Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot, Then fit pawis (4 into holes to temporary installation, Nort For the large diameter side, fit projection @ and guide slit @ at first + Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band. + Insert tip of band below end of the pawl * Secure dynamic damper with bands in the following specified posi- tion when removing CAUTION: Never reuse bands. Demission + Refer to FAX-137. "Drive Shaft". Wheel Side For further details, refer o the installation procedure of “EAX-86, "QR25DE - Removal and Installallon™ for the drive shaft boot, ROM : Inspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL * Move joint up/down, leftright, and in the axial directions. Check for motion that is not smooth and for signifi- cant looseness. FAX-135 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [awn] * Check boot for cracks, damage, and leakage of grease. * Disassemble drive shaft and exchange malfunctioning part if there is a non-standard condition. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Shaft Check shaft for runout, cracks, or other damage. Replace if there are. Dynamic Damper (If equipped) Check damper for cracks or wear, Replace if necessary. Joint Sub-Assembly (Wheel Side) Check the following: + Joint sub-assembly for rough rotation and excessive axial looseness + The inside of the joint sub-assembly for entry of foreign material + Joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks, and fractures inside of joint sub-assembly Replace joint sub-assembly if there are any non-standard conditions of components Housing and Spider assembly (Transaxle Side) Replace housing and spider assembly if there is scratching or wear of housing roller contact surface or spider roller contact surface. NOTE: Housing and spider assembly are used in a set. Support Bearing (Right Side) Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. Replace support bearing if there are any non-standard conditions. ‘Support Bearing Bracket (Right Side} Check for bending, cracks, or damage. Replace support bearing bracket if there are any non-standard condi- tions. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check wheel sensor hamess for proper connection. Refer to BRC-212. "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR = 2. Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-8, inspection’. 3. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-99. "Work Procedure!’ FAX-136 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [aw] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing eT Talend pay DoS mm OOO Mores Drive Shaft phn oe ex T Sandee ter poser cure weer Tete Rint ece Wheel ade | TE= 105g (ADS- A TOO Grease quantty Transane se W75~ 195g (18-687 oz) = ~ | nee! sae 144.5 mm (657 im) insta length Bose peed fet ‘Transaxle side 196.9 mm (7.75 in) 188.9 mm (7.44 in) [a F3—7ramm (10 75= 1086) | 24S =249mm (857 -8.60in) Dimension of namic camper | = - aa : For measuring position. Refer to FAX-107, "MR20DD ° Disassembly and Assembly". QR25DE T Sandee tem fe I Tete Tignes Wheels FE= 1g ADS A TORT Grease quanly Transaie se T75~ 1889 (618-6870) Whee ide TAS mm ATI) instaed | _ " = Biota a, ‘Transaxle side 196.9 mm (7.75 in) 188.9 mm {7.44 in} [a 240— 246 mm (945 9.66 in) Parenmornat iheamle dariper’ 5: 70 mm (2.76 in) ‘60 mm (1.97 In) *: For measuring position. Refer to FAX-119. "QR25DE : Disassembly and Assembly". ROM Sandee tem Tete Rint Wheel ade) WS WISH aR Grease quentty Transaie side 765 = 285 g (935 10.08 az) : Whee aide 145 mm (B7AIn) instaled — ae ae Ets a oe Boots installed length rareasatail in Teh. mm (725) [a 207 =279 mm (6.15 - 6.391) = mension of namic camper’ | * tae = *: For measuring position. Refer to FAX-131, "ROM ; Disassembly and Assembly". FAX-137 ENGINE sconow F~ LI FUEL SYSTEM CONTENTS GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL PRECAUTION PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal 3 General Precautions 4 PREPARATION PREPARATION ‘Special Service Tools SYSTEM DESCRIPTION SYSTEM WARNING/INDICATOR (ON INFORMATION DIS- PLAY) ‘WARNING/INDICATOR (ON INFORMATION DISPLAY) : Low fuel warning 6 WARNINGIINDICATORICHIME LIST WARNINGIINDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning’ Indicator (On information Display) 7 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .. FUEL SYSTEM Hydraulic Layout Inspection Quick Connector REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ... FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Exploded View Removal and Installation Disassembly and Assembly Inspection FUEL TANK .. 8 8 9 9 Exploded View 24 Removal and Installation 21 Inspection 2 EVAP CANISTER Hydraulic Layout Removal and Installation Inspection SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (sDs) ‘SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS, (SDS) Fuel Tank. DIESEL ENGINE MODEL PRECAUTION ... PRECAUTIONS Precautions far Remaving Battery Terminal General Precautions PREPARATION ... PREPARATION .. Special Service Tools SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ... COMPONENT PARTS .. Fuel Filter Sensor STRUCTURE AND OPERATION FUEL TRANSPORTATION IN FUEL TANK FUEL TRANSPORTATION IN FUEL TAN} tem Description SYSTEM .. WARNING/INDICATOR (ON INFORMATION DIS- PLAY) FLA WARNING/INDICATOR (ON INFORMATION DISPLAY) : Low fuel warning WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST sn WARNING/INDICATORICHIME LIST : Wet lamps/Indicator lamps WARNING/INDICATORICHIME LIST : Werning! Indicator (On Information Display) PERIODIC MAINTENANCE FUEL SYSTEM Hydraulic Layout Inspection Air Bleeding (Quick Connector FUEL FILTER Exploded View Removal and instalation Draining Water from Fuel Filter Inspection io Ss8Ses RaBes FB BBE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Exploded View Removal and installation Disassembly and Assembly Inspection FUEL TANK .... Exploded View Removal and Installation Inspection SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .. ‘SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (sDs) 54 Fuel Tank st 51 FL-2 PRECAUTIONS. < PRECAUTION > = [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] PRECAUTION a PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal wocooneicorser [ae * With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key of remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, ie. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time. + When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, tum off the ACC . EZ) power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing “How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below. NOTE: Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC detection or ECU data damage may occur. * For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat- tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch NOTE: If the ignition switeit is turned ON with any one of the terminals of ‘main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected * After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result’ of all ECUs and erase DTC. NOTE: The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error. HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 o Instruction 2 described below. For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2 INSTRUCTION 4 4. Open the hood. 2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened. 3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. 4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse. of the specified time. DéDengine 20 minutes HRA2ODT 12 minutes KoK engine :4 minutes MOR engine 4 minutes ROM engine © 4 minutes 9x engine: 4 minutes CAUTION: While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. 5. Remove 12V battery terminal. CAUTION: After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF) 4. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry, NOT! Atthis moment, ACC power is supplied Open the driver side door Open the hood, Close the driver side door. Walt at least 3 minutes. wRoN FL-3 PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] ‘CAUTION: While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. 6. Remove 12V battery terminal CAUTION: After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC, General Precautions rocco WARNING: When replacing fuel line parts, be sure to observe the following. + Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in the workshop. + Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and furnish workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. + Never smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work area. CAUTION: + Use gasoline required by the regulations for octane number. Refer to Gi-30, “Fuel”. + Before removing fuel line parts, perform out the following procedures: ~ Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put the lid on securely. Keep the container in safe area. ~ Release fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-152, "Work Procedure" (MR20DD) or EC-558, "Work Procedure” (QR25DE). Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. * Always replace O-ring and clamps with new ones. + Never kink or twist tubes when they are being installed. + Never tighten hose clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses. + After installing tubes, check there is no fuel leakage at connections in the following steps. ~ Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leakage at connections. - Start engine and rev it up and check for fuel leakage at connections. + Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the “MIL” may come on. FL-4 < PREPARATION > PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools Tool number Tool name KVi01207S0 Unifie fuel look sing wrench PREPARATION [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] —— Removing and installing lock ring Description SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] SYSTEM DESCRIPTION SYSTEM WARNING/INDICATOR (ON INFORMATION DISPLAY) WARNING/INDICATOR (ON INFORMATION DISPLAY) : Low fuel warning wrscavwassrns DESIGN/PURPOSE This warns the driver that the fuel level is low. OPERATION AT COMBINATION METER CAN COMMUNICATION CUT-OFF OR UNUSUAL SIG- NAL For the operation for CAN communications blackout or abnormal signal reception, refer to MWI-19. "METER ‘SYSTEM : Fail-Safe". SYSTEM DIAGRAM SIGNAL PATH The combination meter receives fuel level sensor signal (resistance value) from the fuel level sensor unit and indicates low fuel level warning on the vehicle information display when fuel level sensor signal (resistance value) is less than the specified value. LIGHTING CONDITION When all of the following conditions are satisfied: + After a lapse of 15 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON, + Fuel level is lower than the specified level. jevel waming indication timing (Vehicle Parked on the level) Approx. 10.8 2-3/8 imp gal) or less (fuel tank dead amount included) Fuel level Fuel tank dead amount AprOX. 2.8.0 (2-48 Imp at) SHUTOFF CONDITION When any of the following conditions was satisfied: + Ignition switch is OFF. + Fuel level is the specified level or more. WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST FL SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning/Indicator (On Information Display) cae = amare FL-7 FUEL SYSTEM < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] PERIODIC MAINTENANCE FUEL SYSTEM Hydraulic Layout “nme cesconrm MR20DD models EVAP canister purge volume contr é VAP line (Fuel tank to EVAP canis- solenoid valve Fuel feed line a @ Fue! level sensor unit, uel fter and fue! pump assembly Grae @ @ Svbtuelevesensorassemby — ® ® VAP line (EVAP canister to EVAP @ Fus' ier tube EVAP canister ® canister purge volume control sole- noid valve) ® View i) CAUTION: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses. FLS FUEL SYSTEM < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL} GR25DE models VAP canister purge volume control VAP tne (Fuel tank to EVAP canis- © ‘solenoid vave @ Foci eed tine © ter) Fuel level sensor unit uel iter and. @ Subuelievel sensor assembly —@) iam seer @ Fuel tank EVAP line (EVAP canister to EVAP @® Feel filer tube @ EVAP canister @ canister purge volume control sole- noid vai) View CAUTION: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses. Inspection alma Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap, and fuel tank for improper attach- ment, leakage, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or dete- Fioration ® Engine @ | Fueltine © Fueltank If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts. Quick Connector trocawercnorees CAUTION: FL-9 FUEL SYSTEM < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] + After connecting fuel tube quick connectors, check quick con- nectors are secure. Quick connector Retainer Hard tube (or the equivalent) Connection (cross-section) Resin tube To underfloor fuel ine ®80e8880 To fuel tank Tab o@ Disconnection + Ensure that connector and resin tube never contact any adja- cent parts. FL-10 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL} REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Exploded View felonies REMOVAL SEC. 172 @ Lock ring @ Subuel level sensor assembly @_O-ring Fue! level sensor uit, fuel fiter and Gy Fost. © uel pump assemoiy <3: Vehicle front 9 : Aways replace ater every disassembly DISASSEMBLY FL-11 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] SEC. 172 © Fuel er and fuel urn aesembly @ Fuel level sensor unit Removal and Installation ciara WARNING: Read “General Precautions” when working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-4. "General Precautions". REMOVAL CAUTION: Perform the operation with vehicle on level ground. 1, Release fuel pressure, Refer to EC-152, "Work Procedure” (MR20DD) or EC-558_ “Work Procedure" (QR2508) 2. Check fuel level on a level ground. If the fuel level is 7/8 of the fuel tank (full or nearly full), draw appropri- ate amount of fuel from the fuel tank, Guideline: Draw approximately 10 liters (2-1/4 Imp gal) from a full-tank condition. + In the event of maifunction in fuel pump, insert a hose measuring 20 mm (0.79 in) in diameter into the filler opening to draw approximately 10 liters (2-1/4 Imp gal) fuel. Open fuel filler tid Open the fuel filer cap and release the pressure inside the fuel tank. Remove rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-52, "Exploded View". Remove inspection hole cover. + Using a screwdriver, remove it by turning clips clockwise by 90 degrees. Disconnect hamess connector @ and quick connector ®. oa ~ @ Fst feed tube @® Fuel evel sensor unt uel iter and fuel pump assembly <2 Vehicle ont Disconnect auick connector as follows: FL-12 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] + Hold the sides of connector, push in tabs @ and pull out fuel feed tube. ® Pu + If quick connector sticks to tube of fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly, push and pull quick connector several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling, CAUTION: Quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs © are completely depressed. Never twist it more than neces- sary. ® - Connection cross-section) © Tounder Foor fuel ine © ‘Tote tank @ : Disconnection + Never use any tools to disconnected quick connector. + Keep resin tube © away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the resin tube. + Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, etc. from getting on resin tube. + Never bend or twist resin tube during installation and dis- connection. + Never remove the remaining retainer @ on hard tube (or the equivalent) @® except when resin tube or retainer Is, replaced. + When resin tube or hard tube (or the equivalent) is replaced, also replace retainer with new one. + To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid dam- age and foreign materials, cover them completely with plastic bags @) or something B. Remove lock ring according to the following instructions: FL-13 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] 10. install pawl (B) of unified fuel lock ring wrench [SST 10120750] (A) to the position shown in the figure. Temporarily tighten mounting bolt (B) of the paw! according to the measurement (R) from the center of unified fuel lock ring wrench [SST: KV101207S0] (A) to the end of pawl (C). R :82mm (3.23 in) Set unified fuel lock ring wrench [SST KV101207S0) (A) to lock pawl, Remove lock ring CAUTION + To prevent lock ring wrench from being detached, securely hold down spinner handle (B) by hand. + To reduce impact caused by removal operation, use long spinner handle [handle length: 60 cm (23.62 in) or more] and slowly turn it counterclockwise. Raise fuel level sensor unit, fuel fiter and fuel pump assembly. CAUTION: * Never bend float arm during removal. ‘ing and tighten the mounting bolt of the + Never pollute the inside by residue fuel. Draw out avoiding inclination by supporting with a cloth. + Never cause impacts such by dropping when handling components. Separate fuel tube 25 per the following steps to remove fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly, + Pinch quick connector @) square-part with your fingers, and pull out the quick connector by hand. + If quick connector and tube on sender unit are stuck, push several times until they move, and pull out. NOTE: ‘When separating the fuel tube, tle a gasoline-resistance rope to the tip of the fuel tube and leave the rope on the fuel tank side to easily pull the fuel tube for installation, FL44 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > * Disconnect harness connector ®, Sub Fuel Level Sensor Assembly 1. Remove fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly. 2, Remove lock ring according to the following instructions: a. Install pawi (B) of unified fuel lock ring wrench [SST: KV101207S0] (A) to the position shown in the figure b. Temporarily tighten mounting bolt (B) of the pawl according to the measurement (R) from the center of unified fuel lock ring wrench [SST: KV101207S0] (A) to the end of pawl (C). R :82mm (3.23 in) [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] Vm Ya \ Le. ¢. ©. Set unified fuel lock ring wrench [SST: KV101207S0] (A) to lock ring and tighten the mounting bolt of the aw 4. Remove lock ring. CAUTION; To prevent lock ring wrench from being detached, securely hold down spinner handle (B) by hand, + To reduce impact caused by removal operation, use long spinner handle [handle length: 60 cm (23.62 in) or more] and slowly turn it counterclockwise. FL-15 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY <= REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] 3. Remove sub fuel level sensor assembly ©. CAUTION: + Never disassemble a fuel tube @ from sub fuel sensor assembly. + Never bend float arm during removal + Never pollute the inside by residue fuel. Draw out avoid- 1g inclination by supporting with a cloth. + Never cause impacts such by dropping when handling components. NOTE: Tie a gasoline-resistance rope to a tip of the tube, Draw and r dina leave the rope to the fuel tank side so that the rope can be the guide for installation, INSTALLATION Note to the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. ‘Sub Fuel Level Sensor Assembly 1. Install new O-ring to fuel tank without any twist CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings. 2. Using the rope left on the fuel tank side at removal, run the fuel tube inside the fuel tank to install the sub fuel level sensor assembly to the fuel tank. CAUTION: + Never bend float arm during installation. + To install, fuel tube @ must run to the front (<) of the vehicle to avoid the interference with the float arm @, as shown in the figure. 3. Install the sub fuel level sensor assembly on the fuel tank with the sub fuel level sensor assembly top surface @ faced the front of the vehicle [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] Install lock ring for sub fuel level sensor assembly with unified fuel lock ring wrench [SST:KV101207S0] by turning clockwise. ‘CAUTION + Install lock ring horizontally. + Turn the lock ring @ until it is engaged in the fuel tank side ® as shown in the figure. Fuel Level Sensor Unit, Fuel Filter and Fuel Pump Assembly 41, Install new O-ring to fuel tank without any twist. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings. 2. Connect the fuel tube as per the following steps. * Insert the quick connector @ straight to the fuel level sensor unit, fue! filter and fuel pump assembly. + Judge a good fit from connecting sound and tactile feedback. + Pull the fuel tube by hand to check a secure fit 3. Connect harness connector ®) FL-17 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL) a install the fuel level sensor unit, fuel fiter and fuel pump assem= bly on the fuel tank with the fue! level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly top surface @ faced the front of the vehicle. <2 Vehiale front CAUTION + Never allow seal packing to drop. + Never bend float arm during installing. + To install, fuel tube © must run to the front (<) of the vehicle to avoid the interference with the float arm @, as shown in the figure. Install lock ring for fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly with unified fuel lock ring wrench [SST:KV101207S0] by turing clockwise. CAUTION: + Install lock ring horizontally. + Turn the lock ring @ until it is engaged in the fuel tank side © as shown in the figure. Connect quick connector of fuel feed tube as per following pro- cedures, Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a “click” sound is heard. After connecting, check that the connection is secured with fol- lowing procedures, + Visually confirm that the two tabs are connected to the con- nector. FL-18 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] * Pull @ the tube and the connector to check that they are securely connected. 7. Connect hamess connector. Inspection Hole Gover + Before installing inspection hole cover, check that the connecting part has no fuel leakage. Refer to FL-20. inspection’ 1. Install inspection hole covers with the front mark (arrow) facing front of vehicle. 2. Lock clips by turing counterclockwise Disassembly and Assembly heme DISASSEMBLY 1, Disconnect fuel level sensor harness connector @). 2. Remove fuel level sensor from fuel fiter and fuel pump assembly, according to the following steps. @. Remove fuel level sensor harness from fuel filter and fuel pump assembly b. Press into paw! @ of fuel level sensor mounting area Tl ©. With the fuel level sensor unlocked, slide it in the direction ®. CAUTION: + Be careful not to damage the fuel level sensor. + Never disassemble fuel filter and fuel pump assembly. FL-19 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] ASSEMBLY 1, Install fuel level sensor all the way. Tactually and aurally check the fit 2. Connect fuel level sensor harness connector ®. 3. Install fuel level sensor harness to fuel fitier and fuel pump assembly. Inspection esos INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use: following procedure to check for fuel leakage 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped), then check connections:ar #akage by applying fuel pres- sure to fuel piping be 2. Start engine and let it idle and check there are no fuel leakage at the fuel sysiem connections. FL-20 FUEL TANK = REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL) FUEL TANK Exploded View eto SEC.172 \e 5.0051, 4) @ Ful tank band (RH) @ Fuel tank band (LH) @ Protector @ Fueltank @ Clamp @ Venthose @ Clamp ® Fusifilerhose @ Fuel fer tube @ Grommet @ Fuel flercap BL vm tig-m, ) Nem (kam, nt) Removal and Installation aaa WARNING: Be sure to read “General Precautions” when working on the fuel system. Refer to FL4, “General Pre- cautions”, REMOVAL 4. Perform the steps 1 to 7 of “REMOVAL in“ FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY". Refer to FL-12, "Removal and installation’ 2. Drain fuel from fuel tank if necessary. Refer to FL-12, "Removal and installation” CAUTION: + Because fuel tank forwardly inclines and becomes unstable when installing/removing, fuel should be drained if found the remaining quantity. + Situate vehicle on a flat and solid surface. 3. Remove main muffler. Refer to EX.6. "Exoloded View" (MR20DD) or EX-12. "Exploded View" (QR25DE), 4, Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-214. "Exploded View". (4WD models) 5. Remove protector from fuel tank. FL-21 FUEL TANK < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] 6. Disconnect vent hose @, EVAP tube @, and fuel filler hose @ at rear side of fuel tank <2 Vehicle front Instruction for quick connector @ of EVAP tube, Refer to FL- 12. "Removal and Installation". 7. Remove suspension bar. Refer to RSU-13, "Exploded View". (4WD models) 8. Support the lower part of fuel tank @ with transmission jack (A) ‘CAUTION: Support the position that fuel tank mounting bands nev- erengage. Remove fuel tank band (RH and LH). 10. Lower transmission jack carefully to remove fuel tank while holding it by hand. CAUTION: Fuel tank may be in an unstable condition because of the shape of fuel tank bottom. Never rely on jack too much. Be sure to hold tank securely. INSTALLATION Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. + Surely clamp fuel hoses and insert hose to the length below. Fuel filler hose £35 mm (1.38 in) The other hoses £25 mm (0.98 i + Be sure hose clamp is not placed on swelled area of fuel tube. + Tighten fuel filler hose clamp Remaining length of screw thread Specified torque Fuel filler tube side 7 - 11 mm (0.28 - 0.43 in) 2.5 Nem (0.26 kg-m, 22 in-Ib) Fuel tank side 5-8 mm (0.20 - 0.36 in) 2.5 Nem (0.26 kg-m, 22 in-Ib) + To connect quick connector, refer to FL-12, "Remo! Inspection Pee em INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leakage. 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped), and check connections for leakage by applying fuel pres- sure to fuel piping 2. Start engine and rev it up and check there are no fuel leakage at the fuel system tube and hose connec- tions, FL-22 EVAP CANISTER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL} EVAP CANISTER Hydraulic Layout weooeneronreer MR20DD models EEVAP canister purge volume contol EVAP tine (Fuel tank to EVAP canis~ © solenoid vee @ Fuel feed tne o © Subtelievelsensorassenby _@ fiellevel senso unite Mer 99d Fue ang VAP tine (EVAP canister to EVAP. @® Fuel filer woe @® EVAP canister @ canister purge volume contol sole- noid vaive) 8) | View i) CAUTION: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses. FL-23 EVAP CANISTER <= REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] ‘QR25DE models EEVAP canister purge volume contiel EVAP ne (Fuel tank fo EVAP canis- © Stood ate D Fed waive @ we Fuel evel sensor uit, fel fier and @ ‘Subtueileve sensor assemaly jaipur newer @® Foeltank EVAP line (EVAP canister to EVAP @ Fuel filertube ® EVAP canister ® canister purge volume control soe noid valve) B view CAUTION: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge ho: Removal and Installation ‘srooconmnorran REMOVAL 2 @ — :EVAP canister Remove EVAP canister, slide it upward. INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal, FL-24 EVAP CANISTER < REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] ‘CAUTION: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses. Inspection 00 coca. Check EVAP canister. Refer to EC-428, "Inspection" (MR20DD) or EC-804, “inspection” (@R25DE). FL-25 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) < SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [GASOLINE ENGINE MODEL] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Tank Standard and Limit Fuel tank capacity ‘Approx. 60 @ (13-218 imp gal) Refer to GIO Fue Fuel recommendation FL-26 PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > [DIESEL ENGINE MODEL] PRECAUTION i PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal wooooseccoreer: [aE * With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key of remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, ie. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time. + When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, tum off the ACC . EZ) power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing “How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below. NOTE: Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC detection or ECU data damage may occur. * For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat- tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch NOTE: If the ignition switeit is turned ON with any one of the terminals of ‘main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected * After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result’ of all ECUs and erase DTC. NOTE: The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error. HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to Instruction 1 o Instruction 2 described below. For vehicles parked by ignition switch OFF, refer to Instruction 2 INSTRUCTION 4 4. Open the hood. 2. Turn key switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened. 3. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. 4. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse. of the specified time. DéDengine 20 minutes HRA2ODT 12 minutes KoK engine :4 minutes MOR engine 4 minutes ROM engine © 4 minutes 9x engine: 4 minutes CAUTION: While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. 5. Remove 12V battery terminal. CAUTION: After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. INSTRUCTION 2 (FOR VEHICLES PARKED BY IGNITION SWITCH OFF) 4. Unlock the door with intelligent key or remote keyless entry, NOT! Atthis moment, ACC power is supplied Open the driver side door Open the hood, Close the driver side door. Walt at least 3 minutes. wRoN FL-27 PRECAUTIONS < PRECAUTION > [DIESEL ENGINE MODEL] CAUTION: While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. 6. Remove 12V battery terminal CAUTION: After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. General Precautions ‘nr cma 0r08 WARNING: When replacing fuel line parts, be sure to observe the following. + Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in the workshop. + Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and furnish workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. + Never smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work area, CAUTION: * Use diesel fuel required by the regulations for cetane number. Refer to Gi-30, "Fuel". * Before removing fuel line parts, perform out the following procedures: - Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put the lid on securely. Keep the container in safe area. - Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. + Always replace O-ring and clamps with new ones. + Never kink or twist tubes when they are being installed. + Never tighten hose clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses. + After installing tubes, check there is no fuel leakage at connections in the following steps. - Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leakage at connections. - Start engine and rev it up and check for fuel leakage at connections. * Drain water from fuel filter, when the water-in-fuel-filter warn- ing lamp turns ON (with fuel filter warning). Refer to EL-38, “Draining Water from Fuel Filter”. Teg 4 FL-28 < PREPARATION > PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools Tool number Tool name KVi01207S0 Unifie fuel look sing wrench PREPARATION [DIESEL ENGINE MODEL] bunntomas Removing and installing lock ring Description FL-29 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > SYSTEM DESCRIPTI COMPONENT PARTS Fuel Filter Sensor + Fuel filter sensor @ is integrated in the fUel filer and detects the water in the fuel filter. ® :Drainplug + When the water-infuelfilter waming lamp tums ON, drain water from fuel fiter. Refer to £1-38, "Draining Water from Fuel Filter’ NOTE: COMPONENT PARTS. ION [DIESEL ENGINE MODEL] TT Ifthe fuel filter warning lamp turns ON after draining water from fuel filter, perform the following, + Disconnect fuel filter sensor connector. + Check condition of the water-in-fuel-fiter warning lamp. ‘MWL-106, “Wiring Diagram” - If the warning lamp is OFF, replace the fuel filter sensor. FL-30 If the waming lamp is ON, check the hamess between combination meter and fuel filter sensor. Refer to STRUCTURE AND GPERATION < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DIESEL ENGINE MODEL] STRUCTURE AND OPERATION FUEL TRANSPORTATION IN FUEL TANK FUEL TRANSPORTATION IN FUEL TANK : System Description roe anon 836 i The electric fuel pump and the transfer jet pump are integrated with the main fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fue! pump assembly. This is installed to the fuel tank. ‘The transfer jet pumps draw up fuel using a flow of return fuel. The transfer jet pump (sub side) transfers fuel from the sub side to inside of the fuel pump assembly. The transfer jet pump (main side) transfers fuel from the main side to inside of the fuel pump assembly. The fuel sent to fuel pump assembly is supplied to the engine by an electric fuel pump. NOTE: Fuel on the sub side is consumed first LZ ~ elf A NY Ss [BIT { {= “9 NX SE | é © @ Suh hel vet sensor unt © Maint ier sencr nt WEE Fue mernese @ sweie © wanace © Feetine © eum ie © “Tereteretpurp ab se) ®Eecitel up @ Tanserlotpunp nan se) Trantor ube FL-31 SYSTEM < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DIESEL ENGINE MODEL] SYSTEM WARNING/INDICATOR (ON INFORMATION DISPLAY) WARNING/INDICATOR (ON INFORMATION DISPLAY) : Low fuel warning sroewnrn DESIGN/PURPOSE This wams the driver that the fuel level is low. OPERATION AT COMBINATION METER CAN COMMUNICATION CUT-OFF OR UNUSUAL SIG- NAL For the operation for CAN communications blackout or abnormal signal reception, refer to MWLI02, "Fail Sale’. SYSTEM DIAGRAM = el sane sgral Fustovet onsor SIGNAL PATH ‘The combination meter receives fuel level sensor signal (resistance value) from the fuel level sensor unit and indicates low fuel level warning on the vehicle information display when fuel level sensor signal (resistance value) is less than the specified value. LIGHTING CONDITION When all of the following conditions are satisfied + After a lapse of 15 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON. + Fuel level is lower than the specified level Fuel evel warning indlation tiring (Vehioe: Parked on the level) ‘Approx. 10.80 2-3/8 Imp gab or less Fuel level ; (fe tank dead aevount included) “Fueltank dead amount | Approx 280(2-4/8mpa) SHUTOFF CONDITION When any of the following conditions was satisfied: + Ignition switch is OFF + Fuel level is the specified level or more WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST FL-32 < SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning lamps/Indicator lamps SYSTEM [DIESEL ENGINE MODEL] Name Design Tarangemeniruncbon Regarding ihe arangement.Refer‘o MiNi METERSYSTE il Fuel er warning lamp a ding the function WARNING/INDICATORICHIME LIST : Warning/Indicator (On Information Display) Name Desion ‘ArangementFuncton Low fuel warning "i Regarding he arrangement. Refer o MiN-i0 “MEIER SYST: Bessa Regarding the function. Refer to FL-32.“WARNING/INDIGATOR (ON. INFORMATION DISPLAY) Low fuel waming® FL-33 FUEL SYSTEM < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [DIESEL ENGINE MODEL] PERIODIC MAINTENANCE FUEL SYSTEM Hydraulic Layout “nrmo ceewron armas MIT models @ Fuel ter @® Fuel pressure sensor ® Fueltecd tube @® Fuel retum tube @ Subfuellovel sensor assembly @)_ Ful tank Mal fue level sensor. el iter and fuel pump assembly @® Fuel pump ® Fuel cooling tube @® Fuel er tube FUEL SYSTEM < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [DIESEL ENGINE MODEL] CVT models ® Fuel titer ® Fuel pressure sensor @ Fuel pump @® Fustfeed tube © Fuelretum tube © Fuel cooling tube @ Subiuel level sensor assembly @_ Fuel tank @ Feel ilertube Main fuel level sensor, fue iter and ® ‘fuel pump assembly Inspection [DIESEL ENGINE MODEL] + After connecting fuel tube quick connectors, check quick con- nectors are secure. Quick connector Retainer Har tube (or the equivalent) Connection (cross-section) Resin tube “To under floor fuel tne To fuel tank 3@SOGGHO Tab ® Disconnection + Ensure that connector and resin tube never contact any adja- cent parts. FL-36 FUEL FILTER < PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > = IDIESEL ENGINE MODEL} FUEL FILTER ~ Exploded View wooowceronrness peer Ph2soce, 19) —_ 2 WL ——, a @ Fuel ter protector @ Fuel ter bracket @ Fuelretum hose @ Brecket © Fuel feed hose © Fuel feed hose @ Fuel pressure sensor @ Fuel ter @ Fuel return ube @ Fuelteca uve @ Tohuettank © Tolvel woe © Totus! pump 19) Nem Ke, rs) Ne kom.) © A -Incicates thatthe pais connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle Removal and Installation erin REMOVAL WARNING: Be careful of the following when replacing fuel system parts: + Display “CAUTION: flammable material”. + Keep away from flames, and work in a well-ventilated area. + Keep a fire extinguisher handy. + Keep drained fuel in a safe place. CAUTION: + Perform the operation with vehicle on level ground. + Do not bend and twist hose and tube. 1. Remove fuel fiter protector. 2. Disconnect fuel feed hoses and fuel return hose from fuel filter. CAUTION: Plug the pipe to prevent fuel from draining. FL-37

You might also like